Home

Panasonic Voice Mail Installation_Manual

1. Service 1 Day Mode for each trunk group 2 Night Mode for each trunk group 2 Trunk Service 3 Lunch Mode for each trunk group 4 Break Mode for each trunk group 4 Service 1 Automated 1 Department Setting Attendant Dialing 1 Operator 1 2 Operator s Parameter 1 Day Mode 2 Operator 2 3 Operator 3 1 Operator 1 2 Night Mode 2 Operator 2 3 Operator 3 1 Operator 1 3 Lunch Mode 2 Operator 2 3 Operator 3 1 Operator 1 4 Break Mode 2 Operator 2 3 Operator 3 1 Enter Extension 3 Alternate Extension 2 Delete Extension 3 Extension Listing 2 Custom z Service Custom Service No 1 100 Entry 1 Enter 3 Caller ID Call Routing 2 Delete 3 Caller ID Listing 228 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 1 Enter 5
2. number 1 through 100 To record custom service exit prompt press 0 Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 103 ELEVEN 103 104 ELEVEN HOUR 104 105 ELEVEN MINUTE 105 106 ELEVENTH 106 107 Enter 1 for AM or 2 for PM 107 108 Enter a class of service number from 108 1 to 64 109 Enter a group number from 1 to 9 109 110 Enter a group number 1 through 4 110 111 Enter a mailbox list number 111 112 Enter a message length from 1 to 6 112 minutes 113 Enter a message retention time up to 113 30 days 114 Enter a personal greeting length from 114 8 to 60 seconds 115 Enter delivery list number 1 or 2 115 116 Enter device number 1 through 3 116 117 Enter extension number 117 118 Enter question number followed by 118 the hash sign 119 Enter question number followed by 119 the pound sign 120 Enter the 4 digits password 120 747 120 746 121 Enter the caller ID number 121 822 82 122 Enter the caller name announcement 122 number 1 through 120 123 Enter the company greeting number 1 123 through 32 124 Enter the custom service prompt 124 352 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE pound sign Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 125 Enter the day of the month follo
3. Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 769 TWELVE HOUR 769 710 TWELVE MINUTE 770 771 TWENTY 771 772 TWENTY HOUR 772 773 TWENTY MINUTE 773 774 TWENTY EIGHT 774 775 TWENTY EIGHT MINUTE 775 776 TWENTY EIGHTH 776 777 TWENTY FIFTH 777 778 TWENTY FIRST 778 7719 TWENTY FIVE 779 780 TWENTY FIVE MINUTE 780 781 TWENTY FOUR 781 782 TWENTY FOUR HOUR 782 783 TWENTY FOUR MINUTE 783 784 TWENTY FOURTH 784 785 TWENTY NINE 785 786 TWENTY NINE MINUTE 786 787 TWENTY NINTH 787 788 TWENTY ONE 788 789 TWENTY ONE HOUR 789 790 TWENTY ONE MINUTE 790 791 TWENTY SECOND 791 792 TWENTY SEVEN 792 793 TWENTY SEVEN MINUTE 793 794 TWENTY SEVENTH 794 795 TWENTY SIX 795 796 TWENTY SIX MINUTE 796 79 TWENTY SIXTH 797 798 TWENTY THIRD 798 Installation Manual 389 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 799 TWENTY THREE 799 800 TWENTY THREE HOUR 800 801 TWENTY THREE MINUTE 801 802 TWENTY TWO 802 803 TWENTY TWO HOUR 803 804 TWENTY TWO MINUTE 804 805 TWENTYTH 805 806 TWO 806 807 TWO HOUR 807 808 TWO MINUTE 808 809 unsuccessful attempts to enter this 544 809 mailbox 810 Use call waiting on busy signal 81
4. Insert the RS 232C cable into the VPS with the connector indicating the same direction The cable must be shielded and no longer than 2 m 6 5 feet 40 Installation Manual INSTALLATION VPS 9 pin 9 pin Cable Printer IBM PC VPS 9 pin Table 7 Pin Configuration of the RS 232C Pin Circuit Signal Name Number RS 232C CCITT 1 FG Frame Ground AA 101 2 TXD Transmitted Data BA 103 3 RXD Received Data BB 104 4 RTS Request To Send CA 105 Installation Manual 41 INSTALLATION Table 7 Pin Configuration of the RS 232C Pin Circuit Signal Name Number RS 232C CCITT 6 DSR _ Data Set Ready CC 107 SG Signal Ground AB 102 8 DCD Data Carrier Detect CF 109 20 DTR Data Terminal Ready CD 108 2 2 8 3 RS 232C Signals Frame Ground FG Connects an external ground to the unit frame usually the ground pin of the AC power cord Transmitted Data TXD output Conveys signals from the unit to the terminal printer A mark condition is held unless data or BREAK signals are being transmitted Received Data RXD input Conveys signals from the terminal printer to the unit Request To Send RTS output This lead is held on whenever DSR is on Signal Ground SG Connects to the DC ground of the unit for al
5. Screws 3 MM iti e W DI IIC E 0 0 7 Replace the cover and secure the screw 8 Connect the AC cord to the VPS again 36 Installation Manual INSTALLATION 2 7 CONNECTIONS 2 7 Connecting to the PBX The VPS can be connected to up to 2 extension ports of the PBX Use a 4 conductor wire for connection with KX TA624 that uses APT Integration and for connection with KX T series systems that use DPT Integration Use a 2 conductor wire for connection to all other PBXs 4 Conductor Cable lf 11 lt x m B B Modular Connection B BLACK R RED Outer Pins G GREEN Inner Pins Y YELLOW RJ 11 Terminal wire RJ 11 ES S 1 4 DB R 3 2 2 7 2 Opening the Ferrite Core Insert your finger into the opening of the ferrite core and open it as shown below Connect a 4 conductor cable or 2 conductor cable to the VPS and run the cable through the ferrite core see the following sections Close the ferrite core Installation Manual 37 INSTALLATION 2 7 3 Connection for APT Integration Ports 1 2 of the VPS Telephone Line Modular Jacks To KX TA624 4 Extension Jacks 07 and 08 or 15 and 16 To Extension X x Port of the PBX eee 2 7 4 Connection for DPT Integration
6. Table 80 Prompt No Modifiable Prompts 417 Please wait a moment 818 Welcome to the general delivery mailbox 416 Please leave a message at the tone 668 To end recording hang up or press 1 for more features 702 To pause and restart recording press 2 732 To review press 1 603 To accept press 2 678 To erase and try again press 3 614 To add press 4 677 To erase and exit press X 697 To make this message private press 1 392 Otherwise press 2 531 Thank you for calling VM Prompts Table 81 Prompt No Modifiable Prompts 413 Please enter your party s mailbox number AA Prompts Table 82 Prompt No Modifiable Prompts 412 Please enter your party s extension 825 You have a call 502 Sorry no one is available to answer the call 695 To leave a message press 1 672 To enter another extension press 510 Sorry this line is busy Installation Manual 345 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 82 Prompt No Modifiable Prompts 276 If you would like to hold press 1 622 To cancel holding press 2 now Otherwise I ll try your party again 346 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS The table below shows the modifiable prompts Record prompts as User 1 or User 2 Some of the modifiable prompts are listed along with their linked prompt number Whenever possible record related prompts together so that the assembled sentence flows
7. Table 85 317 Message recorded by mailbox number 325 Message transferred via mailbox number 13 and transferred via mailbox number 12 and mailbox number 12 and mailbox number 318 Message recorded on date 824 You have number 17 at time 330 Messages Message Scan Table 86 305 Message from name 816 was sent on date 17 at time Message Delivery Table 87 594 This message will be delivered on day 17 at time Personal Group Distribution List Table 88 821 You can add up to number 335 more members Check Mailbox Distribution Table 89 304 Message for name 323 Message sent on date 432 received on date 17 at time 17 at time 197 for mailbox number 197 for mailbox number 258 has been erased because message retention time expired 259 has not been received Installation Manual 397 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE External Message Delivery Table 90 158 External delivery message scheduled for 592 This message is from name name 379 on date 377 of company name 17 at time 157 External delivery message for name 161 External delivery message will be sent to 815 was erased name 447 right away 24 because message retention time expired 324 Message to name 272 Ill redial number 31 being delivered now 337 more times Message Waiting Not
8. Ei kev Data Line Mode Call Waiting Tone Type LCS Setting C Yes Ho Tone1 Tone2 e Active Call Pickup D Language Operation Mode C Private Hands free Se en guag Recording Mode C Keep Rec Stop Rec C Enable Disable English C French LCS Password 3 Digits Station Lock Password ISDN Bearer Mode __ JOG Dial Speed CLIP Number Max 16 Digits Call Log Incoming Normal E Overwrite Mode Yes C Ho Private sd Lock Password 3 Digits D 4 2 Extension Line sl OK Apply Cancel Help 2 Select the Card No and Port No which you are going to program 3 In LCS Settings a To set LCS Password Enter a 3 digit number using 0 9 in LCS Password Note To cancel the password erase the 3 digit number b To assign LCS Recording Mode Set Recording Mode to Keep Rec or Stop Rec C To assign LCS Private Hands free Mode Set Operation Mode to Private or Hands free d To activate the LCS status Set Status to Active Note To utilize the Live Call Screening features it is necessary to first assign the LCS Password and LCS Button see 4 5 12 Button Assignment via PC Programming and then activate the LCS status 4 Click Apply 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each extension 108 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 4 5 7 Live Call Screening Button Assignment via Station Programmi
9. Installation Manual 9 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 4 4 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TA1232 AND KX TD308 Notes Do not use system programs 106 or 602 for DPT Integration The next 2 sections 4 4 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Manager s Extension and 4 4 2 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool are for the KX TD1232 as examples Please refer to them for the KX TD816 or KX TA1232 e And the following Section 4 4 5 KX TD308 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Manager s Extension is for the KX TD308 4 4 1 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Manager s Extension It is important that the KX TD1232 has the proper software level to allow DPT Integration with the VPS Follow the procedures below to confirm the software level then complete the required programming before starting up the VPS Note Two methods of programming are available on the KX TD1232 The instructions below show how to program without the operating and maintenance tool For instructions on programming with the operating and maintenance tool please see 4 4 2 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool All o
10. Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 253 greeting is not recorded 38 253 254 Group member deleted 254 255 Group name erased 255 256 Group name not recorded 256 257 Group number number 257 258 has been erased because message 323 17 197 258 retention time expired 259 has not been received 323 17 197 259 318 17 197 259 260 HASH 260 261 Hello this is the voice processing 261 system 262 Not available 263 Hello this is voice processing system 263 with the following information More than 80 of flash memory space is now utilized Please erase unnecessary messages 264 hours time 72 264 332 72 264 265 HUNDRED 265 266 I have a call for name 266 266 247 267 I have a call for mailbox mailbox 267 number 267 247 268 I have a message for name 268 711 690 268 711 690 275 269 I was unable to reach name 269 270 I ll notify by beeper 270 271 I ll notify by telephone 271 272 Ill redial number 272 337 273 I ll redial only once 273 Installation Manual 359 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 274 If you are using a rotary telephone 274 618 stay on the line 274 275 If you want me to call back later 268 711
11. To access the proper menu for Day Mode features for the selected PBX trunk CO line group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 2 Trunk Group No 1 48 1 Note The maximum number of trunk CO line groups depends on the VPS model Table 43 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Company 1 32 Specifies the company greeting to be played on the trunk Greeting No S System CO line group Greeting N None The System Greeting is Good Morning Afternoon System Evening Welcome to the Voice Processing System Greeting Note This feature is available with the KX TVS80 only Incoming Call 1 Voice Mail Specifies one of 4 incoming call services Service 2 Auto Attn 3 Interview Note 1 When you specify the Interview Service one of 4 Custom subscriber s Interview Mailbox numbers should also be 5 None specified None Note 2 When you specify the Custom service one of 100 1 100 Custom service numbers should also be specified Incoming Call 1 System Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on Service Prompt 2 User 1 this trunk CO line group When set to Selective the 3 User 2 caller can select the language of his choice provided the 4 Selective Message Manager has recorded the Multilingual Selection User 1 Menu and the System Administrator has specified Prompt Selection Number in System User 1 User 2 Prompt Selection Number in Table 59 in
12. Class of Service COS No 1 62 Used to define the set of services available to the subscriber No 1 Note 1 We recommend that parameters for each COS number be defined before assigning a Class of Service COS numter Note 2 COS No 63 pertains to the Message Manager while COS No 64 pertains to the System Manager These numbers cannot be entered in the COS No data field Covering 2 5 digits Identifies the extension number that will receive Extension None unanswered subscriber calls The Automated Attendant Service accomplishes this call transfer The caller is given the option of transferring the call or leaving a message in the subscriber s mailbox The Covering Extension is one of the Incomplete Call Handling Service options that can be enabled or disabled by the subscriber using the telephone keypad Note The Extension Group List or Logical Extension Numbers cannot be assigned as covering extensions Installation Manual 231 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 37 Parameter Value Range Default Description Function Interview Mailbox Number 2 5 digits None Permits a mailbox owner to own an interview mailbox The interview mailbox number must be an unassigned mailbox number Note The replies to an interview session constitute one message If the subscriber expects many interview messages Mailbox Capacity Maximum Messages see Table 40 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRAT
13. Quick Setup Mailbox Editing Extension and mailbox list Assigned 30 Vacant 0 Page 1 4 Ext MBX Owner Last Name MAKE Make Delete eee 101 110 110 14 111 112 112 113 113 114 114 115 115 116 116 117 117 Previous menu N Next menu S Next Screen a To create or discard mailboxes In the MAKE Make Delete field Type M Make to create the mailbox Type D Delete to discard the mailbox If there are more than 30 or 62 with the KX TVS80 mailboxes the first 30 or 62 of them are displayed with Make and the rest are displayed with Delete screen output Assigned 30 62 Vacant 0 To change the status of a mailbox from Delete to Make first change the status of a mailbox from Make to Delete screen output Assigned 29 61 Vacant 1 Then change the status from Delete to Make b Owner s last name Up to 16 alphabetic characters can be assigned as an Owner s Last Name Note Mailbox numbers displayed on this screen Panasonic KX TD Series or KX TA1232 System The same numbers as the extensio
14. The PBX is a correct type but does not have the Contact National Parts Center proper software level to support APT DPT at 1 800 833 9626 Integration or use Inband Integration under hardware settings The PBX is not programmed properly to support Do required integration APT DPT Integration programming as described in this chapter 10 Start up completed a The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start up has been successful The delay varies according to the system s condition b ON LINE MODE is displayed c System prompt gt is displayed on the screen To enter system administration Press ENTER All parameters can be set through the menu driven program 11 Go to the System Administration Top Menu Type 5 and Press ENTER or Type 3 then QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration Instructions CAUTION When 2 VPSs are connected to the KX TA624 the following 2 procedures should be done to make the VPSs work correctly 1 Delete a mailbox in either VPS so that each extension has only ONE MAILBOX After Auto Configuration has been executed an extension has a mailbox in both VPS1 and VPS2 However each extension can have a maximum of 1 mailbox in either VPS To delete a mailbox Type D Delete in the Make Make Delete field see Step 4 Creating Mailboxes in 5 1 3 Starting the Quick Setup The extension should assign a Voice Mail extension from the
15. 1 Hold Automatically places the caller on hold and the Operator 1 extension is called again 2 No Answer Coverage Offers the option specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller 3 Call Waiting Signals the Operator 1 when another call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX 4 Disconnect Message Disconnects the caller after playing Thank you for calling Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 45 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default No Answer 1 Caller Select Specifies how to handle Operator 1 calls when not Coverage 2 Leave Message answered within the time period set by the Operator No Mode 3 Disconnect Answer Time mode Message 4 Next Operator Caller Select 1 Caller Select Allows the caller to leave a message or call another extension In some cases a call to another extension is not available For more information see the Note on Caller Select in Table 24 in 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters 2 Leave Message Instructs the caller to leave a message in Operator 1 s mailbox 3 Disconnect Message Disconnects the caller after playing Thank you for calling 4 Next Operator Transfers the caller to Operator 2 Message 1 3 times Specifies the number of times the VPS will play the Repeat Cycle 3 Automated Attendant top menu Note Extension Call Forwarding to the VPS can override the operator c
16. Installation Manual 199 SYSTEM FEATURES Integration Only subscribers listen to the messages from assigned numbers left in their mailboxes 2 the VPS transfers calls from assigned numbers to the subscribers Caller ID Screening and 3 the VPS pages the subscribers by intercom Intercom Paging Caller ID Screening is enabled or disabled in the COS Class of Service settings If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both the system and personal caller name announcement the VPS will use the personal caller name Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Caller Name allows subscribers to assign up to 30 Caller See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR Announcement ID numbers and record a caller name for each DIGITAL INTEGRATION Personal Caller ID number from their telephone The See Number of CIDs for Caller APT DPT caller name is announced when 1 Name Announcement and Caller ID Screening in Table 40 inB3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Caller Name Announcement System Personal in Glossary See 4 12 Personal Caller Name Announcement in the Subscriber s Guide Caller Name Announcement System APT DPT Integration Only allows the System Administrator to assign up to 120 Caller ID numbers Each Caller ID number can have a caller name recorded by the Message Manager The caller name i
17. 3 4 A A 2 1 2 1 5 0700 3 4 A A Trunk Day mode Night mode Lunch mode Break mode Grt Srv Grt Srv Grt Srv Grt Srv 1 SYS A A SYS V M SYS V M SYS A A 2 SYS SYS V M SYS V M SYS A A Holiday List Name of Holiday Start End Grt Srv Port Trunk NEW YEAR S DAY JAN 1 15 C S 100 1 2 1 48 SPRING HOLIDAY MAR 24 APR 5 16 C S 99 1 2 1 48 VM Voice Mail Service Cis Custom Service A A Automated Attendant LS Interview Service Service Grt Company Greeting Trunk data Trunks 1 and 2 are shown above is shown only when 1 or more service mode is not NONE By default all trunks for all modes are NONE 7 3 4 Call Account Report The VPS can store information for up to 64 outgoing calling sequences for accounting and billing purposes Outgoing calling information includes the mailbox numbers that executed outgoing calls the telephone numbers called the call dates and call duration times When the number of outgoing calling sequences reaches 64 the first 10 items are automatically sent to the terminal Any information sent to the terminal is automatically deleted from the system s memory To select the Call Account Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 4 Call Account NOV 14 2001 3 40 PM MBOX 111 JAN 4 7 46 PM 00 01 32 DIAL 91111111 MBOX 116 JAN 7 2 26 PM 00 03 32 DIAL 92222222 MBOX 114 JAN 7 5 06 PM 00 02 45 DIAL 93333333
18. LR ine ROUTER se 19 1 3 2 System Components ebrei tog rede eq eere a 19 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible essen 21 1 3 4 Installer Equipment and Software Requirements seen 23 1 325 Specifications cen eed e Re EL Re ense eoe ue De ape nbs 23 1 3 6 Hardwate 5 euenire eet de Haee ees ees 23 1 3 7 Flash Memory Expansion Capabilities KX TVS50 23 1 3 8 Recommendations for System Configuration eene 24 1 4 DIGITAL INTEGRATION eere eese 25 L4 General igienici narnia esiliati 25 142 APT Integration uite AE Enia lane 25 1 4 3 Connection Example APT Integration eeceeeeneeeseeeneceeeceseesseesaeceaeeneeeaes 25 1 44 DPT Integration niente eei e Den eroe tede 26 1 4 5 Connection Example DPT Integration i 26 2 INSTALLATION 2 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS oi 28 onera eder een ee ees 28 2 1 2 WITIDS 5n 29 2 2 UNPACKING 30 2 3 MOUNTING THE VPS ON THE WALL wiccssosciscsscsssevsssecesocvencsscsontsesscoegoseaverenienceese 31 2 4 FRAME GROUND CONNECTION ccccssssssssesrescssecsecssrssesseesecsscsscsscesssecsscseenes 32 2 5 INSTALLATION STEPS odo vera fepe i eK ens a eua 33 2 6 INSTALLING AN
19. shown To access the proper menu for Extension Group Delete follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 2 2 Group List No Extension Group Listing Displays all Extension Group List numbers as shown To access the proper menu for Extension Group List Numbers follow the menu path System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 2 3 268 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B6 2 Time Service To access the proper menu for Time Service follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 Time Service Service Mode The VPS automatically activates the appropriate call handling method according to the Time Service setting Day Night Lunch and Break Services however the System Administrator or the System Manager can change the current call handling method by selecting a specific Service Mode To access the proper menu for Time Service Service Mode for the selected time group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 1 Installation Manual 269 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 53 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Service 1 Automatic Assigns a specific Service Mode There are 6 options Mode Mode available 2 Manual Day Mode 1 Automatic Mode Operates according to the setting in 3 Manual the Time Service Night Mode 2 Manual Day Mode Operates only i
20. 1 Enter the data using the following table as a guide Table 25 Value Range ae i Description Default Description Function The Extension 2 5 Digits Sets the extension to be used in conjunction with the of the Owner None mailbox Any valid number can be assigned Owner First Up to 16 The Dial by Name feature uses the last name Both will Name alphabetic be printed on mailbox report Owner Last characters Name None Class of COS No 1 62 Defines a set of services available to each subscriber The Service No 1 Class of Services 63 and 64 are fixed to the Message and System Managers Most subscribers can be placed in the same COS Anyone who needs unclaimed messages forwarded to a cell phone beeper or another mailbox would need to be in a separate COS Installation Manual 143 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Table 25 Description IUD Description Function Covering 2 5 Digits Specifies where a caller will be transferred when Extension Covering Extension is dialed or set under Incomplete Call None Handling Interview 2 5 Digits Used to permit mailbox owner to have an interview Mailbox mailbox Must be an unused mailbox Number None All Calls 1 Yes If set to Yes calls coming to the extension through Transfer to 2 No Automated Attendant go directly to the mailbox without Mailbox ringing the extension Message Waiting Lamp will not No be turned on From Mai
21. 323 C10 LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER 324 Appendix D MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D1 ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX eerte 326 D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY 6 327 D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION scssssssssssessesesceneees 329 D4 CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S 332 05 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK e eere eese czeseceerio nere reo rione setas enses sna 334 D6 RECORDING MESSAGES eere sees eee ee estes enses senatus tosta eee nio nine 336 D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET e eeeeeee eese essen seen tenens tasses 341 08 LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SERVICE 344 D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS eeeeee esee entente setae ta sensns snae ce zio 347 12 Installation Manual Table of Contents Installation Manual 13 Table of Contents 14 Installation Manual VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW Section 1 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW Installation Manual 15 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO 1 1 1 Why Voice Processing The VPS handles incoming and outgoing calls When a call comes in it answers forwards to appropriate extensions takes and stores messages and
22. LPR Version f Check the information of CPU Card Information and confirm the Software Version of the KX TD500 The software version must be Q171A or higher for DPT Integration to be utilized Notes Ifthe software version of the KX TD500 is lower than this you may not be able to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration For more information call National Parts Center at 1 800 833 9626 In the example below Q171AB represents the software version and 010427A represents the software production date code year month day Screen output GPLI Gard Information Software Version Q171AB010427A Area Code 1 Installation Manual 85 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 2 Assignment of the ports to be connected to the VPS a Go to the 1 3 Extension Port Assignment screen b Select the appropriate VPS card 101 DLC DHLC in the Card menu Set the attribute of the valid ports to be connected to the VPS to VPS DPT d Click Apply to save the changed data Note The parameters except for Attribute will disappear and the DN Directory Number will be cleared Screen output 1 3 Extension Port Assignment M Port E Ho Attribute Tel Type DH GroupHo Parallel XDP Status 1 VPS DPT 2 r L gt r w alala Lll c 4 c 22 Le lt fe Unknow
23. Note In the table below the sub parameter Prompt for Rotary Callers is underlined This sub parameter can be assigned only when Incoming Call Service Prompt is set to Selective Table 23 Description Value Range Description Function Default Company 1 32 Specifies the company greeting to be played on the port Greeting No S System Greeting The System Greeting is Good Morning Afternoon N None Evening Welcome to the Voice Processing System System Note Greeting Company Greeting is only available with the KX TVS80 Incoming Call Service 1 Voice Mail 2 Auto Attn 3 Interview 4 Custom Auto Attn Specifies one of 4 incoming call services Notes When you specify the Interview Service one of Subscriber s Interview mailbox numbers should also be specified When you specify the Custom Service one of 100 1 100 Custom Service numbers should also be specified Installation Manual 137 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Table 23 Description Value Range Description Function Default Incoming Call 1 System Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on Service 2 User 1 this port When set to Selective the caller can select the Prompt 3 User 2 language of his choice provided the Message Manager has recorded the Multilingual Selection Menu and the 4 Selective System Administrator has specified Prompt Selection User 1 N
24. 1 The VPS is used as the no answer destination for the Intercept Routing feature of your PBX 2 DIL 1 N CO line to several extensions terminates on telephones and VPS ports To give the telephone users a chance to answer calls the VPS lines should be programmed for delayed ringing Otherwise the VPS will answer the calls immediately Delete Message Confirmation The VPS requests confirmation from the mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the mailbox Delivery Time The time specified by the subscriber for the VPS to deliver a prerecorded message You can specify delivery time in External Delivery Message or when delivering a message to other subscribers Subscriber s Guide Section 3 1 Department Dialing A speed dialing feature that permits an outside caller to dial a single digit 1 9 to reach a specific extension Direct Mailbox Access Available with APT DPT Integration only A subscriber can enter his mailbox directly when he calls the VPS from his extension He does not have to enter any special codes except for his password if one is established DPT Integration Digital integration between the VPS and the KX TD816 the KX TD1232 the KX TA1232 the KX TD308 or the KX TD500 Requires upgraded software in the PBX Depending on the model and or the software version of the connected PBX you may not be able to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration For more information call National Parts Ce
25. 392 651 392 276 392 533 647 392 654 392 720 392 653 392 42 647 392 393 Owner s extension is extension 393 number 394 Owner s extension is not assigned 394 395 Owner s extension number is deleted 395 396 Owner s name erased 396 397 Owner s name is name 397 398 Owner s name is deleted 398 399 Owner s name is not recorded 399 400 Password deleted 400 401 Password entry failure 401 Check the password 402 Password is number 402 403 Password not assigned 403 404 PAUSE 404 405 Personal greeting for caller ID 405 disabled 406 Personal greeting for caller ID 406 enabled 407 Personal greeting length is time 407 454 408 Play system prompt after personal 408 greeting disabled 409 Play system prompt after personal 409 greeting enabled 410 Please call telephone number 410 Installation Manual 365 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 411 Please enter your callback number 411 822 82 411 822 82 820 412 Please enter your party s extension 412 675 412 675 202 412 674 412 674 202 413 Please enter your party s mailbox 413 675 number 413 675 618 413 674 413 674 618 414 Please hold while I page your party 414 415 Please inform system mana
26. 6 1 4 Recording the Company Name Enter 6 998 5 2 KX TVS80 only 153 6 1 5 Custom Service Greetings Enter 6 998 5 4 153 6 1 6 Customizing User Prompts Enter 6 998 5 6 154 62 SETTING UP BOXES va nite oae In SPESE S UNE 155 6 2 1 Recording Personal Greetings sees rennen 155 6 2 2 Recording the Owner s Name e 156 6 3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM rici Lune Rees npe ie aane 157 7 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 4 INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM eeeeeeee eese teen en sense ce totns tosta rio neo nio nionecene 160 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS 4 d E bn Eau pH NES E SERE acuta ee rU ra 162 17 2 1 OH lme Set OPEN vice nete era tenerte tot rtt e e 163 7 2 2 On line Set ONLN E eed eet te pi ei i 163 4 2 3 Set Password PASS etie ies ceto escas ea Coss ede eae aia 163 1 24 Set Ime CLIMB ebbe eed 164 7 2 5 Print Reports at Specified Time PSET eene 165 1 26 ErrorLog Display EEOG urne e t gt Lia retient 166 7 27 Saving the System Data to the Backup Device 168 7 2 8 Loading New or Saved Data to the VPS LOAD 170 7 2 9 Print All of the VPS Parameters enne nennen 171 7 2 10 Program Versio
27. 690 275 press 3 276 If you would like to hold press 1 276 392 277 Incorrect entry 277 278 Intercom paging disabled 278 279 Intercom paging enabled 279 280 Intercom paging group number is 280 number 281 Interview mailbox number is 281 mailbox number 282 Interview mailbox number is deleted 282 283 Interview mailbox number is not 283 assigned 284 JANUARY 284 285 JULY 285 286 JUNE 286 287 Leaving a message is disabled 287 288 Leaving a message is enabled 288 289 Mailbox 289 289 73 290 Mailbox is in use 290 291 Mailbox list label erased 291 292 Mailbox list number number 292 293 Mailbox number already specified 293 294 MARCH 294 295 Maximum number of caller IDs for 295 caller name announce is number 296 Maximum number of messages per 296 mailbox is number 297 MAY 297 360 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 298 Message back up disabled 298 299 Message back up enabled 299 300 Message cancel for live call screening 300 disabled 301 Message cancel for live call screening 301 enabled 302 Message delivery canceled 302 303 Message erased 303 304 Message for name 304 432 17 305 Message from name 305 816 17 306 Message from th
28. Ports 1 2 of the VPS Telephone Line Modular Jacks PORT 1 PORT 2 4 To a KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration Any Extension Jack except Jack 01 To Extension Y Y Port of the PBX LE 38 Installation Manual INSTALLATION 2 7 5 Connection for Non APT DPT Integration Ports 1 2 of the VPS Telephone Line Modular Jacks To Extension Ports of Non APT DPT Integration PBX Boe BQ To Extension Port of the PBX Installation Manual 39 INSTALLATION 2 5 TERMINAL CONNECTION 2 8 1 Requirements for Connecting Programming Terminal The programming terminal must be connected with a serial cable with an RS 232C connector at the RS 232C port This must be a null modem cable This enables system administration system setup mailbox setup and system diagnosis to be performed Communication parameters of the VPS have been set to the following values at the factory Table 6 COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS Baud Rate 9600 bps Word Bit Length 8 Bits Parity None Stop Bit Length Bit 2 8 2 Connecting the RS 232C Cable RECOMMENDED Before connecting the cable switch off the power on both the data terminal and the VPS KRAS RAI MRM TEE Panasonic
29. 648 201 210 212 670 press 3 711 663 648 201 210 670 649 To check the mailbox distribution 711 663 652 649 200 212 670 press 4 650 To clear all mailbox usage counts 751 650 press 2 651 To continue holding press 1 651 392 652 To customize your mailbox press 752 745 652 742 699 670 752 745 652 742 699 868 670 711 663 652 649 200 212 670 653 To delete all caller ID numbers press 653 392 1 654 To delete all group members press 1 654 392 655 To delete distribution verification of 655 this message press 1 To cancel message delivery press 2 656 To delete group members press 3 626 606 656 731 657 To delete members press 2 611 657 733 378 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 658 To delete the password press 1 658 694 659 To delete press 1 659 708 659 705 659 694 660 To delete press 2 612 660 733 612 660 733 604 661 To delete press 3 647 603 661 612 907 661 908 662 To deliver a broadcast message press 662 663 1 663 To deliver a message press 2 711 663 648 201 210 212 670 711 663 648 201 210 670 711 663 652 649 200 212 670 662 6
30. 67 Day mode second operator s 67 extension is not assigned 68 Day mode third operator s extension 68 is extension number 69 Day mode third operator s extension 69 is not assigned 70 days 70 339 70 449 70 71 DECEMBER 71 72 Delay time is time 72 264 332 72 264 72 332 73 deleted 289 73 74 Delivering message to name 74 75 Delivery list number is number 75 76 Department dialing menu erased 76 77 Department dialing menu is menu 77 350 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 78 Device notification for unreceived message disabled 79 Device notification for unreceived message enabled 80 Device number is number 81 DIAL TONE 82 digits 865 822 82 411 822 82 822 82 820 121 822 82 875 822 82 83 Direct mailbox access disabled 84 Direct mailbox access enabled 85 EIGHT 86 EIGHT HOUR 87 EIGHT MINUTE OWE EIGHT 88 EIGHTEEN 89 EIGHTEEN HOUR 90 EIGHTEEN MINUTE 91 EIGHTEENTH 92 EIGHTH 93 EIGHTY 94 EIGHTY EIGHT 95 EIGHTY FIVE 96 EIGHTY FOUR 97 EIGHTY NINE 98 EIGHTY ONE 99 EIGHTY SEVEN 100 EIGHTY SIX 100 101 EIGHTY THREE 101 102 EIGHTY TWO 102 Installation Manual 351 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE
31. 743 628 869 637 To change the personal greeting 637 636 634 743 press 637 636 634 743 628 637 636 634 743 628 869 638 To change the recipient s name press 641 636 638 643 3 639 To change the setting press 1 639 603 733 640 To change the specified prompt press 640 18 change all prompts press 2 641 To change the telephone number 641 636 638 643 press 1 642 To change the time and date press 2 635 642 621 642 643 To change the time and date press 4 641 636 638 643 644 To change this question press 1 644 748 749 689 645 To change to the next person press 2 619 645 756 646 To change user prompt 1 press 1 646 To change user prompt 2 press 2 Installation Manual 377 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 647 To change press 1 647 603 532 647 392 533 647 392 647 603 661 647 603 682 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 691 647 613 647 603 721 647 603 733 608 692 693 647 603 733 608 692 693 691 42 647 392 41 647 603 647 750 757 647 750 647 750 911 648 To check the mailbox distribution 711 663
32. AM PM in 2 After User 2 Prompts are in use This parameter specifies the Time Stamp for 3 24 h following User 1 Prompt After Position of AM PM in Time Stamp for User 2 Prompt 1 Before the VPS announces AM PM before the time e g PM 3 42 2 After The VPS announces AM P e g 3 42 after the time 3 24 h the VPS announces the time in 24 h format g 15 42 Note When System Prompts are in use the parameter is set to After Installation Manual 217 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B6 6 System Caller Name Announcement Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be assigned to announce prerecorded Caller ID caller names when extension users listen to messages from the assigned numbers left in their mailbox Extension users can also hear caller names when the VPS forwards calls from the assigned numbers to them Caller ID Screening The recorded caller names will also play when the callers use the Intercom Paging features the recorded names will be added to the end of the page The Caller ID Screening feature is enabled or disabled in the COS Class of Service settings This feature is also enabled by selecting Call Screening in 4 1 Call Transfer Status in the Subscriber s Guide The Intercom Paging feature is enabled by selecting Intercom Paging in 4 1 Call Transfer Status and or in 4 3 Incomplete Call Handling Status in the Subscriber s Guide The Message Manager
33. B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE One of 4 incoming call services can be assigned to each VPS port and each PBX trunk CO line group Voice Mail Automated Attendant Interview or Custom Service The Port Assignment menu and Trunk Group Assignment menu allow the Company Greeting Number KX TVS80 only Prompt Mode and Delayed Answer Time to be programmed Services have this order of priority Holiday Service gt Caller ID Call Routing gt Trunk Service gt Port Service Holiday Service has the highest priority To access the proper menu for Port Trunk Service Menu follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 B4 1 Port Assignment To access the proper menu for Day Night Lunch or Break Mode for the selected port follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 Port No 1 2 Port 1 2 Day Mode To access the proper menu for Day Mode features for the selected port follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 Port No 1 2 1 Note In Tables 42 and 43 the sub parameter Prompt for Rotary Callers is underlined This sub parameter can be assigned only when Incoming Call Service Prompt is set to Selective Installation Manual 247 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 42 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Company 1 32 Specifies the company greeting to be pl
34. Day Mode 412 Night Mode and 413 Lunch Mode Outside CO Line Mode Set the mode for each outside CO line to Normal Use System Programs 414 Day Mode 415 Night Mode and 416 Lunch Mode to set this parameter c If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by user extensions 56 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS Flexible Ringing Assignment For each outside CO line use System Programs 408 Day Mode 409 Night Mode and 410 Lunch Mode to enable ringing on every extension jack that you want to have ring Delayed Ringing Assignment To give users time to answer the call before the VPS picks up we recommend setting the delay to a few seconds for each extension connected to the VPS Use System Programs 411 Day Mode 412 Night Mode and 413 Lunch Mode Outside CO Line Mode Set the mode for each outside CO line to Normal Use System Programs 414 Day Mode 415 Night Mode and 416 Lunch Mode to set this parameter CAUTION DO NOT create a mailbox in both VPS for the same extension Each extension can have a maximum of 1 mailbox in either VPS The extension should assign a Voice Mail extension from the VPS which contains its mailbox as the destination for Call Forwarding and Voice Mail Transfer DO NOT assign a Voice Mail extension from the other VPS For example if jack 06 extension 106 has its mailbox in the VPS1 assign e
35. Extn Mbx No 5 Wait for Second Digit 1 5 s 6 No DTMF Input Operation c a f a Transfer to Mailbox b Transfer to Extension c Operator d Exit e Previous Menu f Custom Service Select Operation 7 Keypad Assignment Keypad 0 a Transfer to Mailbox h Call Transfer Service b Transfer to Extension i Subscriber Service c Operator j Department Dialing d Exit k Dial by Name e Previous Menu 1 Repeat Menu f Custom Service m Main Menu g Voice Mail Service n Fax Transfer Installation Manual 129 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Enter data into the Custom Service menu use the table below as a guide others None Table 21 Description Value Range Description Function Default Prompt Mode 1 System Specifies the language that the caller will hear when 2 User 1 calling this Custom Service 3 User 2 System Menu Repeat 1 3 Times Specifies the number of times the Custom Service Cycle 3 menu will be repeated before the No DTMF Input entry is used Call Transfer Extn Mbx No Specifies where a caller will be transferred when Any Time Extn dialing an extension or mailbox number during the menu If this entry is set to Extn the caller will be transferred to the corresponding extension If it is set to Mbx the caller will be sent directly to the corresponding mailbox If it is set to No extension transfer and mailbox transfer are disabled on
36. FIX FTX FIX A FTX FTX FTX Extension A A A A A A Transfer Sequence Reconnect FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW Sequence on Busy Reconnect FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW Sequence on No Answer Reconnect FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW Sequence on Refuse Call Light On N A T701X T 91X TX9X 701 701 T701X T701X Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp Light Off N A T702X T 90X T 9X T700X T700X T702X T700X Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp 52 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS Table 12 PBX Type Other T308 T1232 T96 T336 TD816 TD308 TA series TD500 Manufac T616 TD1232 turers TA1232 Call Waiting 1 N A N A 1 1 1 1 Sequence Release i N A F N A N A F F F F Sequence for Call Waiting Check with manufacturer N A Not Available A Adding A for answer to the operator and extension transfer eliminates the message You have a call when the AA transfers a call The VPS disconnects after line is answered Adding D for disconnect creates a blind transfer 3 3 2 KX T123211D Software Verification and Programming for Inband Integration 1 Check the software version of the KX T123211D by using System Program 98 which shows the software version number Y201Z940430 TM3 The underlined digits represent the
37. Hot Hot EI co 08 CO 09 CO 10 CO 11 CO 12 Hot Hot Hot md Hot m Hot Hot mm 01 co 02 CO 03 co 04 CO 05 CO 06 Hot Hot Hot Hot Hot OK Help 4 Click the Key Number to which a button will be assigned Flexible CO Key screen displays Screen output Flexible CO Key 10 KeyType TEESE Ural i Ringing Type Immediate Installation Manual 113 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 5 Select the desired Key Type When 2WAY REC 2WAY TRN or VTR is selected enter the extension number in DN Example screen output Flexible CO Key eroe TAA DH 6 Click OK Flexible CO Key screen for all CO Keys displays again 7 Click OK 4 2 Extension Line screen displays again 8 Click OK or Apply 9 Repeat these steps for each extension 4 5 13 Live Call Screening Activation To activate the Live Call Screening status follow the steps below PC programming is also available for KX TD500 users see 4 5 6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming Press the assigned LCS Button Press the assigned LCS Password Confirm the assigned LCS Button is red on A U UN Repeat these steps for each telephone Conditions To activate the Live Call Screening features it is necessary to light the LCS button after assigning the LCS password and LCS button
38. Installation Manual Blank Prompt No Prompt No with an OFF Note SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING The prompt has not been recorded but the default System Prompt is active WILL BE HEARD The prompt has been recorded WILL BE HEARD WILL NOT BE HEARD The prompt has never been recorded and the default prompt has been turned off WILL NOT BE HEARD The prompt has been recorded but is turned off The Total Number of Registered shown at the bottom of the screen does not include the prompts that have been turned off 7 2 16 Utility Command List HELP Use the HELP command to display the list of all available utility commands 1 Type HELP then Press RETURN HELP OFLN ONLN PASS TIME PSET ELOG SAVE LOAD GPRN VERS CREP no CCLR no MWL MRL MPLT opt QSET LMON PUTD WCID System Off line System On line Password setting Time amp Date setting Report Print Out Time setting Device Error Log Listing VPS Program amp Date Save VPS gt PC Xmodem VPS Program amp Date Load VPS PC Xmodem Parameter Global Printing only ASCII Terminal mode Program Version Check Custom Menu Information List no Custom Menu No 1 100 Custom Menu Access Counter Clear no Custom Menu No 1 100 0 0 Clear All MWL Retry count Set 1 3 Minimum Recording Length Set 0 3 Registered User Prompt No List opt
39. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING COS Assignments JUL 29 2001 11 30 AM COS GL RtN RtS Ln CaN CaT RO SI SP CW MC DM PG Pr RCDC CN GC CS MN ED pr AF mbox dl md 1 16 10 10 5 10 10 L N N N N N 1 ULIN N 30 Y Y X X Ul c 2 16 7 7 3 1010 L Y N N N N 2 UIN N30 Y Y X X Ul 3 8 7 7 3 10 10 E Y N N N N 3 S NN 30 Y Y X c 63 30 6 U 100100 L N UNN X 64 30 6 6 100100 L N Ul N COS Class of Service number GL Personal Greeting Length RIN New Message Retention RtS Saved Message Retention Time Ln Message Length Time CaN Maximum Message U Unlimited CaT Maximum Message Time RO Message Retrieval Order U Unlimited L LIFO F FIFO SI Message Scanning with SP Play System Prompt after Information Personal Greeting CW Use Call Waiting on Busy DM Direct Mailbox Access PG Intercom Paging Group Pr Prompt Mode S System Prompts Ul User 1 Prompts U2 User 2 Prompts RC Remote Call Forward to CO DC Delete Message Confirmation CN Maximum number of names GC Play Personal Greeting for for Personal Caller Name Caller ID Announcement CS Caller ID Screening MN Authorization for Message Waiting Notification ED pr Authorization for External AF Authorization for Auto Message Delivery Prompt Forwarding Mode mbox Mailbox No SY System U1 User 1 dl Delay Time U2 User 2 SL Selective md Forwarding Mode
40. Station ALT S TRS ALT T ARS ALT A 11 Choose Settings 2 in the Sub Menu and program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group Sub Menu Settings 1 1 Settings 2 2 Dntercept Timers PBX Access Code I CO Line Setting CPC CPC CO Signal Signal DIL 1 1 Detection Detection EXT NO Incoming Outgoing DAY NIGHT 1 400 ms Disable 25 25 2 400 ms Disable 25 25 3 400 ms Disable 25 25 74 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX Section 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX Installation Manual 75 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION 4 1 1 Why Digital Integration is Important The VPS works well with most PBXs because its connections are made through a standard single line tip ring telephone interface However the communication between the PBX and VPS is best when Digital Integration is used the VPS is already set up to communicate through Digital Integration Once Digital Integration is established the PBX sends information to the VPS through the data link This information enables the VPS to identify the extension that is calling know where from and why a call is forwarded and recognize what the caller wants to do This communication allows
41. Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Busy Coverage Mode specifies how the VPS will handle calls to the operator when the line is busy The Busy Coverage options that are available include Hold No Answer Coverage Call Waiting and Disconnect Message See Busy Coverage Mode in Table 24 in 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters See Busy Coverage Mode in Tables 45 46 and 47 in B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS Call Services include a series of both incoming and outgoing call services Incoming Call Services Automated Attendant Service Voice Mail Service Interview Service Custom Service Outgoing Call Services Message Waiting Notification and External Message Delivery See Port Service Setting in 5 1 3 Starting the Quick Setup See Incoming Call Service in Table 23 in 5 3 1 Port Service Menu See Incoming Call Service in Table 42 in B4 1 Port Assignment See Incoming Call Service in Table 43 in B4 2 Trunk Group Assignment Call Transfer Status permits subscribers to specify how the VPS will handle calls to their individual extensions Call Transfer Status options include Call Screening Call Blocking Intercom Paging and Calling a Beeper See Calling a Beeper and Intercom Paging APT DPT Integration Only in this Table See Call Transfer in Glossary See 4 1 Call Transfer Status in the Subscriber s Guide 198 Installati
42. 1 Yes Stores the Holiday Service setting for future use If set 2 No to Yes the same setting will be activated No automatically on the same day every year If set to No the setting will be canceled automatically after the holiday is over Service 1 Voice Mail Specifies one of 4 incoming call services for the 2 Auto Attn holiday 3 Interview 4 Custom Note When Interview Service is specified one of Auto Attn Subscriber s Interview Mailbox numbers should also be specified When the Custom Service is specified one of Custom Service numbers 1 100 should also be specified Company 1 32 Specifies the Company Greeting to be played on the Greeting No S System Greeting holiday N None S System The System Greeting is Good Morning Afternoon Greeting Evening Welcome to the Voice Processing System However the Message Manager can change this Note This feature is available with the KX TVS80 only Port Affected Port No Specifies the port number on which the Holiday 1 2 Service setting is activated The unspecified ports provide the usual incoming call service Note Pressing back space will clear the parameter 274 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 57 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Trunk Affected Trunk No Specifies the trunk CO line number on which the KX TVS50 1 24 Holiday Service setting is activated The unspecified
43. 2 to accept the current name Return to Step 4 Press 3 to erase the current name Return to Step 4 6 Record the name at the tone and Press 1 7 The VPS plays the recorded name Press 2 to accept it Note Press 1 to change the recorded name Return to Step 6 Press 3 to erase the recorded name Return to Step 4 8 Repeat Steps 4 7 to record names for other Caller ID List numbers Guidance is Caller Name Announcement number 340 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET The Message Manager can program his extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode from a remote location to forward various types of calls to a desired extension or an outside telephone There are six forwarding settings available FWD All Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number FWD Busy Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when the line is busy FWD No Answer Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when there is no answer e FWD Busy or No Answer Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when the line is busy or there is no answer e FWD to CO Forward all incoming calls to Telephone number or 2 preprogrammed in the Mailbox Setting or to any other telephone number FWD Cancel Cancel the forwarding setting Notes The Remote Call Forwarding Set feature is available with DPT Integratio
44. 536 The mailbox number entry failure 536 Check the mailbox number 537 The message is message 537 538 The message sender is unknown 518 538 539 The prompt is now turned off 539 540 The system reserved mailbox cannot 540 be edited 541 There are number 541 43 542 There are no messages 542 543 There was 1 unsuccessful attempt to 543 enter this mailbox 544 There were number of failure 544 809 545 These are the brief segments of your 545 Message 546 THIRD 546 547 Third telephone number is telephone 547 number 548 Third telephone number is not 548 assigned 549 THIRTEEN 549 550 THIRTEEN HOUR 550 551 THIRTEEN MINUTE 551 552 THIRTEENTH 552 Installation Manual 371 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 553 THIRTIETH 553 554 THIRTY 554 555 THIRTY MINUTE 555 556 THIRTY EIGHT 556 557 THIRTY EIGHT MINUTE 557 558 THIRTY FIRST 558 559 THIRTY FIVE 559 560 THIRTY FIVE MINUTE 560 561 THIRTY FOUR 561 562 THIRTY FOUR MINUTE 562 563 THIRTY NINE 563 564 THIRTY NINE MINUTE 564 565 THIRTY ONE 565 566 THIRTY ONE MINUTE 566 567 THIRTY SEVEN 567 568 THIRTY SEVEN MINUTE 568 569 THIRTY SIX 569 570 THIRTY SIX MINUTE 570 571 THIRTY THREE 571 572 THIRTY THR
45. 628 869 629 To change the department dialing 629 menu press 3 To change the custom service menu press 4 To change the voice label press 5 To modify the user prompt press 6 To change the selection menu press 7 To change the system caller name announcement press 8 630 To change the first telephone number 630 press 1 To change the second telephone number press 2 To change the third telephone number press 3 631 To change the message waiting lamp 631 status press 1 To change the device status press 2 To assign the telephone or beeper numbers press 3 632 To change the no answer greeting 632 press 1 To change the busy signal greeting press 2 To change the after hours greeting press 3 633 To change the no answer greeting 633 press 1 To change the busy signal greeting press 2 To change the after hours greeting press 3 To change the caller ID greetings press 4 634 To change the owner s name press 637 636 634 743 637 636 634 743 628 637 636 634 743 628 869 635 To change the password press 1 635 642 376 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 636 To change the password press 2 641 636 638 643 637 636 634 743 637 636 634 743 628 637 636 634
46. 707 719 709 384 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 720 To repeat press 720 670 720 392 721 To repeat press 3 647 603 721 722 To replay the previous message 722 information press 1 To play the next message s information press 2 To play the message press 3 723 To replay the previous message press 723 706 703 1 724 To replay the previous message press 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 1 twice 753 698 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 724 706 724 725 To reply press 2 717 725 670 717 725 734 683 670 726 To reply press 4 717 706 679 726 753 208 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 753 698 727 To report all mailbox usage press 2 751 727 728 To reschedule press 1 728 707 719 709 729 To retrieve the call press 2 729 730 To review the mailing list press 4 755 610 730 755 754 610 730 731 To review this group press 4 626 606 656 731 732 To review press 1 732 603 678 614 677 732 601 678 677 732 603 678 Installation Manual 385 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Pro
47. 8 Type the telephone number using 0 9 and x Notes Please make sure you begin the telephone number with a Line Access Code to seize a CO line When connected to the KX TD816 TD1232 TA1232 the maximum number of characters allowed to be entered is 16 when connected to the KX TD500 24 9 Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Go to Step 11 Note Press 1 to change the telephone number Return to Step 7 10 Call Forwarding is canceled Press 2 to accept it 11 Call Forwarding setting data is transmitted to the PBX If the forwarding setting or canceling has been completed properly you will hear Call forwarding accepted or Call forwarding is canceled 342 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Note If you hear Call Forwarding not accepted Please check the destination number the forwarding setting has not been completed properly at the PBX possibly because a nonexistent extension number has been entered as the destination It is also possible that the model of the connected PBX does not support the Remote Call Forwarding Set or its software version is lower than required for more information call National Parts Center at 1 800 833 9626 Installation Manual 343 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D8 LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SERVICE There are over 900 voice prompts all listed in the next section and they come in 3 types 1 System Prompts in English c
48. Appendix B SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 8 Perform Administrative Program through a computer see Appendix B SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE CAUTION Do not turn the power off while the VPS is activated so as not to cause malfunction To turn the power off after installing the VPS unplug the power cord from the VPS a few minutes after disconnecting station wire s 34 Installation Manual INSTALLATION 2 6 INSTALLING AN OPTIONAL EXPANSION MEMORY CARD KX TVS52 TO THE KX TVS50 2 6 1 General The flash memory capacity of the KX TVS50 can be increased from 2 h to 4 h if an optional expansion memory card KX TVS52 is installed 2 6 2 Installing the KX TVS52 1 Disconnect the station wire s Wait a few minutes and then disconnect the AC cord from the VPS 2 Take out the screw TVSBD m SN Installation Manual 35 INSTALLATION 4 Take out the screws and remove the metal bar Metal Bar 5 Attach the optional expansion memory card firmly Secure the screw SLAVE CAUTION Do not attach the optional expansion memory card at the MASTER position Attach it at the SLAVE position 6 Replace the metal bar and secure the screws
49. FTX FIX FIX FTX FX FTX FX FTX FX Sequence Extension Transfer FX FTX FTX FIX FIX FTX FX FTX FX FTX FX Sequence Alternate EDO FX FTX FTX FTX FTX FTX FX FIX FX FTX Fx Transfer Sequence Reconnect Sequence FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW F FWW F FWW F on Busy Reconnect Sequence on No Answer FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW F FWW F FWW F Reconnect Sequence on Refuse Call FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW F FWW F FWW F Light On Sequence d None N A 1701 Tox rix T rox Message Waiting Lamp Light Off Sequence p None N A 02X T700X T Message Waiting Lamp 294 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 73 PBX Type Other KX T series ym Tu T308 TD1232 T616 T1232 T96 T336 1232 TA series TD500 TD308 Call Waiting None N A 1 N A N A 1 1 1 1 1 1 Sequence Release Sequence None NA F NA NA F F F F F F for Call Waiting When your KX T series telephone system is in DPT Integration mode 2 When your KX TA624 telephone system is in APT Integration mode N A Not available Not needed 295 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 74 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Integration 1 None Specif
50. For more information call National Parts Center at 1 800 833 9626 From the SYS PGM NO screen a Enter 116 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE c The system displays the ROM version and the date it was created This version must be P871F or higher for DPT Integration to be utilized 2 Set the date and time using System Program 000 100 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 3 Set PBX extension numbering using System Program 003 4 Assign the Voice Mail Port This program tells the PBX which jack will be connected to the VPS This allows the PBX to send the proper DPT Integration information to those ports e KX TVS50 KX TVS60 2 ports assign I jack From the SYS PGM NO screen a Enter 117 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output M c Enter the jack number 2 8 of the port you will use for the Voice Mail d Press STORE e Press END HOLD when finished Conditions Jack 01 cannot be used as a Voice Mail port A jack programmed as a Manager Extension System Program 006 cannot be used in this program 5 Skip this step unless setting flexible numbering System Program 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment is automatically set This program allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port Since a jack connected to the VPS provides 2 extensions this enables you to assign extension numbers to e
51. Incomplete Call Handling Service allows the subscriber to offer callers several service options when the extension is busy or there is no answer Leaving a Message Transfer to Covering Extension Returning to the Automated Attendant Top Menu Intercom Paging Calling a Beeper or Calling Operators See Calling a Beeper and Intercom Paging APT DPT Integration Only in this Table See Incomplete Call Handling Service in Glossary See 4 3 Incomplete Call Handling Status in the Subscriber s Guide 208 Installation Manual SYSTEM FEATURES Integration Only paging and these can be specified by VPS programming when the subscribers have set Intercom Paging for Call Transfer or when the subscribers have set Intercom Paging for Incomplete Call Handling The caller is briefly placed on hold while the VPS announces the page and until the subscriber answers the page The subscriber can answer the page from any extension using the paging answer code this code is specified in the PBX User Manual For a Caller ID Caller if his name has been recorded for the Caller Name Announcement feature the name will be announced at the end of the page If the caller s name has been recorded for both the System and Personal Caller Name Announcement the VPS will use the personal caller name To utilize this feature follow the procedure below 1 Go to the System Administration Top Menu and ty
52. KX TVS80 only 168 Installation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Type SAVE then Press RETURN KX TVS50 SAVE VPS Flash Memory Data Save VPS PC Xmodem 1 Program Parameters System Prompts User Prompts 1 User Prompts 2 Custom Service Menus Personal Greetings Select No KX TVS80 SAVE VPS Flash Memory Data Save VPS PC Xmodem 1 Program 2 Parameters 3 System Prompts 4 User Prompts 1 5 User Prompts 2 6 Custom Service Menus 7 Personal Greetings 8 Company Greetings Select No 2 Select item to be backed up then Press RETURN The size of the file will be displayed To start press RETURN 3 Press RETURN Janne SAVE Start 4 Perform a Standard File Transfer Set the data terminal to the receiving Answer mode Xmodem and specify the backup filename The specified data will be transmitted to the data terminal Notes The data terminal that you use must be equipped with communications software that supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol The command can be canceled by Typing IN before entering the receiving mode the receiving mode has been selected use the cancel command of the communication software being used If your data terminal supports a high speed it is recommended that you SAVE at the maximum speed of 38400 bps First change the RS 232C setting of the VPS see
53. MBOX 118 JAN 8 9 07 AM 00 01 15 DIAL 94444444 MBOX 112 JAN 8 10 24 AM 00 04 51 DIAL 95555555 Installation Manual 183 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Note Depending on PBX extension numbering the mailbox numbers might be 2 to5 digit long 7 3 5 Port Usage Report The Port Usage Report provides information about port usage and allows system and port traffic to be measured The report includes the accumulated duration times of incoming and outgoing calling services and the total connect time for each port To select the Port Usage Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 5 Port Usage Report FROM JAN 3 1999 9 53 AM JAN 4 2001 7 46 PM Port ED MN Rev Connect Time 1 8 0 84 02 10 19 2 4 0 21 00 18 54 Total 9 0 105 02 39 13 Full line Time 00 10 15 FROM The date and time of the last clearing of this report ED External Delivery MN Message Notification Full line Time The total time that both ports were used simultaneously Rev Receive 7 3 6 Port Usage Statistics Clear Clears the Port Usage Report for use again To clear the Port Usage Statistics Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 2 1 System Reports System Report Clear Port Usage Statistics Clear May I clear port usage report data Y N Type Y yes or N no If Y is entered the system will clear the data
54. Out Message Scanning with Information Settings are enable or disable Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting Settings are enable or disable Call Waiting on Busy Settings are enable or disable Message Cancel for Live Call Screening Settings are enable or disable Direct Mailbox Access Settings are enable or disable Intercom Paging Group Number 1 9 with the KX TVS50 or 1 17 with the KX TVS80 Subscriber Service Prompt Mode 1 System Prompt 2 User 1 Prompt 3 User 2 Prompt Remote Call Forward to CO Settings are enable or disable Delete Message Confirmation Settings are enable or disable Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name Announcement 0 30 Play Personal Greeting for Caller ID Settings are enable or disable Caller ID Screening Settings are enable or disable Message Notification Settings are enable or disable External Message Delivery Settings are enable or disable Auto Forwarding Settings are enable or disable 306 Installation Manual SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE Not available for COS No 63 Message Manager and COS No 64 System Manager Not available for COS No 64 System Manager Note While the System Administrator programs via a computer the System Manager cannot set COS parameters The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 2 to set Class of Service 4 Type the C
55. Personal Greeting for CID in Table 40 in SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Personal Greeting for Caller ID in Glossary See 4 10 Recording Personal Greetings for Caller ID in the Subscriber s Guide See 4 11 Assigning Caller ID Numbers for Personal Greeting for Caller ID in the Subscriber s Guide Personal Greetings permit the subscriber to record the following 3 personal message greetings No Answer Plays when unavailable to answer the call during business hours Busy Signal Plays whenever the line is busy After Hours Plays when the VPS is in the Night Mode The No Answer Greeting will also play when the caller accesses the mailbox directly when the Busy Signal or the After Hours Greeting has not been recorded See 6 2 1 Greetings Recording Personal See Personal Greeting Length in Table 40 in SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Personal Greetings in Glossary See 1 2 Recording Personal Greetings in the Subscriber s Guide Installation Manual 217 SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Play System Prompt allows the Guidance for Recording See Play System Prompt after After Personal message to be played for the caller after the Persona
56. SYSTEM SETUP dl Zar die The VPS tests the CPU card the flash memory and the ports until 1 2 3 is displayed Active ports are displayed on the screen Screen output Active COs 12 DPT Interface Connection is Established ON LINE MODE The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully Screen output Active COs 12 DPT Interface Connection is not Established OFF LINE MODE This message will appear when the DPT connection between the VPS and telephone system cannot be established Possible causes of the message DPT Interface Connection is not Established Table 16 Cause Remedy The PBX is not a correct type Since the VPS is Connect a correct PBX and set configured to communicate with the default the PBX type by using Quick PBX type KX TVS50 with the KX TA series Setup see Section 5 under APT Integration KX TVS80 with the CUSTOMIZING THE KX TD816 TD1232 TA1232 TD308 under SYSTEM DPT Integration this message will always appear when connecting to another type of PBX The cabling between the PBX extension ports Confirm the cabling is and the VPS is not 4 wire or is improperly connected as described in connected Section 2 INSTALLATION 90 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX Table 16 Cause Remedy The PBX is a correct type but does not ha
57. System 1 System Group 1 Mailbox Parameter 2 Delete Setting Assignment Group 3 Listing 1 Enter 2 Extension Group 2 Delete 3 Listing 2 Time Service 1 Service Mode 1 Day Service 2 Time Service 2 Lunch Service 3 Break Service 3 Holiday Setting 1 Holiday Setting Enter 2 Holiday Setting Delete 4 Daylight Saving Time 3 Holilay Listing 5 Prompt Setting 1 Enter 6 System Caller Name Announcement eee 3 Caller ID Listing 7 Others 1 Extension Numbering Plan 1 16 2 Dialing Parameter 3 Message Waiting Notification 4 External Message Delivery 5 Call Hold 6 Rotary Telephone Service 7 Intercom Paging Parameters 8 Fax Management Haid 9 Disconnect Parameter Hardware Setting 1 RS 232C 2 Port Setting for each port 3 PBX Interface 1 Dialing Parameter Parameter 2 Inband Signaling 3 Digit Translation 1 Inter digit Table Timeout 2 Input Output Installation Manual 229 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Up to 1022 Subscriber Mailboxes can be created or edited by following the correct sequence of steps To access the proper menu for mailbox setup follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No Table 36 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Mailbox 2 5 digits Specifies the
58. System Administration Top Menu 1 6 2 Port No 1 2 Table 71 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Flash Time 1 100 ms Specifies the length of time the hook switch must be 2 300 ms pressed before the PBX will recognize it as a flash hook 3 600 ms signal See the PBX manual to determine the correct 4 900 ms value 600 CPC Signal 1 None Specifies the minimum time necessary to detect an 2 6 5 ms interruption in the CPC Calling Party Control signal 3 150 ms received from the PBX The VPS is able to determine 4 300 ms that the line has been disconnected when it detects an 5 450 ms interruption of the CPC signal 6 600 ms None Disconnect 1 8s Specifies the length of time the line will temporarily be Time 2 unavailable after a call has ended Dial Mode 1 DTMF Specifies the dial mode for DTMF touchtone or Pulse 2 Pulse 10 pps If Pulse is specified pulse speed 10 20 pps must be 3 Pulse 20 pps selected DTMF Note This setting only affects outward dialing from the VPS The VPS can only receive DTMF touchtone signals 292 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters Three separate parameters are used to program the VPS for optimal signaling and performance with the PBX To access the proper menu for PBX Interface Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 Dialing Par
59. a password has not yet been assigned go to Step 4 Press 2 to accept the current setting 4 Type the password and Press Note If a password is not needed Press It is recommended that the password be set to maintain security 5 The VPS plays the current password setting Press 2 to accept it Installation Manual 323 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C10 LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER MESSAGES 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 The VPS plays the number of new messages Press 1 to listen to the messages 3 The VPS plays each message identifying the sender and indicating when the message was recorded Press 0 to listen to the entire menu 1 Repeat this message 1 1 Replay the Previous Message 2 Play the Next Message 3 1 Erase this Message 4 Reply 5 Rewind 6 Fast Forward 7 Transfer 6 Message Scan 324 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Appendix D MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Installation Manual 325 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D1 ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX The Message Manager s Mailbox must be accessed before performing any Message Manager task To access the Message Manager s mailbox three items of information must be known the telephone number connected directly to the Voice Mail Service the Message Manager s Mailbox Number and the Message Manager s Password if assigned The Message Manager s Mailbox Number is 98 998 default
60. either from a remote location or on site his extension to forward various types of calls to either Telephone No 1 or Telephone No 2 preprogrammed in the Mailbox Setting or to any other telephone number Note The Remote Call FWD to CO feature is available if DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX T series telephone system Important Note With respect to PBX programming it is possible that Call Forward to CO is disabled To enable VPS Remote Call Forwarding the KX TD1232 for example must be programmed properly For the COS of the extensions whose calls are to be forwarded to a CO line enable the following 504 Call Forward to Outside Line Delete 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS requests confirmation from the Message 2 No mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the mailbox Confirmation No If set to No the message is erased immediately Authorization 1 Yes If set to Yes the Message Manager is able to utilize the for Message 2 No Message Waiting Notification feature The sub parameters Notification Yes to be set include Beeper Callback No Entry Mode MWL Notification for Unreceived Message and Device Notification for Unreceived Message If set to No sub parameters cannot be assigned Installation Manual 245 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 41 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Beeper 1 Caller Permits the Message Mana
61. for AM or 2 for PM Note This selection is not available if 24 h is selected in Position of AM PM in Time Stamp in Table 59 in B6 5 Prompt Setting 13 Type the date month and day and Press 14 Press 2 to accept the entry 15 Press 1 to make this message private otherwise Press 2 Installation Manual 321 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE Checking Mailbox Distribution Use this feature to check if messages have been delivered to recipients 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 4 to check distribution status 3 Press 3 to cancel the message or delete verification Note Press 1 to listen to messages Press 1 twice to check the previous message Press 2 to check the next message 4 Press 1 to delete verification of this message or 2 to cancel message delivery 322 Installation Manual SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C9 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX In order to ensure system security establish a password consisting of up to 10 numeric characters Anyone requesting access to the System Manager s service will be required to enter this password before proceeding Note While the System Administrator programs via a computer the System Manager cannot access this service The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 3 to customize the mailbox 3 The VPS plays the current password setting Press 1 to change the mailbox password If
62. if Selective is enabled then the 4 Selective receiver has a choice of prompts See related explanation User 1 in Incoming Call Service Prompt in Table 23 in 5 3 1 Port Service Menu Note When Selective is enabled and the receiver uses a rotary telephone the no entry selection is specified by Prompt for Rotary Callers in Table 23 in 5 3 1 Port Service Menu Authorization 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS automatically forwards messages for Auto 2 No that have not been accessed for a specific length of time Forwarding No to another mailbox The sub parameters to be set for this feature include Mailbox Number Delay Time and Forwarding Mode If set to No sub parameters cannot be assigned Mailbox 2 5 digits Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be Number None forwarded Note The numbers of the System Group Distribution List cannot be specified as the destination Delay Time h min Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the 00 05 to 99 59 VPS must wait before forwarding unretrieved messages 00 30 The maximum delay time is 99 h 59 min Note The delay time must be less than the New Message Retention Time or else messages will be deleted before being forwarded Forwarding 1 Copy Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the Mode 2 Move original mailbox When set to Copy copies of the Move messages are retained in the original mailbox after forwarding When set to Move me
63. 1 4 1 2 1 3 3 Call Waiting 4 Disconnect Message Hold Table 47 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Operator s 1 5 digits Specifies the extension number for Operator 3 Any valid Extension None extension number can be assigned Operator s 2 5 digits Specifies the mailbox number for Operator 3 Callers to Mailbox No None Operator 3 are prompted to leave a message in this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No Answer Coverage modes are set Busy Coverage 1 Hold Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 3 Mode 2 No Answer extension is busy Coverage 1 Hold Automatically places the caller on hold and the Operator 3 extension is called again 2 No Answer Coverage Offers the option specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller 3 Call Waiting Signals Operator 3 when another call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX 4 Disconnect Message Disconnects the call after playing Thank you for calling Installation Manual 257 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 47 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default No Answer 1 Caller Select Specifies how to handle Operator 3 calls when not Coverage 2 Leave Message answered within the time period set by the Operator No Mode 3 Disconnect Answer Time mode Message Caller Select Caller Select Allows the caller to leave a m
64. 17 with the KX TVS80 the Intercom Paging feature is activated for all groups Subscriber Service Prompt Mode 18 a The current setting plays Press 1 2 or 3 to change the desired mode 1 System Prompt 2 User 1 Prompt 3 User 2 Prompt b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 4 to accept it Remote Call Forward to CO 19 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Delete Message Confirmation 20 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name Announcement 21 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current number b Type the number of Caller IDs 0 30 C Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it 310 Installation Manual SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE Play Personal Greeting for Caller ID 22 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Caller ID Screening 23 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Message Notification 24 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable If the Message Notification is
65. 2 to accept the date entered Installation Manual 335 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D6 RECORDING MESSAGES The Message Manager is responsible for recording various system messages specifically menus voice labels user prompts and system caller names He is responsible for maintaining the following Company Greetings KX TVS80 only Up to 32 company greetings for business non business and Lunch Break hours as well as holidays can be selected recorded or deleted as necessary Company Name KX TVS80 only The Department Dialing Menu maximum length 6 min A caller can access departments with the touch of one key Nine Department Dialing selections 1 to 9 can be recorded The Custom Service Menus maximum length 6 min each Up to 100 custom service menus can be recorded These menus guide callers to the services they require without the need for a human operator This is the most useful and powerful feature of your Panasonic Voice Processing System For example the Message Manager can record menus in a wide variety of foreign languages e The Voice Labels maximum length 6 min each Up to 20 System Group Distribution Lists can be created by the System Administrator Each list can have a voice label The User Prompts maximum length 6 min each There are 3 kinds of voice mail prompts 1 System Prompts 2 User 1 Prompts and 3 User 2 Prompts Generally the System Prompts should be left alone the
66. 4 1 NW 1 2 Initializes RS 232C parameters E RS 232C default parameters 9 600 N 8 1 DI oL NI 2 mh Auto Configuration is automatically executed and all ports F set for Automated Attendant service Auto Configuration is automatically executed and all ports are 2 set for Voice Mail service 4 Reserved Initializes the VPS Clears all voice data except User 1 and 5 User 2 prompts and returns all system parameters to the default setting 6 2 m Test Mode Hard Disk Drive Read Write Test pm 7 Reserved fa Initializes the VPS Clears all voice data and returns all system 8 parameters to the default setting CAUTION User 1 and User 2 Prompts will be erased 9 Reserved joe E Auto Configuration is automatically executed and all ports are m set for Automated Attendant service ie EE Auto Configuration is automatically executed and all ports are Zi set for Voice Mail service pm All service prompts are set to System Prompts factory recorded 2 am English prompts Bove 13 m All service prompts are set to User 1 Prompts not recorded Popy 20 Installation Manual VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW Table 1 Position Additional Function 14 All service prompts are set to User 2 Prompts not recorded 15 Reserved For Panasonic K
67. 508 509 Sorry this group is full 509 2 509 1 510 Sorry this line is busy 510 511 Sorry this list is in use for delivery If 511 this list is edited all the deliveries will then be canceled 512 Sorry this mailbox is in use 512 513 Sorry this name cannot be found 513 514 Sorry this number is not assigned 514 515 Sorry this pager is not available 515 516 Sorry this report is not available 516 517 Sorry you cannot deliver the message 517 The maximum number of delivery has already been reached 518 Sorry you cannot reply 518 538 518 593 518 589 519 Sorry you cannot transfer a private 519 message 520 STAR X 520 521 State your comment at the tone 521 669 702 522 SUNDAY 522 523 Telephone number deleted 523 524 Telephone number is telephone 524 number 525 Telephone number is not assigned 525 526 TEN 526 527 TEN HOUR 527 528 TEN MINUTE 528 370 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 529 TENTH 529 530 Thank you 530 531 Thank you for calling 531 532 The callback number is telephone 532 647 392 number 533 The callback number is not assigned 533 647 392 534 The FAX transfer situation is as 534 follows 535 The first 4 letters of the owner s last 535 name are name
68. 658 694 695 To leave a message press 1 695 695 673 382 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 696 To let the caller select prompt 759 760 761 696 605 language press 4 697 To make this message private press 1 697 392 698 To message scan press 8 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 753 698 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 699 To modify message press 5 752 745 652 742 699 670 752 745 652 742 699 868 670 700 To notify your party s beeper press 4 700 701 To page your party press 3 701 702 To pause and restart recording press 669 702 2 668 702 702 521 669 702 703 To play the entire message press 3 723 706 703 704 To play the message press 1 704 To check the previous message press 1 twice To check the next message press 2 705 To play the next caller ID number 659 705 press 2 706 To play the next message press 2 717 706 679 726 753 208 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 753 698 723 706 703 717 706 679 753 208 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 724 706 706 707 To play the next schedule press 2 728 707 719 709 707 719 709 708 To play
69. 9998 or 99998 depending upon the mailbox number length specified in System Programming The Message Manager s password is assigned through the Message Manager s Service To Access the Message Manager s Mailbox 1 Dial the Extension Number connected to the Voice Mail Service Or Dial any VPS Extension Number and Press 6 Service Access Command Please enter your party s mailbox number To enter by name press and 1 If you are using a rotary telephone stay on the line To call the operator press 0 2 Press X then enter the Message Manager s Mailbox Number 98 998 9998 or 99998 Enter your password followed by 3 Type the Password followed by The Main Menu of Message Manager s Service will be played You have number new message s To transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages press 1 To set up message waiting notification press 2 To customize your mailbox press 3 To set the clock press 4 To modify message press 5 To set station call forwarding press 6 To end this call press X 326 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX One of the Message Manager s functions is to check the General Delivery Mailbox for messages and transfer them to the appropriate mailbox or mailboxes System Group Distribution Lists may be used This can be done at any time using the telephone Liste
70. ASCII Terminals to perform System Administration which includes the setting and changing of system parameters This can be a personal computer with emulation software Keyboard Use RS 232C Terminals ASCII Terminals When using RS 232C Terminals Type the number of the option desired and Press RETURN to choose menu options Table 35 KEY FUNCTIONS 1 9 then RETURN Typing any number 1 through 9 will select the corresponding option for that number Pressing RETURN will select the number entered 9 Exits the current screen and returns to the previous step within the menu Backspace Used to correct any mis typed entry Using the Interface Programming Guidance Each parameter is accessed through a series of menu screens The Programming Menu Structure Diagram provided below depicts this menu flow A menu flow that corresponds to the Programming Menu Structure Diagram is given at the beginning of each section This flow is designed to guide the user through the appropriate menus to the parameter to be setup or changed The following example illustrates how the menu flow is used Example System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 1 1 Press 1 at the System Administration Top Menu Press RETURN 2 Press 4 at the Program Menu Press RETURN 3 Press 1 at the Service Setting Menu Press RETURN 4 Press 1 on the Automated Attendant Menu to select 1 Department Dialing when selected 5 Press RE
71. Administration Top Menu 3 Utility Command Type HELP for command list Table 28 OFLN Sets the system to off line mode ONLN Sets the system to on line mode PASS Sets the System Administrator s password TIME Sets the system clock date and time PSET Specifies the reports printing time ELOG Displays device error log SAVE Stores a backup of the program or data in the flash memory LOAD Restores a backup of the program or data to the VPS GPRN Displays all of the VPS parameters VERS Displays the version of the program CREP Displays the keypad assignments message recording status and the tree structure of a Custom service CCLR Clears a Custom service menu access count MWL Specifies the number of times the VPS attempts to turn on the message waiting lamp on the extensions MRL Sets the minimum recording length of a message MPLT Displays the user prompt recording status HELP Displays brief instructions and a list of Utility Commands QSET Set up your VPS roughly so that you can use it quickly LMON Line Monitor PUTD Displays Touchtone Information WCID Wait for Caller ID 162 Installation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 2 Off line Set OFLN Use the OFLN command to turn off the VPS Call Progression Mode Set the VPS to Off Line Mode before deleting a mailbox since this operation involves the updating of a large number of related parameters Type OFLN t
72. B6 5 Prompt Setting Note If Selective is specified you will need to select a prompt available for rotary callers See Prompt for Rotary Callers below Prompt for 1 System Specifies which language System User 1 User 2 a rotary Rotary Callers 2 User 1 caller or an External Delivery Message receiver hears 3 User 2 when he cannot enter any digit Prompt Selection System Number after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been played 250 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 43 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Delayed 0 60 s Specifies whether the trunk CO line group answers Answer 0 immediately 0 or with delay 1 60 s Time Trunk 1 48 Night Mode To access the proper menu for Night Mode features for the selected PBX trunk CO line group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 2 Trunk Group No 1 48 2 Note The maximum number of trunk CO line groups depends on the VPS model Trunk 1 48 Lunch Mode To access the proper menu for Lunch Mode Features for PBX trunk CO line group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 2 Trunk Group No 1 48 3 Note The maximum number of trunk CO line groups depends on the VPS model Trunk 1 48 Break Mode To access the proper menu for Break Mode Features for the selected PBX trunk CO line grou
73. B7 1 RS 232C Parameters Next change the RS 232C setting of your data terminal to the same speed Installation Manual 169 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 2 8 Loading New or Saved Data to the VPS LOAD Use the LOAD command to install new data or to restore saved data to the VPS Execute this command for each data file When performing this operation always wait until the process completion indication appears before proceeding 1 Type LOAD then Press RETURN KX TVS50 LOAD VPS Flash Memory Data Load PC gt VPS Xmodem 1 Program 2 Parameters 3 System Prompts 4 User Prompts 1 5 User Prompts 2 6 Custom Service Menus 7 Personal Greetings Select No KX TVS80 LOAD VPS Flash Memory Data Load PC gt VPS Xmodem Program 2 Parameters 3 System Prompts 4 User Prompts 1 5 User Prompts 2 6 Custom Service Menus 7 8 S Personal Greetings Company Greetings elect No 2 Select the item to be restored to the flash memory then Press RETURN To start press RETURN 3 Press RETURN nile E Load Start When CCC appears the VPS is ready for loading 4 Set the data terminal to the sending Call mode Xmodem Then enter the backup filename Press ENTER The backup data will be restored to the flash memory 5 When the load to the VPS has been completed power off and restart the VPS 170 Inst
74. FORTY EIGHT 216 217 FORTY EIGHT MINUTE 217 218 FORTY FIVE 218 219 FORTY FIVE MINUTE 219 220 FORTY FOUR 220 221 FORTY FOUR MINUTE 221 222 FORTY NINE 222 223 FORTY NINE MINUTE 223 224 FORTY ONE 224 225 FORTY ONE MINUTE 225 226 FORTY SEVEN 226 227 FORTY SEVEN MINUTE 227 Installation Manual 397 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 228 FORTY SIX 228 229 FORTY SIX MINUTE 229 230 FORTY THREE 230 231 FORTY THREE MINUTE 231 232 FORTY TWO 232 233 FORTY TWO MINUTE 233 234 Forwarding mailbox number is 234 mailbox number 235 Forwarding mailbox number is not 235 assigned 236 Forwarding mode is copy 236 237 Forwarding mode is move 237 238 FOUR 238 239 FOUR HOUR 239 240 FOUR MINUTE OWE FOUR 240 241 FOURTEEN 241 242 FOURTEEN HOUR 242 243 FOURTEEN MINUTE 243 244 FOURTEENTH 244 245 FOURTH 245 246 FRIDAY 246 247 from name 575 247 266 247 267 247 248 Good afternoon 248 819 248 249 Good evening 249 819 249 250 Good morning 250 819 250 251 Greeting erased 251 252 greeting is message 38 252 358 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE
75. GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s 603 To accept press 2 732 603 678 614 677 738 603 647 603 732 603 678 639 603 733 647 603 661 647 603 682 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 691 647 603 721 647 603 733 608 692 693 647 603 733 608 692 693 691 41 647 603 604 To accept press 4 612 660 733 604 759 760 761 604 605 To accept press 5 759 760 761 696 605 606 To add group members press 2 626 606 626 606 656 731 607 To add more caller ID numbers press 607 1 To end press 2 608 To add more digits press 4 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 691 647 603 733 608 692 693 647 603 733 608 692 693 691 609 To add more members press 1 609 To end press 2 610 add new mailbox number press 755 610 730 755 754 610 730 611 To add new member press 1 611 611 657 733 374 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 612 To add press 1 612 612 660
76. ID number entries for this box 40 are full there are 30 entries for caller ID allowed 41 Caller ID number is telephone 41 number 41 647 603 42 Caller ID number is not assigned 42 42 647 392 43 Caller ID numbers assigned 541 43 44 Caller ID screen disabled 44 45 Caller ID screen enabled 45 46 Caller name is name 46 47 Caller name is erased 47 48 Caller name is not recorded 48 49 Calling the operator 49 417 50 Cannot be retrieved 50 5 Class of service number is number 51 583 51 584 51 52 Company greeting number number 52 154 53 Company greeting number is 53 number 54 Company name name 54 55 Company name erased 55 56 Counts cleared 56 Installation Manual 349 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 57 Covering extension is extension 57 number 58 Covering extension not assigned 58 59 Covering extension transfer disabled 59 60 Covering extension transfer enabled 60 61 Custom service menu 61 61 154 62 Custom service number number 62 63 Date is date 63 64 Day mode first operator s extension is 64 extension number 65 Day mode first operator s extension is 65 not assigned 66 Day mode second operator s 66 extension is extension number
77. Important Information POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT AND RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG FOR SAFETY REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO REGULATIONS CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Note Before you start setting or changing system parameters we recommend that you turn off the Call Progression Mode with the OFLN command While off the power LED of the VPS will flash and the VPS will not answer any incoming call After you finish programming use the ONLN command to turn on the Call Progression Mode normal operation Please see 7 2 1 Off line Set OFLN and 7 2 2 On line Set ONLN for more details Trademarks e HyperTerminal is either a registered trademark or a trademark of HILGRAEVE INCORPORATED in the United States and or other countries IBMis either a registered trademark or a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Procomm Plus is either a registered trademark or a trademark of DATASTORM TECHNOLOGIES INC in the United States and or other countries e Smartcom is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Hayes
78. Incoming Transfer of 2 Enable Fax Call Service Incoming Fax Disable Call Note Automatic detection works for only the first 30s Main Fax 2 5 digits Specifies the main fax extension number Extension No None 288 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 68 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Alternate Fax 2 5 digits Specifies the alternate fax extension number When the Extension No None main fax extension is busy or does not answer within the specified Fax No Answer Time the VPS forwards the fax call to the alternate fax extension Fax No Answer 5 60 s Specifies the length of time in seconds the VPS must Time 10 wait before taking other action when there is no answer at either fax extension Note This timer applies to the fax call that has been transferred to the main or alternate fax extension Fax Manager 2 5 digits Specifies the Fax Manager Mailbox Number The VPS Mailbox No None will notify the fax manager of the status of fax calls depending upon the settings of the Fax No Answer Coverage Mode and Fax Notification Mode parameters Fax No Answer 1 No If set to Mbx the VPS will leave the number of Coverage Mode 2 Mbx unanswered fax calls in the Fax Manager s mailbox 3 Ext No Example The FAX transfer situation is as follows One attempt was no answer 1 If set to Ext the VPS will call the Fax Manager s extension to sp
79. M move C copy Note An X displayed on the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is set to Yes Installation Manual 181 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 3 System Service Report The System Service Report provides information about the VPS s usable ports trunk CO line groups and Holiday Services It also indicates the services assigned to each VPS port and each trunk CO line group for Day Night Lunch and Break modes each Holiday Service and all incoming and outgoing call services To select the System Service Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 3 KX TVS50 System Service Report JAN 4 2001 4 37 PM Port Day mode Night mode Lunch mode Break mode Srv Srv Srv Srv 1 V M A A V M A A 2 A A LS 700 V M A A Trunk Day mode Night mode Lunch mode Break mode Srv Srv Srv Srv 1 A A V M V M A A 2 A A V M V M A A Holiday List Name of Holiday Start End Srv Port Trunk NEW YEAR S DAY JAN 1 C S 100 1 2 1 24 SPRING HOLIDAY MAR 24 APR 5 C S 99 1 2 1 24 V M Voice Mail Service C S Custom Service A A Automated Attendant LS Interview Service Service 182 Installation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING KX TVS80 System Service Report JAN 4 2001 4 37 PM Port Day mode Night mode Lunch mode Break mode Grt Srv Grt Srv Grt Srv Grt Srv 1 1 V M 2
80. Menu Select 5 and Press ENTER or Type 3 then QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration Instructions Installation Manual 103 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX TEST Press the INTERCOM button and then 295 If the VPS answers you have a DPT connection Set the DIP Switch to position 0 after initialization is complete The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX TD308 should be able to communicate through DPT Integration We recommend that the KX TD308 system has any optional extension cards installed and telephones connected before starting the VPS When running the Quick Setup command Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM from the VPS the PBX transmits the station information automatically This saves time when programming the VPS 104 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 4 5 COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES The following features can be used on any KX T proprietary telephone 7000 series analog 7200 7400 series digital KX T7000 series is used with the KX TA624 The KX T7200 and KX 7400 series are used with the KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration 4 5 1 Live Call Screening LCS Programming LCS notifies subscribers of incoming messages to their mailboxes The notification method is programmable for hands free
81. Menu Access Count Clear CCLR See B5 2 Custom Service See Recording Menus and Voice Labels in D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Custom Service Setting in Glossary Daylight Saving Time Assignment changes the internal clock of the VPS for the start and end of Daylight Saving Time See B6 4 Daylight Saving Time DST Delete Message Confirmation requests confirmation from mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the mailbox This feature can be enabled or disabled in the COS Class of Service settings See Delete Message Confirmation in Tables 40 and 41inB3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Installation Manual 203 SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Department Dialing is a speed dialing feature that permits the caller to quickly reach the desired extension by dialing a 1 digit number either during or after the playing of the Department Dialing message See 5 4 2 Department Dialing See Department Dialing in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters See Recording Menus and Voice Labels in D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Department Dialing in Glossary Dialing by Name allows the caller to reach the intended mailbox extension when the number is not See Owner Last Name in Table 37 in B2 SYSTEM Integration Only k
82. Microcomputer Products Inc in the United States and or other countries e All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners Installation Manual 5 Important Information TELEPHONE COMPANY AND F C C REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES Notify The Telephone Company Installation must be performed by a qualified professional installer If required provide the telephone company with the following technical information The telephone numbers to which the system will be connected Make Panasonic Model KX TVS50 KX TVS80 FCC Registration No found on the bottom of the unit Ringer Equivalence No 0 4B Facility Interface Code 02LS2 Service Order Code 9 0F Required Network Interface Jack RJ11C Connection to the Telephone Line The VPS unit must not be connected to coin operated telephone lines Contact the telephone company before connecting this unit to a party line Telephone Service Problems The telephone company may temporarily discontinue service if the VPS causes problems with the telephone network Discontinued service usually occurs after prior notification When prior notification is not practical the telephone company must e Promptly notify the customer of the temporarily discontinued service e Provide the customer with an opportunity to correct the situation or problem Inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication C
83. NINETY TWO 363 364 NINTH 364 365 No answer greeting is message 365 366 No answer greeting is not recorded 366 Installation Manual 363 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 367 No external delivery message 367 pending 368 No letters have been specified 368 369 No messages to verify 369 370 No more messages 370 371 No one specified by this number 371 372 No previous message 372 373 No question recorded 373 374 NOVEMBER 374 375 O CLOCK 375 376 OCTOBER 376 377 of company name 592 377 378 Old message 378 379 on date 158 379 17 380 ONE 380 381 ONE HOUR 381 382 ONE MINUTE OWE ONE 382 383 One attempt was busy 383 384 One attempt was no answer 384 385 One attempt was successful 385 386 One message to verify 386 387 One other person is waiting to 387 connect 388 Only extension call is available 499 388 415 389 Operator transfer disabled 389 390 Operator transfer enabled 390 391 number other people are waiting to 391 connect 364 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 392 Otherwise press 2 676 392 697 392 532 647
84. OPTIONAL EXPANSION MEMORY CARD KX TVS52 TO jUCnnnen 35 DO eme ep t eth tet tee eee 35 2 6 2 Installing the KX TVS52 x an etie een epe dee e ee 35 231 CONNECTIONS ilaele 37 2 721 Connecting toithe PB X uen eia uc 37 2 7 2 Opening the Ferrite Gore cese eee de re Rte dte eet noone 37 2 7 3 Connection for APT Integration ii 38 27 4 Connection for DPT Integration i 38 2 7 5 Connection for Non APT DPT Integration sese nen enne 39 2 8 TERMINAL CONNECTION eere nente nennen sns senatus 40 2 8 1 Requirements for Connecting Programming Terminal ees 40 2 8 2 Connecting the RS 232C Cable 40 8 Installation Manual Table of Contents 2 3 3 URS 232C Signals nU geb ERI i ile 42 3 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 3 1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION 44 3 1 1 APT DPT or Inband Signaling iii 44 3 1 2 Why Integration is Important nennen 44 3 1 3 How the VPS and PBX Communicate ii 44 3 1 4 PBX Requirements for Integration eeceseeeseeseeecseceseeseeceseesneseaeeeaeeeaeeeaees 45 3 2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTING sscssssssssssssscssscsssssssesssssessesesees 48 3 2 1 General Guidelines and Definitions eee ceeceeeceseeeeeeeseecaeecaeceaeeseeesaec
85. S GUIDE Deleting a Mailbox Password When a password is forgotten the System Manager must delete the password before it can be reassigned by the subscriber 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 1 for the Mailbox Setup 4 Press 3 for Password Reset 5 Type the mailbox number 6 Press 1 to delete the password Installation Manual 305 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Class of Service defines the set of VPS services available to mailbox owners A maximum of 64 Class of Services can be established Each Class of Service can be set using the telephone COS No 63 and No 64 are assigned to the Message Manager and the System Manager respectively For a complete explanation of COS parameters please see Table 40 and Table 41 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Follow the steps detailed below to set the following Class of Service parameters Personal Greeting Length Length ranges from 8 60 s in increments of 4 s New Message Retention Time Maximum time is 30 days Saved Message Retention Time Up to 30 days 0 Unlimited Message Length Length ranges from 1 6 min 0 Unlimited Number of Messages The number of messages range from 5 100 Total Message Time Total message time ranges from 5 100 min 0 Unlimited Message Retrieval Order Settings are LIFO Last In First Out or FIFO First In First
86. See C7 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE SYSTEM REPORTS See System Report in Glossary Installation Manual 221 SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Time Service is a timer function that initiates the appropriate call handling method depending on the time of day Day Night Lunch and Break Service periods See Service Mode in this table See Time Service 1 5 2 2 in 5 2 2 Custom Service Features See Time Service Time Service in B6 2 Time VPS Service Time occurs between the VPS and PBX when the 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR Synchronization PBX sets a new date and time or when DPT DIGITAL INTEGRATION DPT Integration Integration is established The date and time See 72 4 Set Time TIME only are automatically sent from the PBX to the See Time Synchronization in Glossary Trunk Service Universal Port APT DPT Integration only allows call services to be assigned to each trunk CO line group The incoming call service determines which See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION See B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT APT DPT Integration only conversations into his mailbox service is used when answering incoming TRUNK SERVICE calls These services include Voice Mail Service Automated Attendant Service Interview Service and Custom Service Two Way Recording permits a subscriber to record two way e See 4 1 GUIDELIN
87. Service Features See 7 3 11 Fax Call Report See 7 3 12 Fax Call Statistics Clear See Other Parameters Fax Management in B6 7 Other Parameters Group Distribution List Personal allows a subscriber to simultaneously send a message to several mailboxes using a Group Distribution List This list is established by the subscriber Each subscriber can maintain a maximum of 4 lists with up to 20 entries on each list See Group Distribution List System in this Table See Personal Group Distribution List in Glossary See 4 5 Personal Group Distribution Lists in the Subscriber s Guide See 4 6 Deleting Group Distribution Members in the Subscriber s Guide See 4 7 Deleting Group Distribution List Names in the Subscriber s Guide Group Distribution List System allows a subscriber to send a message to several mailboxes using a Group Distribution List Also allows a caller to record a message into all mailboxes within the list The System Administrator must establish this list The VPS can maintain up to 20 lists with a maximum of 20 entries on each See System Group Assignment Mailbox Group in B6 1 System Group Assignment See C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES See System Group Distribution List in Glossary Hold provides the caller with the option of temporarily holding the call when the line is busy The VPS automatically recalls the extension after a specified period of time Whe
88. System ALT Y CO Line ALT L Station ALT S TRS ALT T ARS ALT A 3 Choose Settings 1 in the Sub Menu Sub Menu Settings 1 1 Settings 2 2 CO Line O utgoing D il Line 1 N D C P Flex C o Keys 1 24 Flex P F Buttons 1 12 4 Choose which single line extensions will be attached to Voice Mail If using XDP ports enable XDP for the connect jacks Place Voice Mail extensions in Extension Group 8 Installation Manual 71 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS Station Setting 1 DoorPhone Jack Ext Name XDP EXG Day Night LCS Mode 1 1 11 IN 1 Y Y STOP REC 1 2 21 Jil 1 IN IN 2 12 IN 1 IN N STOP REC 2 2 22 n 1 IN IN 3 1 13 1 IN STOP REC 3 2 23 1 IN IN 4 1 14 IN 1 IN STOP REC 4 2 24 1 IN IN 5 1 05 I 1 Y 1 IN N ISTOPREC 5 2 25 lI 8 IN IN 6 1 16 IN 1 IN N STOP REC 6 2 26 It 1 IN IN 7 1 17 IN 1 N N STOP REC 7 2 27 UA 1 IN IN 8 1 18 IN 1 IN STOP REC 8 2 28 I 11 N IN 5 Select SAVE F7 Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu Select System 6 Choose System ALT Y from the System Data Programming Main Menu System Data Programming Main Menu Auxports ALT U Manager ALT M System ALT Y CO Line ALT L Station ALT S TRS AL
89. Telephone 2 Beeper Telephone Specifies the device to receive notification This is automatically set to Beeper when X is used in the Dial Number above The subscriber can also specify the type of device from his telephone Use Mode Not Use 2 Continuously 3 Scheduled Continuously Specifies how Device 1 2 or 3 is to be used The subscriber can also specify the use mode from his telephone Not Use Device 1 2 or 3 is not used for a notification call 2 Continuously Device 1 2 or 3 is called whenever a message is recorded in the mailbox 3 Scheduled Device 1 2 or 3 is called on a schedule basis when a message has been left in the mailbox Installation Manual 145 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Table 26 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default No of Retries 0 9 times Specifies the number of times that a notification call to 0 Device 1 2 or 3 should be attempted after a busy or no answer condition is received Busy Delay 0 120 min Specifies the time in minutes the VPS must wait after Time 3 a busy condition is received before making another notification call to Device 1 2 or 3 No Answer 60 120 min Specifies the time in minutes the VPS must wait after Delay Time 60 a no answer condition is received before making another notification call to Device 1 2 or 3 Time Frame 1 2 1 12 h Specifies the daily schedule for the M
90. The message to broadcast is recorded in the System Manager s mailbox This feature is useful when informing subscribers about the current VPS status such as remaining flash memory capacity requesting that unnecessary messages be erased etc 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 2 to deliver a message 3 Press 1 to record a broadcast message 4 Record a broadcast message and Press 1 5 Press 2 to accept the message recorded Delivering Messages to Specified Mailboxes Use this feature to deliver the same message to one or more subscriber mailboxes by specifying their numbers 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 2 to deliver a message 3 Press 2 to deliver a message 4 Type the mailbox number of the intended recipient Note Enter by name by Pressing 1 first Use a System Group Distribution List by specifying its number 320 Installation Manual SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE 5 Press 2 to accept the number if it is correct Note Press 2 to add mailbox numbers Press 3 to review the mailing list Press X to cancel message transfer 6 Press 1 to record a message 7 Record the message at the tone and Press 1 8 Press 2 to accept the entry 9 Press 1 to specify the delivery time and the private status Note Press 2 to send the message immediately and return to the Main Menu 10 Press 1 to specify the delivery time 11 Type the time and Press 2 12 Press 1
91. VPS which contains its mailbox as the destination for Call Forwarding and Voice Mail Transfer DO 82 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX NOT assign a Voice Mail extension from the other VPS For example if jack 06 extension 106 has its mailbox in the VPS1 assign extension 107 or 108 as the destination not extension 115 or 116 see diagram below 2 Change the extension numbers of both VPS port 1 and 2 for VPS2 from 107 and 108 to 115 and 116 see Extension Number of VPS Port 1 and Extension Number of VPS Port 2 in Table 74 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters s Extension 106 VPSI Port 1 Extension 107 Port 2 KX TA624 Extension 108 Port 1 Extension 115 Port 2 Extension 116 TEST Press the INTERCOM button and then 107 If the VPS answers you have an APT connection Set the DIP Switch to position 0 after initialization is complete The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX TA624 should be able to communicate through Digital Integration When running the Quick Setup command Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM from the VPS the PBX transmits the station information automatically This saves time when programming the VPS Installation Manual 83 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 4 5 KX TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION WITH KX TVS8
92. Wait until Port Usage Report Data Cleared appears on the screen before proceeding 184 Installation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 7 Flash Memory Usage Report The Flash Memory Usage Report indicates the amount of flash memory storage used and the flash memory availability in minutes It also presents the following statistics The number of messages that were recorded by callers and were copied since the last clearing of this report The number of messages that were copied since the last clearing of this report The number of messages that were deleted by subscribers and expired and were removed by the system since the last clearing of this report The number of messages that expired and were removed by the system since the last clearing of this report To select the Flash Memory Usage Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 6 KX TVS50 Flash Memory Usage Report JAN 22 2001 8 30 PM Drive Avail Used 1 119 min Imin 1 FROM JAN 21 2001 10 20 PM New Cpy Del Exp MSGs 10 10 0 KX TVS50 with an optional expansion memory card KX TVS52 Flash Memory Usage Report JAN 22 2001 8 30 PM Drive Avail Used 1 119 min Imin 1 2 120 min Omin 0 FROM JAN 21 2001 10 20 PM New Cpy Del Exp MSGs 10 10 0 KX TVS80 Flash Memory Usage Report JAN 22 2001 8 30 PM Drive Avail Used 1 120
93. Waiting Lamp 2 by a telephone or 3 by a beeper Multilingual Selection Menu The Message Manager is responsible for recording this menu Allows callers to choose the language they want System User 1 or User 2 prompts when they call the VPS Non Subscriber A caller to the VPS who does not own a mailbox Notification Method See Message Waiting Notification Operator Up to three destinations can be assigned as operators This is the extension that receives calls when the calling party is on a rotary phone or dials 0 Owner s Name After a subscriber records his name the VPS announces his name during transfers Intercom Paging and confirmation of Dialing by Name Independent of this recording is registration of name by System Administrator This allows callers to dial parties by name Dialing by Name rather than by number For example a caller can dial S M I T Smith rather than Smith s mailbox number which can be hard to remember Password A combination of numbers selected by the subscriber to protect access to his mailbox If forgotten the System Administrator or System Manager can clear it so that the subscriber can select a new password Installation Manual 405 Glossary Personal Greetings A subscriber can record messages to greet callers There are 3 kinds of Personal Greetings 1 No Answer Greeting 2 Busy Signal Greeting 3 After Hours Greeting Personal Greeting for Caller ID Available with A
94. a previous message This setting is useful when the first attempt is unsuccessful If set to No the VPS will turn on the Message Waiting Lamp for the first message only The VPS will not turn on the lamp for subsequent messages until the subscriber has accessed the VPS to retrieve the messages stored there Max Digits for 1 48 digits Specifies the maximum number of digits the caller can Callback No 20 enter as a callback number This number will display on beepers if the Beeper Callback No Entry Mode is enabled Callback No 1 10s Sets the maximum allowable time between each digit on Entry Interdigit 5 Beeper Callback No Entry If the caller does not enter Time Out any digits within the specified time the VPS will not accept entry of any additional digits System Up to 32 digits Specifies a telephone number that will display on the Callback No None subscriber s beeper as a callback number The callback number entry mode X must be included in the telephone number Note If Beeper Callback No Entry Mode is enabled through COS the callback number entered by the caller will display on the destination beeper However if the caller fails to enter a callback number the System Callback No will display instead Installation Manual 283 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Other Parameters External Message Delivery Controls the handling of External Message Delivery calls shown To access the pro
95. answers you have a DPT connection Set the DIP Switch to position 0 after initialization is complete The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX TD1232 should be able to communicate through DPT Integration We recommend that the KX TD1232 system has any optional extension cards installed and telephones connected before starting the VPS When running the Quick Setup command Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM from the VPS the PBX transmits the station information automatically This saves time when programming the VPS 96 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 4 4 2 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool Follow these steps after communication between the KX TD1232 and the programming software has been established Refer to the Operating and Maintenance manual for connection information 1 Check the software version a Go to the Main Menu Press the ALT key and the letter V at the same time b Verify the Operating and Maintenance version being used Sample display Connect DSHS KX TD1232 ROM Version P23 1UxxxxxB CAN DB data PC Empty Version 4 03A5 0008301332 MUK This version must be 4 0xA5 or higher to program the KX TD1232 for DPT Integration Note If you have an older version of the maintenance tool but have the correct ROM version in the s
96. at the end of the page Interview Service A special type of subscriber mailbox that enables the subscriber to record up to 10 questions After the answers are recorded the Message Waiting Lamp turns on at the subscriber s telephone Good for claims departments order desks job applications etc Keypad All touchtone keys on the telephone LCD Liquid crystal display Live Call Screening Available with APT DPT Integration only The proprietary telephone works like an answering machine The subscriber can hear the caller through the speakerphone or the handset while the message is being recorded Installation Manual 403 Glossary LOAD One of the utility commands that is used to load new or saved data to the VPS from a personal computer Logical Extension All Calls Transfer to Mailbox An extension that always receives calls directly into its mailbox This feature is used by subscribers who are often unavailable or who do not have a telephone Mailbox Capacity messages The number of messages that can be recorded in a subscriber s mailbox should be set between 5 and 100 messages by the System Administrator or the System Manager Mailbox Capacity recording time The total length of time for messages in a subscriber s mailbox should be set between 5 and 100 min or unlimited length by the System Administrator or the System Manager Mailbox Extension Normally the same number as the telephone extension number Mail
97. been dialed 9 123 4567 The full sequence is therefore 9 outgoing call setup sequence 123 4567 The VPS can discriminate between local and long distance calls and can report outgoing calls and calling times for billing purposes on periodic port usage reports Call Transfer 10 60 s Specifies the length of time that the VPS must wait No Answer 20 before retrieving the transferred call when there is no Time answer at the destination extension Note Make sure that the duration of Call Transfer No Answer Time is longer than the duration of Call Forwarding No Answer Time at the PBX Otherwise the PBX may forward the call transferred by the VPS immediately to its destination without leaving enough time to answer the call Outgoing Call 10 90 s Specifies the length of time that the VPS must wait No Answer 30 before concluding that there is no answer at the outside Time number called Pause Time 1 9 s Specifies the pause time between dialed digits 2 Installation Manual 281 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 62 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Outgoing Call Up to 12 digits Specifies the sequence of codes used by the VPS when Setup consisting of calling a CO line You can set up to 12 digits The Sequence 0 9 X F R S T default value is T T indicates that the system will W T dial the telephone number only after detecting a dial tone Example 9W 9 1
98. causes of the message DPT Interface Connection is not Established Table 18 Cause Remedy The PBX is not a correct type Since the VPS is configured to communicate with the default PBX type KX TVS50 with the KX TA series under APT Integration KX TVS80 with the KX TD816 TD1232 TA1232 TD308 under DPT Integration this message will always appear when connecting to another type of PBX Connect a correct PBX and set the PBX type by using Quick Setup see Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM The cabling between the PBX extension ports and the VPS is not 4 wire or is improperly connected Confirm the cabling is connected as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION The PBX is a correct type but does not have the proper software level to support APT DPT Integration Contact National Parts Center at 1 800 833 9626 or use Inband Integration under hardware settings The PBX is not programmed properly to support APT DPT Integration Do required integration programming as described in this chapter 10 Start up completed a The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start up has been successful The delay varies according to the system s condition b ON LINE MODE is displayed System prompt gt is displayed on the screen To enter system administration Press ENTER All parameters can be set through the menu driven program 11 Go to the System Administration Top
99. date For the year type the last 2 digits Note Enter the exact time and date This command cannot be used when either the System or the Message Manager is accessing the time setting feature 7 2 5 Print Reports at Specified Time PSET Use the PSET command to issue system usage reports Flash Memory Usage Report Port Usage Report Call Account Report at a specified time each day A printer or data terminal must be connected to the VPS at the RS 232C port for the reports to be printed or displayed 1 Type PSET then Press RETURN PSET Report Print Out Service Disable 1 Enable 2 Disable 2 Type 1 to enable this function or Type 2 to disable it Enter The Print Out Time HH MM AM PM 3 Type the time to print the reports Note The reports will be displayed only if the system is in the mode where you see the following prompt Installation Manual 165 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 2 6 Error Log Display ELOG Use the ELOG command to diagnose VPS problems Selection of this command will display an error log COM Communication error between CPU and DSP DATA Process error of voice data MEM Memory error PRG Program error in CPU card R W Read Write error of Flash Memory Type ELOG then Press RETURN ELOG DEVICE ERROR TIME 1 CPU MEM GET JUL 14 14 00 PM 2 CLOCK JUL 14 14 00 PM 3 FLASH DATA R W xx yyyy JUL 14 14
100. even after the power is cut and restored Note While the System Administrator programs via a computer the System Manager cannot change the Service Mode setting The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available Assigning the Service Mode There are 6 Service Modes available Automatic Mode Operates according to the setting in Time Service default Manual Day Mode Operates only in Day Mode e Manual Night Mode Operates only in Night Mode e Manual Lunch Mode Operates only in Lunch Mode Manual Break Mode Operates only in Break Mode PBX Control Mode Operation changes depending on PBX time period available only with APT DPT Integration In the Automatic Mode services have this order of priority Holiday Service gt Caller ID Call Routing gt Trunk Service gt Port Service Holiday service has the highest priority In the Manual Modes Day Night Lunch or Break Holiday Service is disregarded Caller ID Call Routing gt Trunk Service gt Port Service Holiday Service is disregarded In the PBX Control Mode 1 under DPT Integration the VPS obtains the Time Service Day Night Lunch or Break setting from the PBX when a call is received through a PBX and operates accordingly 2 under APT Integration the VPS obtains the Time Service setting from the PBX when the time period changes at the PBX or APT data link has been established between the VPS and PBX When the Integration Mode is other than APT D
101. for APT DPT Integration mode only To access the proper menu for Intercom Paging Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 7 286 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 67 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Intercom Up to 12 digits con Specifies the intercom paging sequence required by Paging sisting of 0 9 the PBX This can be programmed using up to 12 of Sequence and special codes the following 8 letters and 12 dial codes FXW D Disconnecting F Hook Flash R Ringback Tone Detection S Silence Detection T Dial Tone Detection W Wait for 1 s X Pager Dialing A Answer 1 9 0 X Dial Codes Release for Up to 12 digits con Specifies the intercom paging release code required by Intercom sisting of 0 9 the PBX This can be programmed using up to 12 of Paging and special codes the 8 letters and 12 dial codes as specified above FW No Answer 1 30 s Specifies the length of time in seconds the VPS must Time for 5 wait before concluding Intercom Paging when there is Intercom no answer Paging The VPS will return to the caller if the paged party does not respond before this timer expires Announcement 1 3 times Specifies the number of times to announce the Repeat Cycle 1 intercom page Example I have a call for mailbox owner s name Intercom 1 10 times Specifies the numbe
102. forward all calls press 1 849 850 851 852 853 854 849 850 851 852 854 850 To forward busy calls press 2 849 850 851 852 853 854 849 850 851 852 854 851 To forward no answer calls press 3 849 850 851 852 853 854 849 850 851 852 854 392 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 852 To forward busy or no answer calls 849 850 851 852 853 854 press 4 849 850 851 852 854 853 To forward to a CO line press 5 849 850 851 852 853 854 854 To cancel call forwarding press 6 849 850 851 852 853 854 849 850 851 852 854 855 Enter the destination extension 855 number for forwarding 856 Your extension is call forwarded all 856 calls to extension extension number 857 Your extension is call forwarded busy 857 calls to extension extension number 858 Your extension is call forwarded no 858 answer calls to extension extension number 859 Your extension is call forwarded busy 859 or no answer calls to extension extension number 860 Call forwarding accepted 860 861 Call forwarding not accepted 861 Please check the destination number 862 To forward to your Telephone number 862 1 press 1 863 To forward to your Te
103. is responsible for recording System Caller Names To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 6 System Caller Name Announcement Enter To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement Enter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 6 1 Caller ID List No 1 120 Table 60 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Caller ID No Up to 20 digits Assigns the telephone number for which the VPS consisting of 1 9 0 announces prerecorded caller name to extension users None Description Up to 20 characters Enters a name and or description of the Caller ID None number Any ASCII character except V can be used 278 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE System Caller Name Announcement Delete Deletes specified Caller ID List numbers from the list To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement Delete follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 6 2 Caller ID List No 1 120 System Caller Name Announcement Listing Displays all Caller ID List numbers To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement Listing follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 6 3 B6 7 Other Parameters To access the proper menu for Other Parameter
104. make proprietary sets use touchtone signaling Installation Manual 45 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS If the PBX does not provide station to station touchtone signaling VPS services and features will be limited TEST Call an SLT extension from the telephone in question When the call is answered see if the person receiving the call hears touchtones when numbers are dialed Message Waiting Notification from an SLT The PBX extensions should light a lamp or receive stutter dial tone when the Message Waiting Lamp On code is dialed by the VPS The VPS functions best when the extension number of the voice mailbox owner follows the Light On or Light Off code On some PBXs however the extension number is dialed first followed by a hookswitch flash and then the On code This presents a problem if the extension is answered before the VPS sends the hook switch flash If the PBX does not provide message waiting notification from an SLT the VPS can only notify mailbox owners by dialing a beeper number or user assigned extension This process slows down VPS performance as it dials the beeper or extension number and waits to confirm notification The beeper or user assigned extension notification is meant to be used for necessity usually for mailbox owners who are often out of the office e g sales people or field representatives The only other option without message waiting notification is for mailbo
105. mode second operator s 834 extension is not assigned 835 Break mode third operator s 835 extension is extension number 836 Break mode third operator s 836 extension is not assigned 837 Lunch mode first operator s extension 837 is extension number 838 Lunch mode first operator s extension 838 is not assigned Installation Manual 39 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 839 Lunch mode second operator s 839 extension is extension number 840 Lunch mode second operator s 840 extension is not assigned 841 Lunch mode third operator s 841 extension is extension number 842 Lunch mode third operator s 842 extension is not assigned 843 To change the company greeting 843 press 1 To change the company name press 2 To change the department dialing menu press 3 To change the custom service menu press 4 To change the voice label press 5 To modify the user prompt press 6 To change the selection menu press 7 To change the system caller name announcement press 8 844 Enter a class of service number from 844 1 to 62 845 THOUSAND 845 846 Enter a message length from 1 06 846 minutes or O for unlimited length 847 Enter the total message time available 847 per mailbox Valid entries are from 5 to 100 minutes or for unlimited time 848 To set station call forwarding press 4 848 849 To
106. modifiable prompts inD9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS c The VPS plays the prompt number d Press 1 to change the prompt Note Press 2 to go to Step 7g Press 3 to turn off on the prompt e Record a prompt at the tone and Press 1 to end recording f Press 2 to accept the recorded prompt Note Press 1 to review the recorded prompt Press 3 to erase the recorded prompt and try again Return to Step 7e Press X to erase the recorded prompt and exit Go to Step 7g g The VPS plays the next prompt number h Repeat Steps 7d to 7g to record other prompts Note User prompts can be saved in a personal computer command SAVE through the RS 232C Once they have been saved they can be restored with the command LOAD at any time There is a complete list of modifiable prompts and prompt numbers D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Recording System Caller Names 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 5 to modify messages 3 Press 8 to modify system caller names Installation Manual 339 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 4 Enter the Caller ID List Number 1 120 to be modified Note Enter X to return to Step 3 To record system caller names first Caller ID numbers must be assigned see B6 6 System Caller Name Announcement 5 The VPS plays the Caller ID number and its name To change the name Press 1 If a name has not yet been recorded for this Caller ID number go to Step 6 Note Press
107. naturally and sounds like one voice You can change all service prompts to User 1 or User 2 by changing the DIP Switch setting see Table 1 in 1 3 2 System Components If you wish to change some of service prompts to User 1 or User 2 but not all of them please see the following sections B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Prompt Mode of Tables 40 and 41 Service Prompt of Tables 42 and 43 B6 5 Prompt Setting Table 59 B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE Incoming Call B5 2 Custom Service Prompt Mode in Table 49 Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 1 20 members maximum 509 1 2 8 members maximum 509 2 3 After hours greeting is message 3 4 After hours greeting is not recorded 4 5 All beeper entry modes are disabled 5 6 All calls transfer to mailbox disabled 6 7 All calls transfer to mailbox enabled 7 8 All mailboxes are assigned 8 9 All messages erased 9 10 All transfer services disabled 10 11 AM 11 12 and 12 317 13 12 325 12 13 and transferred via mailbox number 13 317 13 12 14 Answer length is number 14 454 15 Any digit on the telephone keypad 15 can be used Installation Manual 347 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83
108. notifies subscribers when messages are left Subscribers may send and transfer messages to other subscribers within the system The VPS is easy to use helping callers through the system with step by step voice prompts Unlike handwritten messages or those left with answering services VPS messages are confidential they are stored in a mailbox and retrieved only with the subscriber s password Other advantages of the VPS are clarity and accuracy which are commonly lacking with written messages The messages come directly from the caller in the caller s own voice To further ensure accuracy the system allows the sender to correct or change messages before saving them Messages can be erased or transferred by the recipient 1 1 2 Basic Operations Greeting Callers The VPS greets callers with a prerecorded message that includes directions for leaving and editing messages The VPS can list single digit numbers for each available extension or mailbox Callers who know the extension of the person they wish to reach may dial the extension number at any time Callers with rotary phones are transferred to a preprogrammed destination which is often an operator or the General Delivery Mailbox to leave a message Sending Messages Callers can review and edit messages before leaving them in a mailbox Subscribers can send messages to an individual or to several mailboxes at once The message sender can then verify that the other subscriber has receive
109. number is dialed or when inadvertently connected to another VPS DND 4 Indicates Do Not Disturb Tone Sent to the VPS if the dialed extension has the Do Not Disturb feature enabled Answer 5 Sent to the VPS when the called extension answers the call Forward to VM Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to a Ringing 6 voice mail port and that voice mail port is available to accept the call 298 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 76 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Forward to VM Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to a Busy 7 voice mail port and that voice mail port is not available to accept the call Forward to Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to Other 8 another non Voice Mail extension Extension Confirmation 9 Sent to the VPS when it successfully dialed a Message Waiting Lamp On or Message Waiting Lamp Off Code Disconnect 9 Sent to the VPS when the other party goes on hook Note Default values in the above table vary depending on the settings of PBX type and Inband Integration PBX Interface Parameters Table 77 Parameter Other KX T series Manufac turers T308 T616 T1232 T96 T336 TD1232 TD308 TD500 TA1232 series Ringback N A N A 1 Al Al 1 1 1 1 Busy N A N A 2 Bl Bl 2 2 2 2 Reorder N A N A 3 B2 B2 3 3 3 3
110. off hook and dial 7301 to turn on Data Line Security This prevents the KX TA series from sending Executive Override or Call Waiting tones to these extensions We recommend that all Voice Mail port extensions have this feature enabled to avoid interruption of recording 7 Select the appropriate outside CO line feature settings depending on how your customer plans to use the VPS A to answer all incoming calls B as an operator backup or C to only answer calls not answered by user extensions Recommended outside CO line feature settings a If the VPS is answering all incoming calls Outside CO Line Mode Use System Programs 414 Day Mode 415 Night Mode 416 Lunch Mode to set this parameter Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group The KX TA series will allow incoming outside calls to hunt only if the outside CO lines are DIL to the first port of the hunt group Lines programmed as Normal do not hunt b If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by the operator Operator Backup Flexible Ringing Assignment For each outside CO line use System Programs 408 Day Mode 409 Night Mode and 410 Lunch Mode to enable ringing at the operator s extension jack Delayed Ringing Assignment To give the operator time to answer the call before the VPS picks up we recommend setting the delay to a few seconds for each extension connected to the VPS Use System Programs 411
111. or at the office All memory is stored and will be retained when the unit is powered up as long as the DIP Switch has been reset to position 0 prior to turning the unit off b Unplug the power cord of the VPS Plug station wire s from the PBX into VPS see 2 7 CONNECTIONS d Connect the computer to the VPS with a Null Modem Cable see 2 8 2 Connecting the RS 232C Cable e Set the DIP Switch to position 5 f Plug in the power cord of the VPS g Wait until the warning appears on the screen h Set the DIP Switch back to position 0 Installation Manual 33 INSTALLATION CAUTION If the DIP Switch is not reset to position 0 after initialization all programming will be lost when the voice processor loses power 5 Perform Quick Setup see Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 6 Check Quick Setup The Power Indicator on the Voice Processor should be solid The screen output should be On Line If you do not see the On Line message check the following The line cord to the Voice Processor has 4 conductors e The programming on the KX TA624 is correctly set in System Program 130 or 130 and 131 The programming on the KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TA1232 or KX TD308 is correctly set in System Program 117 The programming on the KX TD500 is correctly set in the 1 4 VPS DPT Port Assignment screen 7 Set up Class of Service COS for each user Customize voice prompts if necessary see
112. or private Hands free allows the user to monitor a recording through the speakerphone and if desired intercept the call by lifting the handset The private mode notifies the user with an alert tone when a message is being recorded By pressing the LCS button the user can monitor the message and intercept the call by going off hook System Programming or PC Programming only available for KX TD500 users also determines whether the mailbox continues to record after the user intercepts the call 4 5 2 Live Call Screening Password Assignment To allow the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension the extension must have the LCS button lit To light this button on the telephone press the LCS button then enter the password This password prevents others from activating the LCS feature and listening to the messages as they are being left It is not necessary to enter PITS Programming to activate this feature PC programming is also available for KX TD500 users see 4 5 6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming 1 Lift the handset or Press the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number 77 for KX TA624 or 799 for KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration from system program 3 For KX TA624 Press a 3 digit password 000 999 twice and For KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration Press 3 digit password 000 999 twice You will hear a confirmation tone then a dial tone Screen output The 3 digit
113. password you entered is displayed 4 Hang up or Press the SP PHONE button 5 Repeat these steps for each telephone Installation Manual 105 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 4 5 3 Live Call Screening Password Canceling To cancel the password follow the procedure below It is not necessary to enter PITS Programming to activate this feature PC programming is also available for KX TD500 users see 4 5 6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming 1 Lift the handset or Press the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number 77 X for KX TA624 or 799 for KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration from system program 3 For KX TA624 Press a 3 digit password 000 999 once and For KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration Press a 3 digit password 000 999 once You will hear a confirmation tone then a dial tone Screen output Password Cancel 4 Hang up or Press the SP PHONE button 5 Repeat these steps for each telephone 4 5 4 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment via System Programming This program allows the VPS to continue recording the conversation in the mailbox after the extension intercepts the call during the Live Call Screening PC programming is also available for KX TD500 users see 4 5 6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming 1 Enter 620 for KX TA624 or 610 for KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration fro
114. setting enter E forwards callers to the specified extension The Mbx setting enter M enables callers to leave messages in the specified mailbox A System Group Distribution List number can be specified here instead of a mailbox number 264 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Caller ID Call Routing Delete Permits specified Caller ID List numbers to be deleted from the list To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing Delete follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 3 2 Caller ID List No 1 120 Caller ID Call Routing Listing Displays all Caller ID List numbers To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing Listing follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 3 3 Installation Manual 265 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS B6 1 System Group Assignment shown To access the proper menu for System Group Assignment follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 System Group Assignment Mailbox Group This parameter allows a caller to send a message simultaneously to several mailboxes These mailboxes may be assembled into a list called a System Group Distribution List The VPS is able to maintain up to 20 System Group Distribution Lists Each list can have up to 20 destination mailbox numbers Mailboxes can be added to o
115. software version of the PBX is lower than this call National Parts Center 1 800 833 9626 to order a software upgrade From the SYS PGM NO screen a Enter 998 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE The system displays the ROM version and the date it was created This version must be Y581A or higher for Digital Integration to be utilized Set the date and time using System Program 000 Date and time are automatically synchronized between the VPS and the Panasonic KX TA 624 during Auto Configuration or Quick Setup Set PBX extension numbering using System Program 009 Assign the Voice Mail Port This program tells the PBX which jacks will be connected to the VPS This allows the PBX to send the proper Digital Integration information to those ports Jack 07 or jacks 07 and 08 can be assigned for the VPS1 as the Voice Mail Port Jack 15 or jacks 15 and 16 can be assigned for the VPS2 e KX TVS50 KX TVS60 2 ports assign max 2 jacks 78 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX Extension group 7 Port 1 Port 2 KX TA624 Port 1 Port 2 Extension group 8 From the SYS PGM NO screen a Enter 130 for VPS1 or 131 for VPS2 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output Disable c Press the SELECT button AUTO ANSWER Screen output Port 7 or Port 15 d To assign 2 jacks Press the SELECT button AUTO A
116. subscriber s mailbox number Mailbox Number None number length is determined during setup or when initializing the system Mailbox numbers cannot begin with O If the length of the mailbox number has been defined as 3 digits for example the valid range for all mailbox numbers would be 100 through 997 998 and 999 would be reserved for the Message Manager and the System Manager The length of the mailbox number cannot be changed through the Mailbox Setting screen once it has been specified Editing Mailboxes The parameters of each mailbox can be edited based upon the needs of the subscriber To access the proper menu for mailbox editing follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No 1 230 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 37 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default The Extension 2 5 digits Used to transfer calls through the VPS to a subscriber s of the Owner None mailbox Any valid extension number including an Extension Group List number can be assigned Note If an Extension Group List number is assigned to a mailbox all group members are able to share the information stored there Owner First Up to 16 The first 4 letters of both the first and last name is printed Name alphabetic on the Mailbox Assignments report characters Owner Last Name None The Dialing by Name feature uses the last name
117. the first 3 or 4 letters of the owner s last name Class of Service Number Enter any COS number 1 62 Interview Mailbox Number Interview Mailbox Numbers must be different from Subscriber Mailbox Numbers All Calls Transfer Mailbox Follow the steps listed below to create edit or delete any mailbox parameter 1 Log in to the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 1 for Mailbox Setup 4 Press 1 to Assign or Edit 5 Type the mailbox number Installation Manual 303 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE 6 Press 2 to accept the entry 7 As each parameter plays a Press 1 to enter the new parameter or 2 to leave the parameter unchanged b Enter the parameter c Confirm the new parameter is correct and Press 2 to accept it 8 The All Calls Transfer to Mailbox parameter is the last parameter to be entered When this entry is completed the prompt at Step 4 will appear Continue assigning or editing other mailboxes by repeating Steps 5 7 9 To return to the Main Menu Press X twice Deleting a Mailbox The System Manager must delete the mailboxes that are no longer needed When another person accesses the VPS the action is automatically canceled 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 1 for Mailbox Setup 4 Press 2 for Delete 5 Type the mailbox number 6 Press 1 to delete the mailbox 304 Installation Manual SYSTEM MANAGER
118. to accept the greeting 12 The system will then play the menu for changing the No Answer Greeting Busy Signal Greeting and the After Hours Greeting Record the Busy Signal Greeting as you did for the No Answer Greeting 13 Continue on to the After Hours Greeting and hang up when finished Installation Manual 155 FINAL SETUP 6 2 2 Recording the Owner s Name 1 Dial the Extension Number of the VPS 2 When the VPS answers Press 6 and Dial the Number of the mailbox to which you wish to record the Owner s Name 3 Enter your Password if programmed then Press You are now inside the mailbox Press 5 for Mailbox Management Press 3 to change the Owner s Name The system will say Owner s name is not recorded Record owner s name at the tone State the Owner s First and Last Name at the tone Press 1 when finished The VPS tells you the customer s name oc 9 Press 2 to accept TEST THE SYSTEM Before backing up the system call each extension to see that each port functions as it should Check for proper greetings and call transfers 156 Installation Manual FINAL SETUP 6 3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM 1 Choose the Utility Command Type SAVE then Press ENTER See screen output below From System Administration Top Menu Enter The Number 3 Utility Command KX TVS50 SAVE VPS Flash Memory Data Save VPS gt PC Xmodem 1
119. to answer the call before the VPS picks up we recommend setting the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each extension connected to the VPS Use System Programs 411 Day Mode 412 Night Mode and 413 Lunch Mode Outside CO Line Mode Set the mode for each outside CO line to Normal Use System Programs 414 Day Mode 415 Night Mode and 416 Lunch Mode to set this parameter Connect the jack s assigned in Step 3 to the VPS Connect your laptop computer to the VPS and start your communication software i e HyperTerminal Procomm Plus Smartcom Disconnect the power from the VPS and set the DIP Switch to position 5 Only perform this step when initially setting up the system 80 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX CAUTION Setting the DIP Switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System resulting in a loss of all user programming and voice messages except Userl and User2 prompts 9 Plug in and power up the VPS and wait approximately 2 5 min while the system initializes Before starting the VPS make sure all installation and line connections have been done as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION After turning the power on the system starts up in the following sequence The Power Indicator light goes on The Power Indicator light begins to flash Checking Flash Memory Cards is displayed on the screen Scree
120. to set Message Waiting Notification 3 Press 3 to assign Telephone Number 4 Press 1 to change the first telephone number 2 to change the second telephone number or 3 to change the third telephone number 5 Press 1 to set the telephone number 330 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 6 Type the telephone number 7 Press 2 to accept the entry 1 Change the telephone number 2 Accept 3 Review 4 Add more digits 5 Insert a pause 6 Set dial mode 7 Insert a wait for dial tone 8 Insert a beeper display command 8 Press 1 to be notified by telephone or 2 by a beeper Installation Manual 331 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D4 CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX The Message Manager is able to customize the Message Manager s mailbox by specifying 1 the password 2 the extension numbers of Operator 1 2 and 3 or 3 Telephone numbers 1 and 2 as the call forwarding destinations when Remote Call Forwarding is set to a CO line Note While the System Administrator programs via a computer the Message Manager cannot access this service The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available Message Manager s Password The Message Manager can specify the password at any time using the telephone The password contains up to 10 numeric characters It must be entered to execute the message management operation Operator s Extensions When callers require
121. you should type the current OLD password before entering a new one b Type the password Verification c Type the password again for verification 4 To clear a password a Type 1 or 2 Maximum 10 characters NEW PASSWORD b Press ENTER Do not type a password on this screen VERIFICATION c Press ENTER Do not type a password on this screen Note The password entered on the screen will not appear The VPS does not distinguish the capital letter from the small letter 7 2 4 Set Time TIME Use the TIME command to set the system date and time A number of system functions require that the system time and date be set correctly These functions include message waiting notification external message delivery call retries after initial failure to connect and automatic deletion of messages Time Synchronization If you have DPT Integration between the VPS and your PBX latest software version the date and time are automatically sent from the PBX to the VPS whenever the PBX sets the date and time Also this transfer occurs whenever DPT Integration is established 164 Installation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Type TIME then Press RETURN TIME Current time is 12 34 PM Enter new time HH MM AM PM 2 Type the current time Current date is MON JAN 1 2001 Enter new date MM DD YY 3 Type the current
122. 0 Follow the procedure below to program the VPS card for DPT Integration 1 Assignment of the VPS card to be connected to the VPS Note If the VPS card to which the VPS will be assigned is already installed in the KX TD500 skip the steps a through d If a new VPS card is installed in the KX TD500 follow the steps below a Go to the 1 1 Slot Assignment screen b Assign the slot Type to be installed to DLC or DHLC card c Click Apply to save the card type assignment d Set Status to INS Screen output 1 1 Slot Assignment Be INS 1 1 SS re ee a ie ss a INS Ce eem M i amm N ran Ten Lo pem Ca Fa ia ems ee rm ei EEE eS S pem ems si EE S E rt E E TREE D LEES CIE fi Baa Bae en ez pe mm pra n JENNI 14 prf 14 1 1 Slot Assignment x Close Help 84 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX e Check the information of Card Properties and confirm the LPR version of the card Note The LPR Version must be 2 or higher for the VPS card 101 DLC DHLC to which the control channel will be assigned Screen output Card Properties 101 DHLG Off hook Time 160 ms M Break Detection Flash Detection Timer hsm Jedi 208 1016 ms Flash Detection lash Min Time Yes C Ho 200 ms
123. 0 disabled 811 Use call waiting on busy signal 811 enabled 812 Use the hash sign key as a wild card 137 812 character 813 Use the pound sign key as a wild card 137 813 character 814 Verification deleted 814 815 was erased 157 815 24 816 was sent on date 305 816 17 817 WEDNESDAY 817 818 Welcome to the general delivery 818 mailbox 819 Welcome to the Voice Processing 250 819 System 248 819 249 819 819 820 When you are finished hang up stay 411 822 82 820 on the line to confirm or change your number 390 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 821 You can add up to number 821 335 821 334 822 You can enter up to number 865 822 82 411 822 82 411 822 82 820 121 822 82 875 822 82 823 You can not add any more digits 823 824 You have number 824 340 824 330 824 164 825 You have a call 825 826 You have a call from name 826 827 You have 1 FAX message 827 828 You have 1 message 828 829 You have 1 new message 829 830 ZERO 830 831 Break mode first operator s extension 831 is extension number 832 Break mode first operator s extension 832 is not assigned 833 Break mode second operator s 833 extension is extension number 834 Break
124. 0 mA minimum Line Voltage 7 V DC minimum Ringing Voltage 40 V AC Extension Numbering 2 to 5 digits programmable Pause Time 1 to 9 s programmable Message Waiting Lamp Programmable Touchtone sequence Main CPU 16 bit microprocessor Flash Memory Capacity e KX TVS50 Approximately 2 h expandable e KX TVS80 Approximately 6 h non expandable Number of Mailboxes KX TVS50 Maximum 32 KX TVS80 Maximum 64 including System Manager and Message Manager mailboxes Number of Messages Maximum 100 per mailbox programmable Personal Greeting Message Length 8 to 60 s programmable Message Retention Time 1 to 30 days or unlimited programmable Maximum Message Length 1 to 6 min or unlimited length programmable Reports Mailbox Assignment COS Class of Service Assignment System Service Report Call Account Report Port Usage Report Flash Memory Usage Report Mailbox Usage Report FAX Call Report Connections Telephone Line Modular connectors x 2 Incase of Inband 2 conducotor wire x 2 Incase of APT 4 conducotor wire with APT Interface x 2 Incase of DPT 4 conducotor wire with DPT Interface x 1 Data Port RS 232C interface port Environmental Requirements 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F 10 to 90 relative humidity Power Source 120 V AC 60 Hz Power Consumption Approximately 10 W I
125. 00 PM MEMORY 4 DSP SCAN JUL 14 14 00 PM 5 DSP FIFO JUL 14 14 00 PM 6 CPU APPLICATION x JUL 14 14 00 PM Port number 1 2 Note The following tables display and explain the errors that the system can identify Table 29 Device Error Log Indications Indication Meaning CPU MEM GET CPU card software memory acquisition error CPU card is short of memory temporarily because of too much traffic CLOCK Clock access error Clock IC is out of order Check the hardware FLASH DATA R W xx yyyy Flash Memory access error If there is a sector that MEMORY often causes errors check the flash memory IDE error code yyyy read write error sector number DSP SCAN DSP SCAN error DSP is out of order Check the hardware DSP FIFO DSP FIFO error During the system is handling calls there is something wrong with DSP and FIFO memory temporarily CPU APPLICATION x Application error While the system is handling calls temporary application error occurs x port number Port number 1 2 166 Installation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Examples of a terminal display when errors are generated Table 30 Error Indications at System Startup Indication Meaning ROM ERROR Sum Error ROM checksum error FLASH MEMORY ERROR Initialize Flash Memory initialization error Error FLASH ME
126. 1 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 System Manager s Mailbox No 999 Message Manager s Mailbox No 998 Note Depending on the PBX extension numbering the mailbox numbers might be 2 to 5 digit long 148 Installation Manual CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 5 6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER The System Administrator should explain the basic functions of the VPS to all the subscribers He should explain which service Voice Mail service Automated Attendant service Interview Service or a Custom service will play during the day and what services will play during night lunch and breaks He should explain that outside callers are called non subscribers because they do not have mailboxes VPS guidance prompts will assist non subscribers in reaching the extension or mailbox they need He should explain the responsibilities of the System Administrator the Message Manager and the System Manager and how each can be contacted phone number and or mailbox number The System Administrator should also explain the special privileges of VPS subscribers Subscribers can call from any touchtone telephone in the world and get their messages To check messages or change mailbox parameters from an outside telephone do the following As soon as the VPS plays a guidance message Press code 6 X and then the mailbox number For example a subscriber who has extension 115 and mail
127. 1 gt User Prompt 1 2 gt User Prompt 2 None gt User Prompt 1 amp 2 Quick Setup Line Monitor DTMF Information Display Don t leave enabled after troubleshooting Wait Time for Caller ID Installation Manual 175 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 2 17 7 2 18 7 2 19 Quick Setup QSET Use the QSET command initially to setup the VPS very roughly when you use it for the first time or after system initialization Note Quick setup requires VT100 emulation software Type QSET then Press RETURN Circuit Condition Display LMON Use the LMON command to display the circuit condition every 1 5 s To turn off this command enter The following circuit conditions may be displayed Ready Possible to serve Incoming Call Processing arrival service Outgoing Call Processing sending service DSP Reset Processing DSP reset disposition PT connect Processing PT connect disposition Error DSP Card is not loaded LMON No Status 1 Ready 2 Ready Touchtone Information Display PUTD Use the PUTD command to display the touchtones the VPS receives and sends In addition to the touchtones the following will be displayed the Incoming Call Service Voice Mail Automated Attendant Custom and Interview entered by the caller and the time periods that the ports are enabled Type PUTD The VPS will remain in this mode until PUTD is entered again T
128. 11 Voice Mail Integration 24 T1 Minor Error 12 UCD 13 Phantom Select the number 11 Installation Manual 69 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 7 Choose the Call Hunting extension group Set the last extension group to A for Automated Attendant Miscellaneous Expansion Card Type Master gt Slave gt Local Access gt Priority TRG No 1 1 Call Hunting gt EXGNo 1 D SPD TRS Override gt CO Auto Hold by Push DSS Key gt CO Key gt Adjust Time gt PBX Code gt EXPI EXP2 COT EXTI COT EXTI 2 3 2 3 2 3 D D Disable Enable Disable 01 00 AM EXP3 EXT2 EXT2 4 5 4 5 4 5 D D HOTEL FEATURE DID SELECT Off Hook Monitor 6 7 8 6 7 8 6 7 8 D D A gt Off gt EXT Number gt Enable Caller ID Extension EXP 1 Not Stored EXP 2 Not Stored EXP 3 Not Stored EXP 4 Not Stored 8 Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu Select Line and then select CO Line Setting 1 Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group CO Line Setting CO C T D D P C CPC DIL 1 1 R DIL 1 1 No R I T P I Detection EXT No Lunch Break N G A M S D Mode Out Day Night V Group Grroup L F 01 Y 1 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 205 205 Reg 02 Y 2 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 205 _ EXT 205 Reg 03 Y 3 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 205 205 Reg 0
129. 114 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 4 5 14 4 5 15 4 5 16 4 5 17 Live Call Screening Password Control This feature allows Operator s and the Manager of the PBX to cancel the password for LCS at any extension If a user forgets the preprogrammed password Operator s and the Manager of the PBX can cancel the LCS password 1 Enter PITS Programming For KX TA624 With the phone on hook Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM Display changes to PITS PGM Mode For KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PITS PGM Mode Dial 2 for KX TA624 or 03 for KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration Dial the desired Extension Number or Press X to remove all passwords Press STORE For KX TA624 Set the MEMORY switch to SET For KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset 6 Repeat these steps for each telephone bk IN Two Way Recording into Mailbox This feature allows extension users to record conversations into their mailboxes by pressing the Two Way Recording TWR button Two Way Transfer into Mailbox This feature allows an extension user to record a conversation into another person s mailbox by pressing the Two Way Transfer TWT button and dialing the mailbox number This is commonly used by a pe
130. 20 Wait for Caller ID WCID in 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS Caller ID Note 2 In the documentation for the KX TD8 16 1232 series PBX the Caller ID feature is called CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation Note Depending on the model and or the software version of the connected PBX see 3 1 1 DPT or Inband Signaling you may not be able to utilize some of the features listed above For more information call National Parts Center at 1 800 833 9626 APT Installation Manual 77 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 4 2 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA624 4 2 1 KX TA624 Software Verification and Programming for Digital Integration via the Manager s Extension It is important that the KX TA624 has the proper software level to allow Digital Integration with the VPS Follow the procedures below to confirm the software level then complete the required programming before starting up the VPS All of the following procedures must be done after entering system programming Refer to the KX TA624 Installation Manual for instructions on how to enter the system programming mode Software Verification 1 Check the software version of the KX TA624 using System Program 998 Example Y581AYYMMDD M The underlined digits represent the software production date code year month day For Digital Integration the software version of the PBX must be Y581A or higher If the
131. 232 KX TA1232 KX TD308 KX TA series OTHERS OD Um KX TVS80 Quick Setup PBX type Please select your PBX type KX T308 KX T616 KX T1232 KX T96 KX T336 KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TA1232 KX TD308 KX TA series KX TD500 OTHERS EO b Select your PBX type The required steps are different for some models Go to the step indicated below for that type Table 20 1 KX T308 616 Go to Step 2 2 KX T123211D 3 KX T96 Go to Steb 3 4 KX T336 0 Others RT 5 KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TA 1232 Go to Step 4 6 KX TD308 7 KX TA series 8 KX TD500 Notes APT Integration with the KX TA624 will be activated automatically by selecting 7 KX TA series DPT Integration with the KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TA 1232 KX TD308 or KX TD500 will be activated automatically by selecting 5 KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TA1232 6 KX TD308 or 8 KX TD500 120 Installation Manual CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM APT DPT Integration provides a quicker way to create mailboxes and set the time and date by transferring extension and time information from the PBX automatically 2 Extension Numbers of VPS Ports Screen output Quick Setup Assigned extension No of VPS Port Please enter extension number of VPS qs 2 Please enter extension numbers 2 digits S Next Screen Enter extension numbers of VPS ports with 2 digit numbe
132. 3 675 618 412 675 412 675 202 151 675 131 675 676 To enter your callback number press 676 392 1 677 To erase and exit press 732 603 678 614 677 732 601 678 677 678 To erase and try again press 3 732 603 678 614 677 732 601 678 677 732 603 678 380 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 679 To erase this message press 3 717 706 679 726 753 208 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 753 698 717 706 679 753 208 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 680 To erase this prompt and use system 714 680 757 prompt press 2 714 680 911 681 To erase this question press 1 681 748 749 689 682 To erase press 3 647 603 682 683 To fast forward press 6 717 725 734 683 670 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 753 698 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 684 To generate fax call report press 1 684 To clear fax call counts press 2 685 To generate flash memory usage 685 report press 1 To clear flash memory usage report press 2 686 To generate mailbox usage report 686 press 1 To clear mailbox usage counts press 2 687 To generate port usage report press 1
133. 3 Click Apply to save the changed data Screen output 4 1 Trunk Line 106 ELCOT M Port Ho Copy Hame Incoming Typt Dial Type Destination Eu Hight fe Lunch ciber A Borte Wink Signal Time out tart Signal Typ CPC Signal x C Enable Nen ionTime 40 ms Disable Detection Time 400 ms M IN Detection C Enable Detection Time C Disable Caller ID Security Mode Enab C Disable sending TIE Caller ID 41 Trunk Line M OK Help Installation Manual 65 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS b Assignment of IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer destination 1 Go to the 3 1 Trunk Group screen 2 Assign Intercept Destination Day Night for the trunk CO line group 3 Click Apply to save the changed data Note Specify the FDN for the extension group to which VM or AA has been assigned Screen output 3 1 Trunk Group Bee Group Ho 1 x Copy Intercept Destination Pause Time before Flash Max Dial Ho after EFA Signal Line Hunting Order Tenant No Flash Time Hormal 1 EM 600 ms Disconnecting Time Pause Time PBX Access Code se 8 CE Et Numbering Plan ID Public Private PBX Dial Tone C Di Outgoing Default E E Enable Disable Incoming pefautt Private x PBX Ringback Tone C Enable Disable Type of Number Publi ublic Private Outgoing nefautt M Default C
134. 4 5 6 7 or 8 to generate the desired report 1 System Service Report 2 Flash Memory Usage Report 3 Port Usage Report 4 Mailbox Usage Report 5 Mailbox Parameter Report 6 Call Account Report 7 Class of Service Parameter Report 8 Fax Call Report Note The Mailbox Parameter Report is displayed as Mailbox Assignments The Class of Service Parameter Report is displayed as COS Assignments 4 For Flash Memory Usage Report Port Usage Report Mailbox Usage Report or Fax Call Report Press 1 To generate the Mailbox Usage Report Go to Step 5 5 Mailbox Usage Report Type the mailbox number of the start of the range Note If a is entered in place of each digit of the mailbox numbers e g for 3 digit mailbox numbers reports for all mailboxes will be printed and the System Report Menu will appear In this case Step 6 can be skipped 6 Press 1 to specify the mailbox range and Type the mailbox number of the end of the range or Press 2 to obtain all mailbox usage counts This mailbox number is the end of the mailbox range The mailbox number entered in Step 5 is the start of the range For 318 Installation Manual SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE example to specify the mailbox range 1001 through 1209 enter 1001 in Step 5 and 1209 in Step 6 Note While the System Administrator programs via a computer a System Report will not be generated The System Report starts t
135. 4 1 6 Step 6 should only done if the VPS is going to answer all incoming Central Office lines directly Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu Select Line and then select CO Line Setting 1 Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group CO Line Setting CO C T D D P C CPC DIL 1 1 R DIL 1 1 No R I T I Detection EXT No Lunch Break N G A M S D Out Day Night V Group Grroup L F 01 Y 1 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 165 165 Reg 02 Y 2 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 165 EXT 165 Reg 03 Y 3 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 165 EXT 165 Reg 04 Y 4 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 165 165 Reg 05 Y 5 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 165 165 Reg 06 Y 6 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 165 EXT 165 Reg 07 Y 7 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 165 EXT 165 Reg 08 Y 8 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 165 165 Reg 09 Y 8 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 165 165 Reg 10 Y 8 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 165 165 Reg 11 Y 8 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 165 EXT 165 Reg 12 Y 8 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 165 EXT 165 Reg 7 Follow steps 5 11 in 4 4 1 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Manager s Extension Installation Manual 99 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX
136. 4 Y 4 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 205 205 Reg 05 Y 5 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 205 205 Reg 06 Y 6 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 205 205 Reg 07 Y 7 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 205 205 Reg 08 M 8 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 205 205 Reg 09 Y 8 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 205 205 Reg 10 Y 8 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 205 205 Reg 11 Y 8 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 205 205 Reg 12 hd 8 D 80 10 N Disable Disable EXT 205 205 Reg 70 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 3 3 7 KX TD308 Programming for Inband Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool 1 Go to the Main Menu Choose System Data Programming BATCH 1 or INTERACTIVE 2 Before choosing Batch Programming you must open a file in the Disk File Management Menu Item 3 Before choosing Interactive Programming you must connect with the system in the DSHS Connect Disconnect menu Main Menu 1 System Date Programming BATCH 2 System Date Programming INTERACTIVE 3 Disk File Management 4 DSHS Management 5 DSHS Connect Disconnect 6 Quit Select menu Number 2 Choose Station ALT S from the System Data Programming Main Menu System Data Programming Main Menu AuxPorts ALT U Manager ALT M
137. 41 1 To set covering extension transfer status press 2 To set intercom paging status press 3 To set beeper access status press 4 To set operator transfer status press 5 To set returning to top menu automated attendant service status press 6 742 To set the clock press 4 752 745 652 742 699 670 752 745 652 742 699 868 670 743 To set the group distribution lists 637 636 634 743 press 4 637 636 634 743 628 637 636 634 743 628 869 744 To set up mailbox press 1 744 To set class of service press 2 To set the clock press 3 745 To set up message waiting 745 notification press 2 752 745 652 742 699 670 752 745 652 742 699 868 670 746 To skip setting the password press 120 746 the hash sign 152 746 747 To skip setting the password press 120 747 the pound sign 153 747 748 To skip to the next question press 2 627 748 749 689 644 748 749 689 681 748 749 689 748 749 689 749 To skip to the previous question press 627 748 749 689 3 644 748 749 689 681 748 749 689 748 749 689 750 To skip press 2 647 750 757 647 750 647 750 911 Installation Manual 387 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifia
138. 63 664 To deliver now press only the hash 148 664 208 sign 665 To deliver now press only the pound 149 665 208 sign 666 To enable call blocking press 1 666 To enable call screening press 2 To enable intercom paging press 3 To enable beeper access press 4 To disable all transfer service press 5 667 To end recording hang up 667 To cancel your message press X if you have a touch tone phone 668 To end recording hang up or press 1 668 702 for more features 669 To end recording press 1 669 702 669 521 669 702 Installation Manual 379 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s 670 To end this call press X 717 725 670 717 725 734 683 670 720 670 711 663 711 663 752 745 752 745 711 663 648 201 648 201 652 742 652 699 1 649 ON o llc c B mim cT ON Ll 652 649 200 718 671 1 1 1 1 1 1 671 enter a new name or mailbox 602 213 press X 672 To enter another extension press X 672 673 To enter another extension press 2 695 673 674 To enter by name press the hash sign 413 674 and 1 413 674 618 412 674 412 674 202 151 674 131 674 675 To enter by name press the pound 413 675 sign and 1 41
139. 663 648 201 210 670 202 For department dialing press 412 675 202 412 674 202 203 For example to enter 5 o clock press 203 5 and the hash sign or to enter 5 15 press 5 1 5 and the hash sign 204 For example to enter 5 o clock press 204 5 and the pound sign or to enter 5 15 press 5 1 5 and the pound sign 205 For example to enter January press 1 205 and the hash sign 206 For example to enter January press 1 206 and the pound sign 207 For external message delivery press 3 207 356 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 208 For help press 0 149 208 149 665 208 717 706 679 726 753 208 717 706 679 753 208 143 208 141 208 148 208 148 664 208 142 208 140 208 209 For interview mailbox management 209 press 1 210 For mailbox management press 5 711 663 648 201 210 212 670 711 663 648 201 210 670 211 For notification by telephone press 1 211 For notification by beeper press 2 212 For other features press 6 711 663 648 201 210 212 670 711 663 652 649 200 212 670 213 For the next name press 2 602 213 718 671 214 FORTY 214 215 FORTY MINUTE 215 216
140. 687 To clear port usage counts press 2 Installation Manual 381 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s 688 To generate system service report 688 press 1 For flash memory usage report management press 2 For port usage report management press 3 For mailbox usage report management press 4 To generate mailbox parameter report press 5 To generate call account report press 6 To generate class of service parameter report press 7 To generate fax call report press 8 689 To go directly to a question press 4 627 748 749 689 644 748 749 689 681 748 749 689 748 749 689 690 To hold this call press 2 268 711 690 268 711 690 275 691 To insert a beeper display command 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 press 8 691 647 603 733 608 692 693 691 692 To insert a pause press 5 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 691 647 603 733 608 692 693 647 603 733 608 692 693 691 693 To insert a wait for dial tone press 7 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 691 647 603 733 608 692 693 647 603 733 608 692 693 691 694 To keep press 2 659 694
141. 733 612 660 733 604 612 907 661 908 613 To add press 2 647 613 614 To add press 4 732 603 678 614 677 615 To answer the call press 1 615 Otherwise press 2 and hang up 616 To assign or edit mailboxes press 1 616 To delete mailboxes press 2 To reset mailbox passwords press 3 617 To call message sender press 1 617 To record a message press 2 618 To call the operator press 0 274 618 413 675 618 618 413 674 618 619 To call this person press 1 619 645 756 620 To cancel press X 620 To continue press 1 621 To cancel external message delivery 621 642 press 1 622 To cancel holding press 2 now 622 Otherwise I ll try your party again 623 To cancel mailing list review press 623 any key 624 To cancel this message or 624 verification press 3 625 To change caller ID greeting number 625 1 press 1 To change caller ID greeting number 2 press 2 To change caller ID greeting number 3 press 3 To change caller ID greeting number 4 press 4 626 To change group name press 1 626 606 626 606 656 731 Installation Manual 375 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s 627 To change the answer length press 1 627 748 749 689 628 To change the caller name and 637 636 634 743 628 number press 5 637 636 634 743
142. AND KX TD SERIES PBX The required programming is now complete and the VPS and KX TD1232 should be able to communicate through DPT Integration We recommend that the KX TD1232 system has any optional extension cards installed and telephones connected before starting the VPS When running the Quick Setup command Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM from the VPS the PBX transmits the station information automatically This saves time when programming the VPS 4 4 3 KX TD308 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Manager s Extension It is important that the KX TD308 has the proper software level to allow DPT Integration with the VPS Follow the procedures below to confirm the software level then complete the required programming before starting up the VPS All of the following procedures must be done after entering system programming Refer to the KX TD308 Programming Guide or Installation Manual for instructions on how to enter the system programming mode Software Verification 1 Verify Software check the software version of the KX TD308 using System Program 116 Example P871FYMMDDA The underlined digits represent the software production date code year month day For DPT Integration the software version of the PBX must be P871F or higher If the software version of the PBX is lower than this you may not be able to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration
143. Answer Coverage modes are set Operator No Answer Time 10 60 s 30 When a call to Operator 1 2 or 3 is not answered within the time set the VPS will offer other options as defined by the No Answer Coverage Mode Notes This timer applies to Operator 1 2 and 3 e If more than 1 operator is assigned we recommend to reduce the time on the Operator No Answer Time to 15 s Busy Coverage Mode 1 Hold 2 No Answer Coverage 3 Call Waiting 4 Disconnect Message Hold Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 1 extension is busy 1 Hold Automatically places the caller on hold and the Operator 1 extension is called again 2 No Answer Coverage Offers the option specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller 3 Call Waiting Signals the Operator 1 when another call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX 4 Disconnect Message Disconnects the caller after playing Thank you for calling Installation Manual 141 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Table 24 Description Value Range Description Function Default No Answer 1 Caller Select Specifies how to handle Operator 1 calls when not Coverage 2 Leave Message answered within the time period set by the Mode Operator No Answer Time mode 3 Disconnect Message 4 Next t ISLES 1 Caller Select Allows the caller to leave a Caller Select message or call another extensio
144. Assign an interview mailbox to an existing mailbox Assign a port as an interview mailbox To structure an interview mailbox 1 From the System Administration Top Menu Type 1 1 1 Mailbox Number 1 Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Mailbox Number Mailbox Setting 2 Enter the Mailbox Number that is to be assigned to the interview mailbox This should be an existing mailbox number for the person who responds to the questions 3 At Interview Mailbox Number parameter Enter a Nonexistent Mailbox Number This will be the interview mailbox for this subscriber please make a written note of it for future reference It will not show up in Mailbox Listing If at a later time you want to delete the interview mailbox press backspace at Interview Mailbox Number 4 Exit System Administration Programming 134 Installation Manual CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 5 Enter the subscriber s mailbox and Record the Questions Call the VPS and Press 6 then Dial the Mailbox Number assigned to the interview mailbox From the Main Menu Press 6 1 6 Confirm that your questions have been recorded Call the VPS and Press 6 and the Interview Mailbox Number All your questions should be played Note When using the Custom Service setting 1 digit can be assigned to go to the mailbox of the Interview Service The mailbox owner s message waiting lamp will go on for normal Voice Mail messages and for message left in the separate interview
145. Connect the grounding wire to the ground To ground In most of North America the ground provided by the Third wire ground at the commercial or residential power outlet will be satisfactory However in some cases this ground may be installed incorrectly Therefore the following test procedure should be performed Test Procedure 1 Obtain a suitable voltmeter and set it for a possible reading of up to 250 V AC 2 Connect the meter probes between the 2 main AC voltage points on the wall outlet The reading obtained should be 108 V AC 132 V AC 3 Move one of the meter probes to the third prong terminal GND Either the same reading or a reading of 0 V should be obtained 4 Ifa reading of 0 V at 1 terminal and a reading of 108 V AC 132 V AC at the other terminal is not obtained the outlet is not properly grounded This condition should be corrected by a qualified electrician per article 250 of the National Electrical Code 5 Ifa reading of 0 V at 1 terminal and a reading of 108 V AC 132 V AC at the other terminal is obtained then set the meter to the OHMS RX1 scale place 1 probe at the GND Terminal and the other probe at the terminal which gave a reading of 0 V A reading of less than 1 Q should be obtained If the reading is not obtained the outlet is not adequately grounded See a qualified electrician 32 In
146. D service will be sent instead as shown To access the proper menu for Message Waiting Notification follow the menu path System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No 2 Device No 1 2 or 3 232 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Notification Setting Device 1 2 or 3 Table 38 Parameter Value Range Default Description Function Dial Number Up to 32 digits consisting of 1 9 0 X P T M X None Assigns a telephone or beeper number to Device 1 2 or 3 The subscriber can also specify the dial number from his telephone P Pause T Dial Tone Detection M Dial Mode Switching Code Touchtone to Pulse or Pulse to Touchtone X Callback Number Entry Code 1 9 0 X st Dial Codes Note The callback number entry code X must be included in the number to be called if the Beeper Callback No Entry Mode is enabled through COS and Type of Device is set to Beeper The proper number of Pauses must be inserted before the callback entry code Important Note When the VPS calls to a CO line via the KX TD500 PRI Card KX TD50290 PRI23 ISDN Primary Rate Access Interface card be sure to add after the telephone number 1112223333 in the example here Example 9P1112223333 PP123PP456PPX Type of Device 1 Telephone 2 Beeper Telephone Specifies the device to receive notification This is automatically set to Beeper when X is
147. DND N A N A 4 B3 B3 4 4 4 4 Answer N A N A 5 A2 A2 5 5 5 5 Forward to VM N A N A 6 Cl Cl 6 6 6 6 Ringing Forward to VM N A N A 7 C2 C2 7 7 7 7 Busy Forward to N A N A 8 C3 C3 8 8 8 8 Other Extension Confirmation N A N A 9 DI DI 9 9 9 9 Disconnect N A N A 9 DD DD 9 9 9 9 N A Not available Installation Manual 299 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Digit Translation Table Parameters Use the Digit Translation Table to translate the Follow On ID Signal from the PBX into the proper codes for the VPS This translation table is only effective for the incoming signal To access the proper menu for Digit Translation Table Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 3 Digit Translation Table Parameters Inter Digit Timeout To access the proper menu for Inter Digit Timeout follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 3 1 Table 78 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Inter Digit 1 4 s Defines the incoming signal interval Follow on ID The Timeout 1 Digit Translation Table is translated by a series of signals received within the specified time period Digit Translation Table Parameters Input Output To access the proper menu for Input Output follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 3 2 Table 79 Parameter Va
148. Department Dialing numbers 1 9 represent department extensions the VPS will provide these numbers to the caller in the initial list of prompts Return to Program Service Setting Auto Attn Setting Menu Enter The Number 1 Program Service Setting Auto Attn Setting Department Dialing Menu 1 Department Dialing No 2 Department Dialing No 3 Department Dialing No 4 Department Dialing No 5 Department Dialing No 1 Department Dialing No 6 Department Dialing No 7 Department Dialing No 8 Department Dialing No 9 102 104 115 136 107 108 109 110 111 Installation Manual 139 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters If you enable operator service you must set the following parameters Operator s Extension and Mailbox Number Coverage Modes and Message Repeat Cycle Operator 1 The default is set at 0 which coincides with the operator of the PBX When a caller tries to leave a message to the Operator 1 the message will automatically go to the General Delivery Mailbox GDM by default Operators 2 and 3 For KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TD500 and KX TA1232 Operators 2 and 3 can be assigned to a floating number that is assigned to a ring group Return to Program Service Setting Auto Attn Setting Menu Enter The Number 2 Program Service Setting Auto Attn Setting Operator s Parameters Men
149. EE MINUTE 572 573 THIRTY TWO 573 574 THIRTY TWO MINUTE 574 575 This call is for name 575 575 247 576 This call is from name 576 577 This caller ID number already exists 577 578 This device is for continuous use 578 579 This device is for scheduled use 579 580 This device is not to be used 580 581 This group has no members 581 372 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 582 This is a new mailbox 582 583 This is for message manager 51 583 584 This is for system manager 51 584 585 This is the General Delivery Mailbox 585 586 This is the last message 586 587 This is the last prompt number 587 588 This is your mailbox 588 589 This is your message 518 589 590 This list member already exists 590 591 This mailbox number is already 591 assigned 592 This message is from name 592 377 592 593 This message is from the general 518 593 delivery mailbox 594 This message will be delivered on 594 17 day 595 THREE 595 596 THREE HOUR 596 597 THREE MINUTE 597 598 THURSDAY 598 599 Time is time 599 600 times 764 600 601 To accept the prompt press 2 732 601 678 677 602 To accept press 1 602 213 718 671 Installation Manual 373 MESSAGE MANAGER S
150. ES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION See4 5 9 Two Way Recording Button Assignment via Station Programming See4 5 12 Button Assignment via PC Programming See 4 5 15 Two Way Recording into Mailbox See 4 5 17 Restriction on TWR TWT Activation See Two Way Recording in Glossary See 4 14 Recording a Two Way Conversation in the Subscriber s Guide 222 Installation Manual SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Two Way Transfer permits a subscriber to record two way See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR APT DPT conversations into another person s mailbox DIGITAL INTEGRATION Integration only See 4 5 10 Two Way Transfer Button Assignment via Station Programming See4 5 12 Button Assignment via PC Programming See 4 5 16 Two Way Transfer into Mailbox See 4 5 17 A Restriction on TWR TWT Activation See Two Way Transfer in Glossary See 4 14 Recording a Two Way Conversation in the Subscriber s Guide Unlimited Message Length permits a mailbox owner to record two way conversations of unlimited length into his or another person s mailbox Two Way Recording or Two Way Transfer The maximum recording time for other messages will automatically be set to 6 min To allow unlimited recording time the Message Length parameter must be set to 0 Unlimited in the COS Class of Service settings See Two Way Recording and Two Way Transfer in this table See Message Lengt
151. Enable hunting for the VPS extension group using System Program 08 Set the hunting type for the VPS extension group to circular using System Program 09 Atevery VPS extension temporarily connect an SLT or butt set go off hook and dial 7301 to turn on Data Line Security This prevents the KX T123211D from sending Executive Override or Call Waiting tones to these extensions We recommend that all Voice Mail port extensions have this feature enabled to avoid interruption of recording At every user s extension go off hook and dial 7192 This sets the proper Follow on ID sequences so that forwarded calls go directly to the extension s mailbox The KX T123211D automatically sends the extension s digits to the Voice Mail port before connecting the caller For Follow on ID to work Ports connected to the VPS must be assigned as Voice Mail ports Extensions must be forwarded to the first port of the Voice Mail using the Busy No Answer mode or the All Calls mode The mailbox number should be the same as the extension number Interaction with other features Call Forwarding lf the extension is forwarded to an extension that is also forwarded the forwarding will not work Call Hunting Hunting does not interfere with Follow on ID Call Transfer Calls transferred to an extension with Follow on ID and call forwarding enabled will be forwarded directly to the mailbox Data Line Security We recommend that al
152. Enter The system can create up to 32 extensions that use the same alternate transfer sequence path as shown To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension Enter Parameter follow the menu System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 3 1 Table 48 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Alternate 2 5 digits Specifies an extension which requires a different Extension None transfer sequence than normal 1 32 Note The Extension Group List or Logical Extension Numbers cannot be assigned Alternate Extension Delete The system can delete extension numbers from the alternate extension group To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension Delete Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 3 2 Installation Manual 239 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Alternate Extension Listing Lists all of the extensions registered in the alternate extension group To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension Listing Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 3 3 B5 2 Custom Service Custom Service is one of 4 incoming call services By assigning a function to each key you can provide callers with a customized key operation service You can establish a maximum of 100 Custom Services with the possible depth of 8 layers The Message Manager should record Custom Service Menus so that cal
153. ION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS should be raised to a higher value Possibly the subscriber should be assigned to a different COS All Calls Transfer to Mailbox 1 Yes 2 No No If this parameter is set to Yes all calls routed to the extension are automatically forwarded to the extension s mailbox without ringing the telephone Forwarding is accomplished through the Automated Attendant service Callers are permitted to leave a message Note When this feature has been set to Yes the mailbox owner s extension does not necessarily need to exist as a phone extension of the PBX Notification Setting Follow the procedure below to set the parameters for the Message Waiting Notification Device feature A maximum of 3 destinations Device 1 2 3 can be specified per mailbox Class of Service programming determines if the subscriber is able to use this feature If the destination device is a telephone the subscriber will be called when he has message s and will have a chance to listen to the message s If the destination device is a beeper the subscriber will be notified when he has message s If the beeper has a display it is possible to send to it a callback number The caller can enter the callback number when he leaves a message If he does not enter a callback number either the System Callback No or the caller s number if it is received through a telephone company s Caller I
154. IX 479 480 SIX HOUR 480 368 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 481 SIX MINUTE OWE SIX 481 482 SIXTEEN 482 483 SIXTEEN HOUR 483 484 SIXTEEN MINUTE 484 485 SIXTEENTH 485 486 SIXTH 486 487 SIXTY 487 488 SIXTY EIGHT 488 489 SIXTY FIVE 489 490 SIXTY FOUR 490 491 SIXTY NINE 491 492 SIXTY ONE 492 493 SIXTY SEVEN 493 494 SIXTY SIX 494 495 SIXTY THREE 495 496 SIXTY TWO 496 497 Sorry 497 498 Sorry I cannot add any more 498 499 Sorry I cannot call this number 499 388 415 500 Sorry mailbox in use cannot be 500 deleted 501 Sorry maximum of 20 destinations 501 exceeded 502 Sorry no one is available to answer 502 the call 503 Sorry no space for recording 503 504 Sorry Operator is not available to 504 answer the call Please call back later 505 Sorry there are no more matching 505 names 505 756 506 Sorry there is no space for recording 506 Installation Manual 369 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 507 Sorry there is no space for recording 507 in this mailbox 508 Sorry this function is not available 508 415
155. KX TVS80 1 48 trunks CO lines provide the usual incoming call service Note Pressing back space will clear the parameter Holiday Setting Delete Cancels the Holiday Service Setting by specifying a holiday number 1 20 To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting Delete follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 3 2 Holiday Setting Listing Displays all of the specified holiday names and dates To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting Listing follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 3 3 B6 4 Daylight Saving Time DST Adjusts the internal clock of the VPS to the starting and ending date of daylight saving time To access the proper menu for Daylight Saving Time follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 4 Installation Manual 275 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 58 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Start Date End MM Month Specifies the starting and ending dates of daylight Date DD Day saving time The VPS advances 1 h on the starting date None of daylight saving time and restores the time on the ending date Both the starting date and the ending date must be set The same date cannot be used for both settings Warning Time Synchronization see 7 2 4 Set Time TIMB overrides the DST setting of the VPS Note The VPS changes t
156. M Display changes to PITS PGM Mode For KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PITS PGM Mode Installation Manual 109 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 2 Press the Flexible CO DSS button that you wish to assign as a Live Call Screening Cancel button 3 Dial 93 Screen output LCS Cancel 4 Press STORE The STORE indicator light turns on The display shows the initial programming mode 5 For KX TA624 Set the MEMORY switch to SET For KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset 6 Repeat these steps for each telephone The Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment is optional Live Call Screening can also be canceled by Pressing the FLASH button 4 5 9 Two Way Recording Button Assignment via Station Programming For the Two Way Recording feature to work at an extension the extension must have a TWR button on it This key must either be a DSS BLF or CO key with a lamp Follow the procedure below to assign a TWR button on an extension This is a station level program and should be done at each individual telephone PC programming is also available for KX TD500 users see 4 5 12 Button Assignment via PC Programming 1 Enter PITS Programming For KX TA624 With the phone on hook Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM Display chang
157. MORY ERROR No No system Flash Memory present System FLASH MEMORY ERROR Program Program could not be loaded from system Flash Load Error Memory FLASH MEMORY ERROR Program Checksum error in program loaded from system Sum Error Flash Memory FLASH MEMORY ERROR System Error Loading of administrator data from system Data Error Flash Memory SYSTEM ERROR 1 Administrator data error SYSTEM ERROR 2 Error loading of report data SYSTEM ERROR 3 Clock error SYSTEM ERROR 4 Mailbox data error SYSTEM ERROR 5 Message data error 1 SYSTEM ERROR 6 Message data error 2 SYSTEM ERROR 7 Error loading of control data SYSTEM ERROR 8 Error loading of voice prompt data SYSTEM ERROR 9 Error loading of MWL control data SYSTEM ERROR 10 Error loading of flash memory identify data SYSTEM ERROR 11 Error writing of VBI chain data SYSTEM ERROR 12 Error writing of BLK chain data SYSTEM ERROR 13 Error loading of user prompt modify data SYSTEM ERROR 14 Error loading of Class of Service data No CO lines are active No Port cards present COs are all disabled All Ports are malfunctioning Ports are malfunctioning for APT DPT APT DPT Interface Connection is not Integration because telephone lines are Established disconnected or Integration with PBX is not set to APT DPT integration mode Installation Manual 167 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Table 31 Error and Warning Indications During System O
158. MS 4 Enable XDP ports Place Voice Mail extensions in Extension Group 8 Station Setting Jack EXT Name X E Doorphone LCS FWD Cordless D X Day Night Mode N A PITS 1234 1234 Time 01 1 101 IN 1 YYYY YYYY StopRec 00 N 01 2 201 1 NNNN NNNN 00 02 1 102 IN 1 StopRec 00 N 02 2 202 1 NNNN 00 03 1 103 IN 1 StopRec 00 N 03 2 203 1 NNNN NNNN 00 04 1 104 IN 1 StopRec 00 N 04 2 204 1 NNNN NNNN 00 05 1 105 JY 1 StopRec 00 N 05 2 205 1 8 00 06 1 106 1 StopRec 00 N 06 2 206 8 NNNN NNNN 00 07 1 107 IN 1 StopRec 00 N 07 2 207 1 NNNN 00 08 1 108 IN 1 StopRec 00 N 08 2 208 1 NNNN NNNN 00 5 Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu Select System 6 Choose Miscellaneous from the System Menu System Menu 01 Day Night 14 Opera Manager EXT Group 02 Class of Service 15 Miscellaneous 03 Emergency Quick Dial 16 Caller ID Modification 04 Speed Dial 17 Switch Type 05 Absent Message 18 DID 06 Flexible Numbering 19 Lunch Break Time 07 Account Code 20 System Time 08 Special Carrier 21 Version 09 Timer 22 ISDN Card 10 Voice Mail 23 T1 Card
159. NSWER again Screen output Port 7 amp 8 or Port 15 amp 16 To assign 1 jack skip this step e Press STORE f Press END HOLD Conditions The lowest jack jack 07 or jack 15 entered here must be connected to the Port 1 of the VPS To change the current assignment from Port 7 to Port 7 amp 8 you must first change it to Disable Likewise if you want to change it from Port 7 amp 8 to Port 7 you must first change it to Disable If the current assignment is already Disable you can make a change in 1 step This condition also applies to System Program 131 When Port 7 amp 8 is selected in program 130 extension jack numbers 07 and 08 will be in extension group 7 automatically Likewise when Port 15 amp 16 is selected in program 131 extension jack numbers 15 and 16 will be in extension group 8 automatically Also the Station Hunting type is set as Circular automatically in each of these 2 extension groups 5 Select the appropriate outside CO Line feature settings depending on how your customer plans to use the VPS A to answer all incoming calls B as an operator backup or C to only answer calls not answered by user extensions Installation Manual 79 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX Recommended Outside CO Line feature settings a If the VPS is answering all incoming calls Outside CO Line Mode Use System Programs 414 Day M
160. Offers the option specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller 3 Call Waiting Signals the Operator 2 when another call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX 4 Disconnect Message Disconnects the call after playing Thank you for calling No Answer 1 Caller Select Specifies how to handle Operator 2 calls when not Coverage 2 Leave Message answered within the time period set by the Operator No Mode 3 Disconnect Answer Time mode Message 4 Next Operator Caller Select 1 Caller Select Allows the caller to leave a message or call another extension In some cases a call to another extension is not available For more information see the Note on Caller Select in Table 24 in 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters 2 Leave Message Instructs the caller to leave a message in Operator 2 s mailbox 3 Disconnect Message Disconnects the caller after playing Thank you for calling 4 Next Operator Transfers the caller to Operator 3 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Operator s Parameters Day Mode Operator 3 Operator 3 receives operator seeking calls when Operator 2 is busy or unanswered and Operator 2 s parameters are set as follows Busy Coverage Mode No Answer Coverage No Answer Coverage Mode next Operator To access the proper menu for Operator Parameters Day Mode Operator 3 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu
161. One of the utility commands that is used to confirm or set the time and date of the VPS Time Synchronization Available with DPT Integration only When the PBX sets a new date and time or when DPT Integration is established the data is sent from the PBX to the VPS Two Way Recording Available with APT DPT Integration only Allows a subscriber to record a conversation into his mailbox 408 Installation Manual Glossary Two Way Transfer Available with APT DPT Integration only Allows a subscriber to record a conversation into another person s mailbox Unlimited Message Length Permits a mailbox owner to record two way conversations of unlimited length into his or another person s mailbox Two Way Recording or Two Way Transfer The maximum recording time for other messages will automatically be set to 6 min Voice Mail A general term used for messages recorded over the phone from one person to another Voice Prompt Recorded VPS instructions to callers These are either system prompts or user prompts VPS Voice Processing System e g Panasonic KX TVS50 and KX TVS80 Installation Manual 409 Glossary 410 Installation Manual INDEX INDEX 411 INDEX A Alternate extension group 194 APT integration 20 73 194 Auto configuration 195 Auto forwarding 195 Automated attendant 195 B Broadcasting messages 195 Busy coverage mode 196 C Call services 196 Call Transfer No Answer Ti
162. PS announces the Company Name so that the receiver realizes what company placed the call to him See D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Company Name in Glossary See 3 5 Receiving External Delivery Messages in the Subscriber s Guide 202 Installation Manual Table 34 SYSTEM FEATURES FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Covering Extension forwards calls to a second extension when the first extension s subscriber is not available to take the call The caller can also access the Covering Extension by pressing 0 while a Personal Greeting is being played or while leaving a message See Covering Extension in Table 37 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Covering Extension in Glossary See 4 2 Covering Extension in the Subscriber s Guide Custom Service allows callers to access specific functions by entering numbers or symbols through the telephone keypad The Message Manager can record up to 100 Custom Service menus These menus can be recorded in various foreign languages and help guide outside callers to the desired extension mailbox System Group Distribution List Department Dialing menu operator fax machine etc Note Callers cannot jump between Custom Service menus more than 8 times See 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS See 6 1 4 Recording the Company Name Enter 6 998 5 2 KX TVS80 only See 7 2 11 Custom Service Report CREP See 7 2 12 Custom Service
163. PT DPT Integration only A subscriber can record up to 4 personal greeting messages for calls from pre assigned Caller ID numbers Each greeting supports up to 8 Caller ID numbers Personal Group Distribution List A subscriber can maintain up to 4 distribution lists each containing a maximum of 20 mailboxes Using this list he can send the same message to all members of a specific distribution list at once Port The point of connection between the PBX and the VPS Pound Sign The key on the telephone keypad Private Message A message recorded as a private message cannot be forwarded You can specify privacy when delivering a message to other subscribers Subscriber s Guide Section 3 1 Prompt Prerecorded VPS sentences that guide subscribers and non subscribers through specific VPS functions The VPS supports 3 prompts 1 System prompts prerecorded by the factory in English 2 User 1 prompts freely recorded by the Message Manager and 3 User 2 prompts freely recorded by the Message Manager Prompts are numbered the Message Manager can turn off and on the prompts individually Remote Call Forward to CO Available with DPT Integration only Allows the System Administrator to program Telephone number 1 and Telephone number 2 as the destination to which the callers are forwarded when the Remote Call Forwarding is set to an outside CO line This feature must be enabled in the COS Class of Service setting to be utilized S
164. PT Integration and the PBX Control Mode is selected the VPS will operate in the Automatic Mode Depending on the model and or the software version of the connected PBX the PBX Control Installation Manual 315 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE Mode may not function properly For more information call National Parts Center at 1 800 833 9626 Follow the steps below to assign a Service Mode 1 Log in the main menu 2 Press 6 for other features 3 Press 4 to change Service Mode setting 4 The VPS plays the current setting Press 1 to change the setting 5 Press 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 to choose the desired Service Mode entry 1 Automatic Mode Operates according to the setting in Time Service default 2 Manual Day Mode Operates only in Day Mode 3 Manual Night Mode Operates only in Night Mode 4 Manual Lunch Mode Operates only in the Lunch Mode 5 Manual Break Mode Operates only in the Break Mode 6 PBX Control Mode Operation changes depending on PBX time period 6 Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it 316 Installation Manual SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C6 CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING SETTING KX TVS80 ONLY Company Greeting greets all incoming callers The System Manager or System Administrator can choose the appropriate company greeting to each individual Time Service period Day Night Lunch and Break for each port and trunk CO line group The default is set
165. Panasonic Voice Processing System Installation Manual KX TVS50 Model KX TVS80 Panasonic y A Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Voice Processing System Model KX TVS50 KX TVS80 Please read this manual before installing customizing or operating the Voice Processing System Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Model KX TVS50 KX TVS80 Voice Processing System We are confident that it will provide your customer or client with many years of dependable service This Voice Processing System was especially tailored for the American environment For example it can be configured for English a second language or a third language System prompts Recorded by the factory in English User 1 prompts Record in any language you like User 2 prompts Record in any language you like These prompts guide subscribers and non subscribers through specific VPS operations However we would like to stress that for outside callers who merely need to be guided to an extension a mailbox or other destinations e g a fax machine they can be greeted by a Custom Service This supports many languages as there are 12 keys on a touchtone phone and you can record up to 100 Custom Service menus One twelfth of these menus can be recorded in one language if you desire Another twelfth can be recorded in another language and so on Thus callers can be guided entirely in their n
166. Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Ringer Equivalence No REN Customers before connecting terminal equipment to the telephone network shall upon request of the Telephone Company inform the Telephone Company of the particular line s to which such connection is made the E C C registration number see the label on the back of the unit and ringer equivalence number REN of the registered terminal equipment The REN is useful in determining the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of
167. Program 2 Parameters 3 System Prompts 4 User Prompts 1 5 User Prompts 2 6 Custom Service Menus 7 Personal Greetings Select No 2 KX TVS80 SAVE VPS Flash Memory Data Save VPS gt PC Xmodem 1 Program Parameters System Prompts User Prompts 1 User Prompts 2 Custom Service Menus Personal Greetings Company Greetings elect No 2 2 To start Press 2 and then ENTER 3 Press RETURN ENTER Following steps are for HyperTerminal as an example 4 Select Receive File from the Transfer Menu 5 Specify a folder where data is to be saved if necessary use Browse 6 Select Xmodem as the protocol to save data 7 Click Receive Installation Manual 157 FINAL SETUP 8 Enter desired filename and click OK The file transfer screen appears and shows download progress Download time will vary depending on the communication speed and file sizes SAVE Completed will appear on the screen when the file has been saved Continue saving the other items as needed It is not necessary to save the Program or System Prompts because they are resident on the hard drive and cannot be altered We do recommend all other data be saved including User Prompt 1 and User Prompt 2 if they have been recorded Notes Recorded caller names for the Caller Name Announcement System Personal cannot be saved by the above procedure only Ca
168. Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 16 APRIL 16 17 at 17 594 17 304 432 17 323 17 197 259 323 17 197 258 158 379 17 318 17 305 816 17 159 17 318 17 197 259 18 number attempts were busy 18 19 number attempts were no answer 19 20 number attempts were successful 20 21 AUGUST 21 22 Auto forwarding disabled 22 23 Auto forwarding enabled 23 24 because message retention time 157 815 24 expired 25 Beeper access disabled 25 26 Beeper access enabled 26 27 Beeper callback number entry mode 27 is after message recording 28 Beeper callback number entry mode 28 is before message recording 29 Beeper callback number entry mode 29 is caller select 30 Beeper callback number entry mode 30 is without message 31 being delivered now 324 31 32 Busy signal greeting is message 32 33 Busy signal greeting is not recorded 33 34 Call blocking enabled 34 348 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 35 Call screening enabled 35 36 Call transferred from the voice 36 processing system 37 CALLBACK NUMBER 37 38 Caller ID number 38 252 38 253 39 Caller ID number and caller name 39 deleted 40 Caller
169. R Ring Detection S Silence Detection T Dialtone Detection W Wait for 1 Second Dial Extension X A Answer 0 9 x t Touchtone Digits Operator Transfer Sequence Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to the operator Example FTX hookswitch flash dial tone dial operator extn Extension Transfer Sequence Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to an extension Example FTX hookswitch flash dial tone dial extn Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to an extension that belongs to the Alternate Extension Group This is useful for extensions that need a special transfer procedure i e blind transfer such as modem extensions Example FTXD hookswitch flash dial tone dial extn hang up Reconnect Sequence on Busy Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the called extension is busy PBXs differ in how they handle this function Test from an SLT to determine the sequence Installation Manual 49 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS Reconnect Sequence on No Answer Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the called extension does not answer PBXs differ in how they handle this function Test from an SLT to determine the sequence Reconnect Sequence on Refused Call Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the called extension s owner has enabled Call Screening to not take the call PBXs differ in how they handle this
170. RATION FEATURES Intercom Paging Callers can page subscribers through built in speakers and external paging equipment For a Caller ID Caller if his name has been recorded for the Caller Name Announcement feature the name will be announced at the end of the page Caller Name Announcement System Personal The VPS announces the prerecorded Caller ID callers names when 1 extension users listen to messages from assigned numbers left in their mailboxes 2 the VPS transfers calls from assigned numbers to the users and 3 the VPS pages the users by intercom If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both system and personal caller name announcements the VPS will use the personal caller name Caller ID Call Routing The VPS automatically sends calls from pre assigned Caller ID numbers to the desired extension mailbox or Custom Service Personal Greeting for Caller ID Each subscriber can record up to 4 personal greeting messages for special callers Time Synchronization DPT Integration only Whenever the PBX sets a new date and time or when DPT Integration is established the data is automatically registered in the VPS Caller ID Note 1 When an incoming outside call reaches the VPS via the PBX the VPS will wait about 2 rings before answering the call to receive the Caller ID information properly from the PBX This waiting time can be changed by using the WCID command see 7 2
171. S CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See External Delivery Message External Message Delivery List and External Message Delivery Redial in Glossary See 3 4 Sending External Delivery Messages in the Subscriber s Guide See 3 5 Receiving External Delivery Messages in the Subscriber s Guide See 3 6 Replying to External Delivery Messages in the Subscriber s Guide External Message Delivery Status allows the subscriber to check the status of undelivered and pending external delivery messages This feature is only available when External Message Delivery has been authorized for the subscriber s COS See External Message Delivery Service in this Table See External Delivery Message External Message Delivery List and External Message Delivery Redial in Glossary See 3 7 Checking and Setting External Message Delivery Status in the Subscriber s Guide 206 Installation Manual SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Fax Management allows the VPS to automatically route an incoming fax signal to a specific fax machine Up to 2 fax machines can be assigned using this feature Outside callers can also reach the fax machine via Custom Service selection if programmed A special mailbox can be assigned to the Fax Manager In this way the VPS can notify the Fax Manager of the status of faxes See Fax Management 1 5 7 8 in 5 2 2 Custom
172. SS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Other Parameters Message Waiting Notification in B6 7 Other Parameters See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION See Message Waiting Notification in Glossary See 4 8 Message Waiting Notification in the Subscriber s Guide 2 4 Installation Manual SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Message Waiting automatically illuminates the message See Message Waiting Notification Lamp waiting lamp on the subscriber s or the Message Manager s telephone when there are unplayed messages waiting in the mailbox Note The extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is the Message Manager s telephone However its default extension number 0 cannot be used with this feature When using this feature you must assign the extension number that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan Notification from an SLT in 3 1 4 PBX Requirements for Integration See 7 2 13 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times MWL See MWL Notification for Unreceived Message in Tables 40 and 41 inB3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Other Parameters Message Waiting Notification in B6 7 Other Parameters See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION See Message Waiting Lamp in Glossary See 4 8 Messag
173. SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS For System Administration system setup mailbox setup and system diagnosis an RS 232C terminal must be connected to the serial interface of the VPS To access the proper menu for Hardware Setting follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 B7 1 RS 232C Parameters To access the proper menu for RS 232C Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 1 Table 70 Parameter Value Range Default Description Function Baud Rate 300 bps 600 bps 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 9600 Specifies the speed at which the data is transferred in bits per second Word Bit Length 7 bits 8 bits 8 bits Defines the number of bits in each byte or character Parity None 2 Odd Even None Specifies the parity to use for error detection Stop Bit Length bit 2 bits 1 bit Specifies the number of bits used to signify the end of the byte Installation Manual 291 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B7 2 Port Setting To access the proper menu for Port Setting follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 2 Port Setting Menu To access the proper menu Port Setting Menu for the selected port follow the menu path as shown
174. Service 2 V M Service 3 FAX Transfer x Exit 4 Dept Dial 5 Repeat Menu x Exit 4 Main Menu Custom 100 System Access 9 Indicates that Custom Service No is 100 Indicates that System prompts are active Indicates that the callers have accessed this Custom Service 9 times This counter can be cleared See 7 2 12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear CCLR 172 Installation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 2 12 7 2 13 Menu Msg None Indicates that the menu message for this Custom Service is None not recorded If menu message is recorded Rec will appear N Xfer Mbx 998 Caller will be sent to General Delivery Mailbox GDM if he dials nothing 1 Custom 1 Custom Service 1 will play when the 1 key is pressed 2 Custom 2 Custom Service 2 will play when the 2 key is pressed 3 Custom 3 Custom Service 3 will play when the 3 key is pressed 4 Dept Dial Department Dialing menu will play when the 4 is pressed Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear CCLR Each Custom Service has an access counter that counts the number of times the service has been accessed This command clears this counter Type CCLR Press Space and Enter Custom Service Menu 1 100 then Press RETURN CCLR 20 Custom Menu 20 Access Counter Cleared Note Type CCLR 0 to clear the access counters of all Custom Service
175. Service Setting Screen output Quick Setup Port Service Setting All ports are currently set up to handle callers with standard automated atten dant operation day and night mode using the Custom Service feature Custom 1 You can change the operation to standard Voice Mail Custom 2 or leave it as automated attendant If necessary Custom 1 and Custom 2 can be modified under the menu Program gt Service Setting gt Custom Service Day Mode Night Mode PORT 1 Auto Attend Auto Attend PORT 2 Auto Attend Auto Attend A Auto Attend V Voice Mail S Next Screen Auto Attend using Custom 1 Voice Mail using Custom 2 Incoming Call Services for all ports Day Night can be defined by this setting Default values for all ports Day Night are Automated Attendant Service Custom 1 To select other incoming call services go to Setting Ports 6 Password Setting Screen output Quick Setup Password Setting System Administrator Password Maximum 10 characters NEW PASSWORD VERIFICATION System Reset Clear Password Maximum 10 characters NEW PASSWORD VERIFICATION You can assign the System Administrator Password and System Reset Clear Password in this screen if necessary IMPORTANT We strongly recommend that you set the password to 10 characters for maximum protection against hackers Do not carelessly reveal the password to other persons e Please change t
176. T Integration a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PITS PGM Mode 2 Press the desired Flexible CO or DSS BLF button that you want to assign as the VTR button 3 Dial 8 Screen output VTR 4 Dial the Voice Mail extension number 5 Press STORE 6 For KX TA624 Set the MEMORY switch to SET For KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset 7 Repeat these steps for each telephone Conditions This button must be a CO or DSS BLF key to be programmed as a VTR button When all Voice Mail ports are busy and this key is pressed the user will hear reorder tone 4 5 12 Button Assignment via PC Programming The KX TD500 users can assign buttons via PC programming Follow the procedure below to assign each button 1 Go to 4 2 Extension Line screen refer to the screen image in 4 5 6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming 2 Select the Card No and Port No which you are going to program 112 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 3 Click CO Key in the upper right corner Flexible CO Key screen for all CO Keys displays Screen output Flexible CO Key EXT1007 CO 19 CO 20 CO 21 22 CO 23 CO 24 Hot aod Hot aed Hot Hot x Hot sa CO 13 CO 14 CO 15 CO 16 CO 17 CO 18 Hot Hot Hot Hot
177. T T ARS ALT A 72 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 7 Choose Miscellaneous from the System Menu System Menu A ccount Codes Caller DD Class of Se R vice D ay Night E mergency Quick Dial F loating Extensions Fle X ible Numbers Miscellaneous P H antom Extensions Seria L Interface S P ecial Carrier T imers Add F U nctions SYSTEM Add Functions C OS V M Status Command DTMF Set y Voice Mail Inte G ration G ocHvcmiEgxmHTmOxXT 8 Choose the Call Hunting extension group Set the last extension group to AA for Automated Attendant Miscellaneous Automatic Access gt Priority gt 1 2 3 gt 2 3 Call Hunting gt EXG No gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS AA Automatic Hold By CO Button Disable Automatic Hold By DSS Button Enable SPD TRS Override Disable FAX Transfer Extension gt Caller ID Extension gt Caller ID Modification Area Code gt Local Call Del Add gt 3 Long Distance Call Del Add gt 0 l 9 Select SAVE F7 Return to the System Data Programming Menu Installation Manual 73 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 10 Choose CO Line ALT L from the System Data Programming Main Menu System Data Programming Main Menu AuxPorts ALT U Manager ALT M System ALT Y CO Line ALT L
178. TURN Auto Attn Department Dialing Menu will be displayed on the terminal 226 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 1 Mallbox 1 Program Setting 2 Class of Service 3 Port Trunk Service 4 Service 1 Automated 1 Department Setting Attendant Dialing 2 Operator s Parameter 3 Alternate Extension 2 Custom Service Installation Manual 221 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 1 Program 1 Mailbox Setting Programming Menu Structure Diagram 1 Enter Edit 2 Delete Mailbox No 1 Entry Mailbox Setting Service 2 Class of 3 Port Trunk 3 Password Reset 4 Mailbox Listing Entry COS No 1 64 2 Notification Setting 1 1st Device 2 2nd Device 3 3rd Device 3 Remote Call FWD to CO 1 Telephone No 1 Day Mode for each port 1 Port Service Night Mode for each port Lunch Mode for each port Break Mode for each port 2 Telephone No 2 Continued Next Page
179. X T series telephone systems with DPT Integration 2 For Panasonic KX TA624 telephone system with APT Integration To change the position use a pointed object such as a pen etc When setting the DIP Switch to any position except 0 1 Disconnect the station wire s and wait a few minutes 2 Disconnect the AC cord from the VPS 3 Set the DIP Switch 4 Connect the AC cord to the VPS 5 Connect the station wire s to the VPS and wait approximately 3 5 min 6 Return the DIP Switch to position 0 Ground Terminal Should be connected to a ground source with less than 1 Q resistance RS 232C Connector Connects an ASCII or VT terminal to the VPS that is necessary to program the system Memory Card One system Stores the proprietary system program and the voice prompts about 30 min worth has the capacity to record approximately 2 h KX TVS50 or 6h KX TVS80 of messages from callers Optional Expansion Memory Card for the KX TVS50 The KX TVS52 can expand the flash memory capacity of the KX TVS50 by 2 h 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible We recommend integration with the following Panasonic phone systems Panasonic KX TA624 Panasonic KX TD308 e Panasonic KX TD1232 Panasonic KX TD816 Panasonic KX TA1232 Installation Manual 21 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW Panasonic KX TD500 Available for the KX TVS80 only Panasonic KX T336 Panasonic KX T123211D We cannot guara
180. X TA624 to Port 1 of the VPS with a 4 wire connection see diagram below This connection creates 1 Voice Mail extension and can only answer 1 call This means that a fully configured 2 port system requires 2 jacks from the PBX VPS 7 Port 1 KX TA624 om Extension 107 8 Port 2 Extension 108 When APT Integration is activated a single extension jack provides 1 single line interface at a Port on the VPS For example when 1 line cord 4 wire is connected to Port 1 on the VPS 1 extension is provided Installation Manual 25 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 4 4 DPT Integration To the Panasonic KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration the VPS ports look like digital extensions The PBX thinks that the VPS is a digital phone and the VPS mimics all actions of a digital set Another advantage of digital integration is that the 2B D communication provides 2 VPS ports for each Digital Station port Communication between the VPS and the PBX through digital integration requires the proper software level in the PBX and 4 wire connections for each port To communicate between the VPS and the PBX through DPT Integration the PBX and VPS must be programmed to work together 1 4 5 Connection Example DPT Integration For example you can connect jack 15 of the KX TD1232 to Port 1 of the VPS with a 4 wire connection see diagram below This connection creates 2 Voice Mail extension
181. XX Indicates any 4 digit extension starting with 33 Note Auto Configuration will set this parameter automatically The Automated Attendant will dial any 2 5 digit PBX extension number except numbers beginning with 0 whether valid or not If the dialed number is included in the numbering plan the Automated Attendant will immediately send it to the PBX without waiting for further input If not the Automated Attendant will wait until the dialed number is recognized as an extension number the internal inter digit timer expires or the caller dials 5 digits If the number for an outgoing call is not found on the Numbering Plan the VPS will consider it an outside number The VPS will then attempt to dial it using the Outgoing Call Setup Sequence 280 Installation Manual Other Parameters Dialing Parameter SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE To access the proper menu for Dialing Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 2 Table 62 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Number of 0 8 digits Specifies the number of digits necessary to access an Digits 1 outside CO line to Access Outside Line Example If the PBX requires callers to dial 9 to access an outside CO line this parameter should be set as 1 This enables the system to recognize that an outgoing call setup sequence is completed once the initial 9 has
182. YSTEMS 2 Assignment of the extension ports to be connected to the VPS a Go to the 1 3 Extension Port Assignment screen b Assign Attribute of the port to be connected to default C Assign DN for the port click DN Refer to check the available directory numbers Note This program allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port To reach the Voice Mail system users dial these extension numbers d Assign Extension Group No for the port Note Specify the extension group number 126 or 127 by default to which VM or AA extension groups have been assigned Group numbers 1 to 126 are available to the VPS through additional programming e Click Apply to save the changed data f Set Port Status to INS Screen output 1 3 Extension Port Assignment Babi Port Ho Attribute Tel Type DH GroupHo Parallel Status 2 TEL T7420 4 Parane gt s re 17238 1 Parane gt ms 4 TEL 17436 1 Parane ms 5 L Parallel INS L mila 4 114 5 5 5 5 5 5 8 68 Zz 2 7 Egg ER ER 3 e z ERI ER ER 7 TEL Le 11 j S 8 y E bu 2 5 Le E 8 TEL 1 3 Extension Port Assignment M OK Apply Cancel Help Installation Manual 59 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 3 Assignment of the extension line to be connected to the VPS a Go to the 4 2 Extension Line s
183. a Manager EXT Group 02 Class of Service 15 Miscellaneous 03 Emergency Quick Dial 16 Caller ID Modification 04 Speed Dial 17 Switch Type 05 Absent Message 18 DID 06 Flexible Numbering 19 Lunch Break Time 07 Account Code 20 System Time 08 Special Carrier 2 Version 09 Timer 22 ISDN Card 10 Voice Mail 23 T1 Card 11 Voice Mail Integration 24 T1 Minor Error 12 UCD 13 Phantom Select the number 11 5 First enter the port numbers that will be connected to the VPS If desired change the default extension numbers of the Voice Mail ports 98 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX Voice Mail Integration VM Port No Master 30 1 J 0 JC Slave 1I JE 1E JE 1E VM Jack EXT Name EXG VM Jack EXT Name EXG 01 30 1 165 V MAILOI 1 13 1 171 V MAIL13 I 02 30 2 166 V MAILO2 1 14 2 172 V MAIL14 1 03 1 167 V MAILO3 1 15 1 173 V MAILI5 I 04 2 168 V MAILO4 1 16 2 174 V MAILI16 1 05 1 169 05 1 17 1 175 V MAILI7 1 06 2 170 V MAILO06 1 18 2 176 V MAILIS I 07 1 177 V MAILO7 1 19 1 179 V MAILI9 1 08 2 178 V MAILOS 1 20 2 180 V MAIL20 1 09 1 181 V MAILO9 1 21 1 185 V MAIL21 1 10 2 182 V MAILIO 1 22 2 186 V MAIL22 1 11 1 183 V MAIL11 1 23 1 187 V MAIL23 1 12 2 184 V MAILI2 1 24 2 188 V MAIL2
184. ach port You can assign any extension number that is not already assigned to another port To reach the VPS users dial these extension numbers It is not necessary to change the default programming for the extensions 295 and 296 From the SYS PGM NO screen a Enter 118 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output VM No gt c Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output VM 1 __ 1 295 _ _ the port number you entered in program 117 d Enter the extension number that you want this port to have The default extension number for port 1 295 port 2 296 e Press STORE f Repeat steps c d ande until all extension numbers are entered Conditions No 2 jacks on the system can have the same extension number If you try to enter a number that is already assigned you will hear an error tone Each digital extension connected provides 2 Voice Mail ports and must have 2 different extension numbers assigned Installation Manual 101 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 6 Connect the jack assigned in Step 4 to the VPS 7 Connect your laptop computer to the VPS and start your communication software i e HyperTerminal Procomm Plus Smartcom Communication Parameters 9600 8 Bit None 1 8 Disconnect the power from the VPS and set the DIP Switch to position 5 Only perform this step when initially setting up the system CAUTION Setting the DIP Swi
185. ak in the vicinity of the leak WARNING TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE Installation Manual 3 Important Information When you ship the product Carefully pack and send it prepaid adequately insured and preferably in the original carton Attach a postage paid letter detailing the symptom to the outside of the carton DO NOT send the product to the Executive or Regional Sales offices They are NOT equipped to make repairs Product service Panasonic Factory Servicenters for this product are listed in the servicenter directory Consult your authorized Panasonic dealer for detailed instructions The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the back of the unit You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft MODEL NO SERIAL NO For your future reference DATE OF PURCHASE NAME OF DEALER DEALER S ADDRESS DEALER S TEL NO WARNING THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS BECOMING ACCESSIBLE DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE 4 Installation Manual
186. all coverage settings depending on the timing parameters of the PBX and VPS Even if the operator call coverage parameters are set to Next Operator on Busy No Answer the call may go to the VPS if the Operator has set the call forwarding to the VPS Operator s Parameters Day Mode Operator 2 Operator 2 receives operator seeking calls when Operator 1 is busy or does not answer and Operator 1 s parameters are set as follows Busy Coverage Mode No Answer Coverage No Answer Coverage Mode Next Operator To access the proper menu for Operator Parameters Day Mode Operator 2 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 2 1 2 Installation Manual 255 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 46 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Operator s 1 5 digits Specifies the extension number for Operator 2 Any valid Extension None extension number can be assigned Operator s 2 5 digits Specifies the mailbox number for Operator 2 Callers to Mailbox No None Operator 2 are prompted to leave a message in this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No Answer Coverage modes are set Busy Coverage 1 Hold Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 2 Mode 2 No Answer extension is busy Coverage 3 Call Waiting 4 Disconnect 1 Hold Automatically places the caller on hold and Message the Operator 2 extension is called again Hold 2 No Answer Coverage
187. allation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Table 32 PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION Nothing is heard from the VPS when accessing the VPS Improper connection of jacks Bad connection with PBX Confirm that you are using the correct extension number for the VPS Ask your System Administrator Check if the jacks of the VPS are connected to the proper jacks of the PBX see 1 4 DIGITAL INTEGRATION Check the System Program 130 of the KX TA624 to see if the programming agrees with the actual connection Check the 1 4 VPS DPT Port Assignment screen of the KX TD500 or System Program 117 of other KX T series telephone systems that use DPT Integration to see if the programming agrees with the actual connection Unable to utilize some of the DPT Integration features even though DPT Integration has been established properly Your PBX cannot support the feature The software version of your PBX is lower than required Call National Parts Center at 1 800 833 9626 The VPS does not operate Bad printed circuit board Bad connection with PBX Incomplete card insertion Change the printed circuit board Check the connection between the VPS and PBX Insert the card firmly into the card slot Dialing is not registered A pulse phone is being used by mistake Improper setting of integration mode Chang
188. allation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Notes The data terminal that you use must be equipped with communications software that supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol The command can be canceled by Typing N before entering the sending mode Once the sending mode has been selected use the cancel command of the communication software being used f your data terminal supports a high speed it is recommended that you LOAD at the maximum speed of 38400 bps First change the RS 232C setting of the VPS see B7 1 RS 232C Parameters Next change the RS 232C setting of your data terminal to the same speed 7 2 9 Print All of the VPS Parameters GPRN Use the GRPN command to print all VPS parameter settings output to screen Use Ctrl C at any time to stop printing Type GPRN then Press RETURN GPRN 0 All Parameters Mailbox Setting Class of Service Setting Port Trunk Service Setting Service Setting Auto Attn Setting Service Setting Custom Service Setting Service Setting Caller ID Call Routing System Parameter Setting System Group Assignment System Parameter Setting Time Service Holiday Daylight Saving Time System Parameter Setting Prompt Setting 10 System Parameter Setting System Caller Name Announcement 11 System Parameter Setting Others 12 Hardware Setting 13 System Reset Clear Parameter Qo co EROS na Please select Note This co
189. ames and customizes the Message Manager s Mailbox The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 3 to set the time and date 4 Press 1 to change the current time 5 Type the current time and Press Note Press 0 for help For example to enter 5 o clock press 5 and or to enter 5 15 press 5 1 5 and 6 Press 1 for AM or 2 for PM Note This selection is not available if 24 h is selected in Position of AM PM in Time Stamp in Table 59 in B6 5 Prompt Setting 7 Press 2 to accept the time 8 Press 1 to change the current date 9 Type the current month and Press Installation Manual 313 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE Note Press 0 for help For example to enter January press and 10 Type the day and Press 11 Type the last 2 digits of the year and Press 12 Press 2 to accept the date 314 Installation Manual SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C5 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING The VPS automatically activates the appropriate call handling method according to the Time Service setting Day Night Lunch and Break Services however the System Manager or System Administrator can change the current call handling method by selecting a specific Service Mode Once the Service Mode has been changed it is retained unless the System Manager or System Administrator changes it again
190. ameters These parameters specify how the VPS will initiate and control call transfers setup outgoing calls and control message waiting lamps on extensions The procedure for verifying the correct code sequences for non Panasonic KX T series telephone systems is to manually execute the sequences from a single line telephone SLT with the PBX To access the proper menu for Dialing Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 1 Table 72 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default PBX Type 1 Other Manufacturers Specifies the type of PBX connected to the 2 KX T Series VPS In the case of a Panasonic KX T series 1 T308 T616 telephone system the model number should 2 T1232 also be specified 3 T96 4 T336 Notes The Dialing Parameters are set 5 TD816 TD1232 TA1232 automatically to each PBX default value after 6 TD308 selecting the PBX type 7 TA series 8 TD500 You will see 8 TD500 only when you are 550 TA Series using the KX TVS80 TVS80 TD816 TD1232 TA1232 Installation Manual 293 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 73 PBX Type Other KX T series iind TD816 T308 TD1232 T616 T1232 T96 T336 TA1232 TA series TD500 TD308 Integration None None None None None None None Mode None iDPT 2A PT 1DPT Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Operator Transfer FX FTX
191. amming See 4 5 5 Live Call Screening Private Hands Free Mode Assignment via Station Programming See 4 5 6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming See 4 5 7 Live Call Screening Button Assignment via Station Programming See 4 5 8 Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment via Station Programming See 4 5 13 Live Call Screening Activation See 4 5 14 Live Call Screening Password Control See Message Cancel for Live Call Screening in Table 40 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Live Call Screening in Glossary See 4 13 Live Call Screening in the Subscriber s Guide Installation Manual 211 SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Logical Extension All Calls Transfer to Mailbox is an extension that always receives calls directly into its mailbox This feature is used by subscribers that are often unavailable or that do not have a telephone See All Calls Transfer to Mailbox in Table 37 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Creating and Editing a Mailbox 2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES See Logical Extension in Glossary Mailbox is a place where all messages to a subscriber are stored Several mailbox options exist Subscriber Mailbox Interview Mailbox System Manager s Mailbox and Message Manager s Mailbox General De
192. annot be modified 2 User 1 Prompts recordable 3 User 2 Prompts recordable However in many cases it is not necessary to record all the voice prompts recording over 900 voice prompts is a big undertaking When an outside party calls AA service or VM service he only hears some of the following prompts Therefore it is necessary only to record or modify these prompts Please change prompts as needed for your application For example prompt no 819 could be Thank you for calling ABCD Travel instead of Welcome to the Voice Processing System The maximum length of a prompt is fixed at 6 min Note To identify the prompt s linked to each prompt listed below refer to the next section D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS Prompts Common to VM and AA Services Table 80 Prompt No Modifiable Prompts 248 Good afternoon 249 Good evening 250 Good morning 819 Welcome to the Voice Processing System 675 To enter by name press the pound sign and 1 132 Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person s last name 198 For Q press 7 199 For Z press 9 505 Sorry there are no more matching names 513 Sorry this name cannot be found 277 Incorrect entry 274 If you are using a rotary telephone stay on the line 618 To call the operator press 0 49 Calling the operator 344 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE
193. are answering incoming calls how busy are the lines The guideline above 6 1 usually works well with moderate traffic However this may have to be modified for heavy traffic Recommendations are outlined in the following charts Table 3 CO Lines Port 1 6 1 7 12 2 One port may not support an Automated Attendant configuration with 5 CO lines The preceding recommendations for Automated Attendant ports may have to be modified for heavy traffic Table 4 CO Lines Port 1 4 1 5 8 2 24 Installation Manual VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 4 DIGITAL INTEGRATION 1 4 4 General There are 2 types of Digital Integration APT Integration and DPT Integration APT Integration is available when the VPS is connected to a KX TA624 DPT Integration is available when the VPS is connected to a KX TD or KX TA1232 digital PBX 1 4 2 APT Integration To the Panasonic KX TA 624 the VPS ports look like proprietary telephones The PBX thinks that the VPS is a proprietary telephone and the VPS mimics all actions of a proprietary telephone Communication between the VPS and the PBX through digital integration requires the proper software level in the PBX and 4 wire connections for each port To communicate between the VPS and the PBX through APT Integration the PBX and VPS must be programmed to work together 1 4 3 Connection Example APT Integration For example you can connect jack 7 of the K
194. at the System Greeting prior to factory shipment Note While the System Administrator programs via a computer the System Manager cannot change the Company Greeting setting The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 6 for Other Features 3 Press 5 to change Company Greeting setting 4 Press 1 to change the port setting or 2 to change the trunk service setting 5 Type 1 2 port number or 1 48 trunk group number 6 Press 1 2 3 or 4 to choose the desired Time Service period entry 1 Day Time service 2 Night Time service 3 Lunch Time service 4 Break Time service 7 The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting 8 Press 1 2 or 3 to choose the desired setting entry 1 To change Company Greeting number 2 To set System Greeting Go to Step 10 3 To disable Go to Step 10 9 Type the Company Greeting number 1 32 10 Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Installation Manual 317 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C7 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE SYSTEM REPORTS The System Manager can generate 8 System Reports to help monitor the VPS operating status The reports are sent from the RS 232C port to either a printer or a terminal The System Administrator is also able to output System Reports Obtaining System Reports 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 5 for the System Report Menu 3 Press 1 2 3
195. ation in Glossary Auto Forwarding moves or copies unretrieved messages from one mailbox to another after a specified period of time This service is only available to subscribers you cannot auto forward messages to the System Group Distribution Lists Class of Service programming determines the mailboxes that can use this feature Messages marked as private cannot be forwarded Also a message is never forwarded to the original sender of the message See Private Message in this Table See Authorization for Auto Forwarding in Table 40 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Auto Forwarding in Glossary Automated answers incoming calls and routes those calls e See 5 2 10 Automated Attendant to the desired extension The service can be Attendant assigned to all of Day Night Lunch and See54 AUTOMATED Break time periods Available for both Port ATTENDANT PARAMETERS and Trunk Services e SeeB5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters e See Automated Attendant in Glossary Broadcasting permits the System Manager to deliver See Delivering Messages to All Messages same message to all VPS subscribers at the Mailboxes Broadcasting same time This feature is only available to the System Manager Messages in C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES Installation Manual 197 SYSTEM FEATURES
196. ational Parts Center at 1 800 833 9626 3 1 2 Why Integration is Important The VPS works well with most PBXs because its connections are made through a standard single line tip ring telephone interface However the VPS operation depends on the capabilities and features provided by the PBX its performance will vary when connected with different PBX systems For example Follow on or Called Party ID is a feature of the PBX If the PBX does not have this feature the VPS cannot transfer calls directly to the correct mailbox and play the Busy or No Answer greeting for that mailbox 3 1 5 How the VPS and the PBX Communicate To the PBX the VPS looks like SLT sets The PBX thinks that the VPS is an SLT and the VPS mimics all actions a live attendant would carry out from an SLT For the VPS and the PBX to communicate proper signaling is important Like an attendant the VPS places calls by going off hook and dialing numbers It starts call transfers with a hookswitch flash to put callers on hold and then dials the extension number By recognizing call progress tones from the PBX the VPS decides how calls should be handled Inband 44 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS Integration allows the PBX to send certain digits touchtone to the VPS allowing it to recognize the status of the extension and take the appropriate action Table 8 VPS PBX COMMUNICATION PBX P Call Progr
197. ative languages For a multi cultural United States Custom Service is a truly powerful feature Please see Custom Service in Appendix Al SYSTEM FEATURES for more details Note This product is only for connection behind a suitable PB X and should not be connected directly to the network Panasonic World Wide Web Address http www panasonic com for customers in the United States or Puerto Rico Installation Manual Important Information Important Information SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Follow all product warnings cautions and instructions Handle the unit carefully Do not drop or otherwise expose the unit to physical shock If the unit malfunctions disconnect the unit from the telephone line and check the line by reconnecting the telephone If the telephone operates properly have the VPS repaired by a qualified Panasonic Factory Service Technician Install the unit so that the power cord is not obstructed in any way Do not connect this unit to an extension cord Keep the unit free of dust moisture condensation high temperature exposure more than 40 C 104 F and vibration Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight Mount the unit on a stable wall surface Do not mount the VPS inside of a separate enclosure unless it is properly ventilated Read all the information contained in this manual This unit is designed to operate at one specific voltage and current setting The proper voltage and current required for
198. ayed on the port Greeting No S System Greeting The System Greeting is Good Morning Afternoon N None Evening Welcome to the Voice Processing System System Greeting Note This feature is available with the KX TVS80 only Incoming Call 1 Voice Mail Specifies one of 4 incoming call services Service 2 Auto Attn 3 Interview Note 1 When you specify the Interview Service one of 4 Custom subscriber s Interview Mailbox numbers should also be Auto Attn specified Note 2 When you specify the Custom service one of 100 1 100 Custom service numbers should also be specified Incoming Call 1 System Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on Service Prompt 2 User 1 this port When set to Selective the caller can select the 3 User 2 language of his choice provided the Message Manager 4 Selective has recorded the Multilingual Selection Menu and the User 1 System Administrator has specified Prompt Selection Number in System User 1 User 2 Prompt Selection Number in Table 59 in B6 5 Prompt Setting Note If Selective is specified you will need to select a prompt available for rotary callers See Prompt for Rotary Callers below Prompt for 1 System Specifies which language System User 1 User 2 a rotary Rotary Callers 2 User 1 caller or an External Delivery Message receiver hears 3 User 2 when he cannot enter any digit Prompt Selection System Number after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been pla
199. ber and then the VPS dials the number If there is no answer or the line is busy the caller is given some options including the option to leave a message in a mailbox This is the advantage of calling an extension indirectly through the Automated Attendant rather than calling it directly Call Blocking Connects the caller to the Incomplete Call Handling Service without ringing the subscriber s extension Call Screening Allows subscribers to screen calls The VPS prompts the caller with the message Record your name at the tone and records the caller s name it then puts the caller on hold while playing the name to the subscriber who decides whether to take the call or not Call Transfer Transfers a call to the requested destination Installation Manual 399 Glossary Called Party ID Sometimes referred to as Follow On ID Allows the PBX to dial extra digits to bring the caller directly to a specified mailbox rather than to the General Delivery Mailbox Caller ID Call Routing Available with APT DPT Integration only The VPS automatically sends calls from pre assigned Caller ID numbers to the desired extension mailbox including System Group Distribution List or Custom Service Caller Name Announcement System Personal Available with APT DPT Integration only The VPS announces prerecorded Caller ID callers names when 1 extension users listen to messages from pre assigned numbers left in the users mailboxes 2 th
200. ble Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 751 To specify the mailbox range press 1 751 727 751 650 752 To transfer General Delivery Mailbox 752 745 652 742 699 670 messages press 752 745 652 742 699 868 670 753 To transfer this message press 7 717 706 679 726 753 208 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 753 698 717 706 679 753 208 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 754 To transfer with comment press 2 755 754 610 730 755 To transfer press 1 755 610 730 755 754 610 730 756 To try again press 619 645 756 505 756 757 To turn off the prompt press 3 647 750 757 714 680 757 758 To use for scheduling press 1 758 To use continuously press 2 To use not at all press 3 759 To use the system prompt press 1 759 760 761 604 759 760 761 696 605 760 To use user 1 prompt press 2 759 760 761 604 759 760 761 696 605 761 To use user 2 prompt press 3 759 760 761 604 759 760 761 696 605 762 TONE DIALING MODE 762 763 Total message time available per 763 332 mailbox is time 764 Transfered number 764 600 765 Transfered 1 time 765 766 TUESDAY 766 767 TWELFTH 767 768 TWELVE 768 388 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE
201. ble applies the digits received within this time to translation Input Output up to 8 alphanumeric characters When the system receives digits within the inter digit time it checks them against the input table If they are found the system utilizes the output digits in their place The remainder of this section consists of step by step guides for software verification and programming of the recommended Panasonic PBX systems If you the dealer have any problem as you go through this section please call 1 800 211 PANA 7262 Installation Manual 51 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs 3 3 1 VPS Programming for Inband Integration Set parameters from the System Administration Terminal The table below lists recommended parameters for Panasonic KX T series PBXs Table 12 PBX Type Other T308 T1232 T96 T336 TD816 TD308 TA series TD500 Manufac T616 TD1232 turers TA1232 Integration None None None None None None None None None Mode Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Operator FX A FTX FTX FTX FTX FTX A FTX FTX A FIX Transfer A A A A A A Sequence Extension FX A FTX FTX FIX FTX FTX A FTX FTX FIX Transfer A A A A A A Sequence Alternate FX A FTX FTX
202. box 115 would press code 6 X 115 If the subscriber has a password enabled the password must be entered If the subscriber forgets his password he should contact either the System Administrator or the System Manager Either one can clear the password so that the subscriber can establish a new password Explain the purpose of the General Delivery Mailbox The Message Manager will periodically check it and forward the contents to the appropriate subscriber Explain the purpose of the System Group Distribution Lists They can be created by the System Administrator to facilitate the distribution of messages to several subscribers In particular senior staff members ought to know how to take advantage of System Group Distribution Lists Twenty lists can be created with 20 mailboxes in each list Finally if Custom Service menus are used subscribers should be encouraged to listen to these menus often and make suggestions for improvement Custom service is a very powerful feature of the Panasonic VPS Make the most out of this feature Installation Manual 149 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 150 Installation Manual FINAL SETUP Section 6 FINAL SETUP Installation Manual 151 FINAL SETUP 6 1 MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX Mailbox 998 The Message Manager is responsible for recording and updating a wide variety of system messages Please refer to D6 RECORDING MESSAGES to see the full array of recording tasks Follow the ins
203. box Management Allows a subscriber to alter the setting for personal mailboxes Menu A list of choices from which the user can select by using the telephone keypad or the keys from a personal computer Message Manager Mailbox 98 998 9998 or 99998 The person who takes care of the General Delivery Mailbox and records the Company Greetings Company Name Department Dialing Menu Custom Service Menus Voice Labels User Prompts User 1 User 2 Multilingual Selection Menu and System Caller Names Message Retention Time New Message Retention Time the length of time the VPS will store a new unplayed message before deleting the message Saved Message Retention Time the length of time the VPS will store an old played message before deleting the message Message Retrieval Order The order in which the subscriber retrieves messages Last In First Out LIFO or First In First Out FIFO 404 Installation Manual Glossary Message Transfer Allows a subscriber to reroute a message to another mailbox unless the message was marked private Additional comments can be added to this message Message Waiting Lamp Light on proprietary telephones that lights when there are messages in the mailbox Message Waiting Notification The VPS can notify subscribers and the Message Manager when they have received messages if authorized by the System Administrator or the System Manager There are 3 notification methods 1 by the Message
204. ce Break 1 Service Break 2 Service and Break 3 Service In each Time Service period the parameters for Port Service Trunk Group Service and Operator s Parameters can be specified differently 270 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Note Break Service and Lunch Service are only available when they are in Day Service period If Break 3 Service is out of Day Service period for example Break 3 Service does not work shown To access the proper menu for Time Service Time Service follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 2 Time Service Day Service To access the proper menu for Day Service follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 2 1 Table 54 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Mon 1 12 h Specifies the Start and End times of the Day Service Start End 00 59 min AM PM a m p m Day Mode Day Mode in effect around the clock 24 h Sun D Day Mode Night Mode Night Mode in effect around the clock 24 h Start End N Night Mode 9 00 AM 5 00 PM Time Service Lunch Service To access the proper menu for Lunch Service follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 2 2 Installation Manual 271 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 55 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Mon 1 12 h Specifies the Start and End t
205. creen a Enter 118 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output VM NO C Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output VM 01 2 _ 1 165 _ _ the port number you entered in program 117 d Enter the Extension Number that you want this port to have The default extension number for port 1 165 port 2 166 e Press STORE f Repeat steps c d and e until all extension numbers are entered Conditions No 2 jacks on the system can have the same extension number If you try to enter a number that is already assigned you will hear an error tone Each digital extension connected provides 2 Voice Mail ports and must have 2 different extension numbers assigned Connect the jack assigned in Step 4 to the VPS Connect your laptop computer to the VPS and start your communication software i e HyperTerminal Procomm Plus Smartcom Communication Parameters 9600 8 Bit None 1 Disconnect the power from the VPS and set the DIP Switch to position 5 Only perform this step when initially setting up the system CAUTION Setting the DIP Switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System resulting in a loss of all user programming and voice messages except User 1 and User 2 prompts 9 Plug in and power up the VPS and wait approximately 2 5 min while the system initializes Before starting the VPS make sure all installation and line connections have been done as described in Sectio
206. creen b Set Data Line Mode to Yes c Click Apply to save the changed data Note This program prevents the VM port from being interrupted by Call Waiting Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override features during a call Screen output 4 2 Extension Line Fi zl ES CardWo Porto m DN hoos J Group No 126 Copy Hame 10 Characters Mailbox No Max 16 Digits CO Key PE Key Initial Display Selection COS No Caller ID xj Primary Secondary Preferred Line Pickup Dialing Mode Dial Outgoing Prime Line ICMPDN Line ICMPDN lo C Enable Disable Incoming Ringing Line Ringing Line asi Data Line Mode Call Waiting Tone Type HESETA TT Yes Ho Tone1 Tone2 oso M Call Pickup D Language Operation Mode C Private Hands free all Pickup Deny guag Recording Mode _ Keep Rec Stop Rec C Enable Disable English French LCS Password 3 Digits Station Lock Password ISDN Bearer Mode ono JOG Dial Speed CLIP Number Max 16 Digits smi E s Call Log Incoming Overwrite Mode Yes CHo Private sd Lock Password 3 Digits sd 4 2 Extension Line M OK phy Cancel Help 60 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 4 Settings for the trunk CO line features Select the appropriate trunk CO line feature settings depending on how your customer plans to use the VPS The VPS answ
207. ct time because Message Waiting Notification External Message Delivery redialing and rescheduling of External Message Delivery and Automatic Message Deletion are all scheduled using this setting The System Administrator and System Manager are also able to set the clock The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate when daylight saving time begins and ends Note The Message Manager cannot set the system clock while the System Administrator programs via a computer the System Manager sets mailboxes and Class of Service COS and customizes the System Manager s Mailbox The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 4 to set the time and date 3 Press 1 to change the current setting 4 Type the current time and Press Note Press 0 for help For example to enter 5 o clock press 5 and or to enter 5 15 press 5 1 5 and 5 Press 1 for AM or 2 for PM Note This selection is not available if 24 h is selected in Position of AM PM in Time Stamp in Table 59 in B6 5 Prompt Setting 6 Press 2 to accept the time 7 Press 1 to change the current date 8 Type the current month and Press 334 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Note Press 0 for help For example to enter January press 1 and 9 Type the day and Press 10 Type the last 2 digits of the year and Press 11 Press
208. ctive only when Use THU Heny Mode is set to Scheduled FRI X All Day SAT Space No Use SUN No Use Remote Call Forward to CO Follow the procedure below to specify the destination outside telephone number s to which the callers are forwarded when the Remote Call Forwarding feature is set to an outside CO line Telephone number 1 and Telephone number 2 can be specified per mailbox e Class of Service programming determines if the mailbox owner is able to use this feature e This feature is only available with DPT Integration shown or 2 To access the proper menu for Remote Forward to CO follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No 3 Telephone Number 1 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 39 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Telephone Up to 16 digits Specifies the telephone number to which the callers are Number 1 2 With the KX forwarded when Remote Call Forwarding is set toa CO TD816 TD1232 line TA1232 or The telephone number can contain the digits 0 9 and Up to 24 digits With the KX The telephone number should begin with a Line Access TD500 Code to seize a CO line None Note Pressing back space will clear the parameter Deleting a Mailbox When a mailbox is deleted the Voice Processing System erases all messages in the mailbox removes the mailbox from a
209. d Timing during call holding Example To cancel holding press 2 now Otherwise I ll try your party again Redialing 1 15s Specifies the interval between the voice guidance Cancel Timing 2 30 s messages that ask if continuous redials are to be 3 45s attempted during call holding 4 60s Example 30 To continue holding press 1 Otherwise press 2 Installation Manual 285 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Other Parameters Rotary Telephone Service Specifies how to treat callers who are calling from rotary telephones unable to input touchtone signals or who are unable to properly respond to VPS guidance To access the proper menu for Rotary Telephone Service follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 6 Table 66 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Rotary 1 G D M Defines how the VPS treats calls received from rotary Telephone Call 2 Operator telephones or calls from callers that are unfamiliar with Coverage Extension the VPS operation in the Voice Mail Service Day Night G D M Note G D M General Delivery Mailbox Other Parameters Intercom Paging Parameter Intercom Paging is a PBX feature that makes it possible to page the caller s party through telephone speakers To utilize this feature the PBX must have the Intercom Paging feature available and the VPS must be properly programmed This feature is available
210. d ringing etc by sending a code with touchtones before sending the normal call progress tones For example when a caller hangs up before making a selection the PBX sends 9 to the VPS port that answered This informs the VPS that the caller has hung up Upon receiving these digits the VPS goes on hook and is ready to handle another call Digital APT DPT Integration is available when the VPS is connected to a Panasonic KX TA 624 or other Panasonic KX T series digital PBX depending on the software version This Digital Integration provides the VPS with more information than Touchtone Integration This information enables the system to identify the extension number of the caller know where from and why the call is forwarded and recognize what the caller wants to do Some features are available only with Digital Integration Remote Call Forwarding Set Live Call Screening Two Way Recording Two Way Transfer Direct Mailbox Access Intercom Paging Auto Configuration Caller Name Announcement system personal Caller ID Call Routing Personal Greeting for Caller ID Time Synchronization with PBX 22 Installation Manual VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 3 4 Installer Equipment and Software Requirements The installer must have a laptop computer or data terminal equipped with terminal emulation software We suggest that you use something like HyperTerminal by HILGRAEVE Use the computer to program the VPS Terminal emulation so
211. d the message Receiving Messages There are several different message notification methods that subscribers can use They can choose to be notified by message waiting lamp beeper or a call from the system to another line System programming determines whether a subscriber will be notified each time a message is left Subscribers can choose to receive message notifications differently depending on the time of day Mailbox parameters which accommodate 5 100 messages determine the maximum length of messages If the system is connected using Digital Integration subscribers can press a pre assigned button to record conversations into their own mailboxes or other subscribers mailboxes while talking on the phone Digital Integration also allows subscribers to screen messages as they are being left or intercept them if required 16 Installation Manual VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 1 3 VPS Limitations The VPS does not support UCD functions UCD Uniform Call Distribution is a service that distributes calls evenly among extensions when all extensions are unavailable it returns to callers to say that all extensions are busy Calls can be forwarded by the VPS to the KX TD1232 816 308 500 floating number of a UCD group The call then rings at the next available phone The VPS supports UCD functions with very limited capabilities Because the incoming call is forwarded as an intercom path and not a DIL direct in line the
212. device according to a schedule The System Administrator must accomplish this task see Time Frame 1 2 in Table 38 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Installation Manual 329 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 2 to set Message Waiting Notification 3 Press 2 to change the Device Status 4 Type the device number 1 3 Note If a telephone number has not been assigned to the selected device number you cannot set the device status See Assigning Notification Numbers to assign a telephone number 5 Press 1 2 or 3 to select the device status 1 Schedule enabled on the schedule 2 Continuously enabled whole day 3 Not Use disabled whole day Assigning Notification Numbers Up to 3 telephone or beeper numbers can be set for message notification Use the number keys 0 to 9 the tone pulse switch and the beeper Callback Number Display Entry Code X to make these assignments When the Beeper Callback No Entry Code is added at the end of a beeper number the VPS will ask the caller to enter the callback number that will display on the beeper System Programming determines if the Callback Number Entry is to be entered before after or without the message It is also possible to have the caller select whether or not to enter a callback number The System Manager must authorize the use of the Beeper Callback No Entry Code 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 2
213. disabled 446 Returning to top menu automated 446 attendant service enabled 447 right away 161 447 448 SATURDAY 448 449 Saved message retention time is day 449 70 450 Saved message retention time is 450 unlimited 451 SECOND 451 452 Second telephone number is 452 telephone number 453 Second telephone number is not 453 assigned 454 seconds 454 14 454 407 454 Installation Manual 367 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 455 Selection Menu 455 456 Selection menu erased 456 457 Selection menu is selection menu 457 458 Sending report now to terminal or 458 printer connected to RS 232C port 459 SEPTEMBER 459 460 Set the answer length using the 460 following options For 4 seconds press 1 For 8 seconds press 2 For 16 seconds press 3 For 32 seconds press 4 461 SEVEN 461 462 SEVEN HOUR 462 463 SEVEN MINUTE OWE SEVEN 463 464 SEVENTEEN 464 465 SEVENTEEN HOUR 465 466 SEVENTEEN MINUTE 466 467 SEVENTEENTH 467 468 SEVENTH 468 469 SEVENTY 469 470 SEVENTY EIGHT 470 471 SEVENTY FIVE 471 472 SEVENTY FOUR 472 473 SEVENTY NINE 473 474 SEVENTY ONE 474 475 SEVENTY SEVEN 475 476 SEVENTY SIX 476 477 SEVENTY THREE 477 478 SEVENTY TWO 478 479 S
214. e Reconnect Sequence on Busy in Table 75 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters Unable to make a no response reconnection Improper setting of the no response reconnection procedure Readjust the no response reconnection procedure to that of the connected PBX see Reconnect Sequence on No Answer in Table 75 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters Unable to generate a call waiting tone from the VPS Improper setting of sequence Adjust the Call Waiting sequence to that of the connected PBX see Call Waiting Sequence in Table 75 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters Installation Manual 191 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Table 32 PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION Unable to make an Intercom Improper setting of the Adjust the Intercom Paging Paging for groups Intercom Paging access code access code to that of the connected PBX see Paging Code for Group 1 8 for the KX TVS50 or Paging Code for Group 1 16 for the KX TVS80 and Paging Code for All Groups in Table 67 in B6 7 Other Parameters 192 Installation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 5 SPECIFICATIONS Table 33 Port 2 Digital Analog ports Dialing Method Touchtone Pulse 10 20 pps Flash Time 100 300 600 900 ms programmable CPC Detection None 6 5 150 300 450 600 ms programmable Type of Line Loop start minimum Loop Current 2
215. e Y yes or N no If Y is entered the system will clear the data Wait until Mailbox Usage Report Data Cleared appears on the screen before proceeding Installation Manual 187 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 11 7 3 12 Fax Call Report The Fax Call Report provides information about fax transfer when the VPS receives a fax signal It includes the fax data receiving date the port number used and the fax transfer status for up to 64 fax messages To select the Fax Call Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 8 Fax Call Report NOV 14 2001 3 50 PM DATE TIME PORT FAX 1 FAX 2 JAN 11 11 15 AM 1 connect MAR 01 07 58 PM 2 busy no ans MAR 01 10 23 AM 1 busy connect FAX 1 Main facsimile machine FAX 2 Alternate facsimile machine connect Call was answered by the facsimile machine no ans No Answer Fax Call Statistics Clear The Fax Call Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again To clear the Fax Call Statistics Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 2 4 System Reports System Report Clear Fax Call Report Clear May I clear fax call report data Y N Type Y yes or N no If Y is entered the system will clear the data Wait until Fax Call Report Data Cleared appears on the screen before proceeding 188 Inst
216. e follow the procedure below 1 Go to the System Administration Top Menu and type 1 2 Program Class of Service and COS No 1 63 Select Yes in the Authorization for Message Notification parameter Make 1 selection from the available options in the Beeper Callback No Entry Mode parameter 2 From the System Administration Top Menu type 1 1 1 Mailbox No Y 2 Device No 1 3 Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Mailbox No Entry Do you want to edit this mailbox Notification Setting Device No Entry For the Dial Number parameter enter your PBX s line access code before the beeper number for dialing outward enter an X after the beeper number The X is for the caller to enter his number as the callback number which will later appear on your beeper Finally select Beeper in the Type of Device parameter See Dial Number and Type of Device in Table 38 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Authorization for Message Notification and Beeper Callback No Entry Mode in Tables 40 and 41 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See System Callback Number in Table 63 in B6 7 Other Parameters See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Installation Manual 201 SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Class of Service COS There are 62 COS levels for subscribers COS 63 is for the Messa
217. e 186 7 3 10 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear e 187 SAMS Eax Call Report uie ate td re Penes 188 4 3 12 Fax Call Statistics Clear tte ede et ebay Mel vo ee epe cds 188 TA TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE sccccsectssonessiscacsvsssonssiscteossscenssseuseossacseivsvasesneaccesatecs 189 7 5 SPECIFICATIONS rana 193 Appendix A SYSTEM FEATURES SYSTEM DEREN 196 Installation Manual 11 Table of Contents Appendix B SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION nin ee ce nin seo nio nie zecneceeo 226 B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES cscsssssssssssssscssessessesesseseeee 230 B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS ics 237 B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE eee 247 B4 1 Port Assignment n etr BU eet eli elit 247 B4 2 Trunk Group Assignment iii 249 B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS eere 252 B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters e 252 BS 2 Custom SefvICe iu eee eese eie ene ne Ree n ER D rre Rer 260 B5 3 Caller ID Call Routing Parameters ie 263 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS 266 B6 l jSystem Group ASSIEnment n reete epi bre te rider tad 266 B6 2 Time Sery Cennin jaiera n
218. e VPS transfers calls from pre assigned numbers to the users Caller ID Screening and 3 the VPS pages the users by intercom Intercom Paging If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both system and personal caller name announcements the VPS will use the personal caller name Company Greeting KX TVS80 only Up to 32 Company Greetings can be recorded to greet callers One or System Greeting or none can be selected for each Day Night Lunch Break and Holiday service on a port basis and trunk CO line basis Company Name KX TVS80 only This is played by the VPS to the intended receiver of an External Delivery Message when he is unable to enter correctly the password if required This helps him to realize where the call came from Covering Extension This can be a destination for Incomplete Call Handling Service This can also be accessed by pressing 0 while a Personal Greeting is being played or while a caller is leaving a message Custom Service Setting Allows one touch access to extensions other custom service menus fax machine mailboxes etc A greeting can be recorded for each of the 100 menus to give verbal directions to the non subscribers Default Setting A parameter defined for the system at the factory which can be changed through system programming by the System Administrator or the System Manager 400 Installation Manual Glossary Delayed Ringing There are 2 kinds of delayed ringing applications
219. e Waiting Notification in the Subscriber s Guide Multilingual Service permits up to 3 languages to be used for prompt options If the Selective mode is selected callers are able to choose their desired language See Incoming Call Service Prompt in Table 23 in 5 3 1 Service Menu See System User 1 User 2 Selection Number in Table 59 in B6 5 Prompt Setting See Recording Menus and Voice Labels and Recording User Prompts in D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Multilingual Selection Menu in Glossary Installation Manual 215 SYSTEM FEATURES within the specified Operator No Answer Time There are 4 options Caller Select caller may leave a message or call another extension Leave Message caller may leave a message in Operators mailbox Disconnect Message caller is disconnected from the VPS after hearing Thank you for calling Next Operator caller is transferred to the next operator Operator 2 or 3 extension 1 Assignable for Operator 1 2 and 3 2 Assignable for Operator 1 and 2 Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES No Answer specifies how the calls will be handled when See No Answer Coverage Coverage Mode Operator 1 2 and or 3 do not answer them Mode in Table 24 in 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters See No Answer Coverage Mode in Tables 45 46 and 47 in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters Operator Service permits callers
220. e interview mailbox 306 307 Message from the message manager 307 308 Message from the system manager 308 309 Message length is time 309 332 310 Message Manager 310 311 Message notification disabled 311 312 Message notification enabled 312 313 Message reception mode is interview 313 mode 314 Message reception mode is message 314 recording mode 315 Message reception mode is set to 315 interview mode 316 Message reception mode is set to 316 message recording mode 317 Message recorded by mailbox 317 13 12 number 318 Message recorded on date 318 17 318 17 197 259 319 Message retrieval order is first in 319 first out 320 Message retrieval order is last in 320 first out Installation Manual 361 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 321 Message scanning with information 321 is disabled 322 Message scanning with information 322 is enabled 323 Message sent on date 323 17 197 259 323 17 197 258 324 Message to name 324 31 325 Message transferred via mailbox 325 12 number 326 Message waiting lamp notification 326 disabled 327 Message waiting lamp notification 327 enabled 328 Message waiting lamp notification 328 for unreceived message disabled 329 Message wait
221. e to a touch tone phone Adjust the integration mode properly between the VPS and your PBX see Integration Mode in Table 73 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters Installation Manual 189 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Table 32 PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION Line disconnection occurs Improper setting of the Adjust the transfer sequence to while transferring an outside sequence that of the connected PBX and call Improper setting of the reset see Operator Transfer Unable to transfer an outside hooking time Sequence and Extension call zu tting of the CPC Transfer Sequence in Table 75 P PET SEATS vere in B7 3 PBX Interface signal Parameters Adjust the hooking time to that of the connected PBX and reset see Flash Time in Table 71 in B7 2 Port Setting e Adjustthe CPC signal to that of the connected PBX and reset see CPC Signal in Table 71 in 7 2 Port Setting Unable to call an outside e Improper setting of the outside Reset the CO line access party call dial procedure sequence of the connected PBX see Dial Number in Table 38 inB2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES and Number of Digits to Access Outside Line in Table 62 in B6 7 Other Parameters Also check Outgoing Call Setup Sequence in Table 62 in B6 7 Other Parameters Whensetting a Dial Number for Device Notification or a telephone number for External Message Delivery keep in m
222. ecify the number of unanswered fax calls received 2 If set to Mbx the VPS will leave the number of unanswered fax calls in the Fax Manager s mailbox 3 If setto No the VPS will take no action concerning unanswered fax calls Installation Manual 289 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 68 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Fax Notification 1 No If set to Mbx the VPS will leave the number of Mode 2 Mbx successfully received fax calls in the Fax Manager s 3 Ext mailbox No Example You have 1 FAX message 1 If set to Ext after a fax extension successfully receives a fax call the VPS will automatically call the Fax Manager s extension and play a voice prompt You have 1 FAX message The VPS will also leave the total number of received fax calls in the Fax Manager s mailbox 2 If set to No the VPS will not take any action concerning successfully received fax calls Other Parameters Disconnect Parameter To access the proper menu for Disconnect Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 9 Table 69 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Maximum 5 60 s Specifies the length of time in seconds that the VPS Silence Time 10 must wait until it disconnects the call when silence is detected 290 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B7
223. ed can be accessed via Voice Mail Rotary Telephone Service allows rotary callers to reach the General Delivery Mailbox or Operator Service Automated Attendant Dial 0 and your call will go to Operator Service Custom Service The Operator Service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a Custom Service after pressing this key the caller enters Operator Service Operator Service can also be the destination of no DTMF input Operator Service offers callers many chances to reach a human operator Operator Service can be structured as a cascade so that if Operator 1 cannot take the call it goes to Operator 2 If that fails the call goes to Operator 3 If that fails the caller can record a message At each stage there are other options for busy cases and no answer cases Operator Service can be programmed differently for Day Night Lunch or Break Mode Each operator can be assigned a mailbox for message taking 136 Installation Manual 5 3 SETTING PORTS 5 3 1 Port Service Menu CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Access the Port Service Menu through the following sequence System Administration Top Menu Enter The Number 2 1 Program Enter The Number 3 Port Trunk Service Enter The Number 2 1 Port Service Screen output Program Port Trunk Service Port Service Enter the Port Number 1 2 From Program Port Trunk Service Port Service Menu Enter the data using the table below as a guide
224. ed an opportunity to answer each question after it has been asked Subscribers are able to record questions directly into their own Interview Mailbox See 5 2 9 Interview Service See Interview Mailbox Number in Table 37 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Creating and Editing a Mailbox inC2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES See Interview Service in Glossary See 4 9 Interview Mailbox in the Subscriber s Guide 210 Installation Manual SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Live Call Screening permits the subscriber to monitor incoming See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR APT DPT calls as messages are being recorded The DIGITAL INTEGRATION Integration Only subscriber has the option of answering calls See 4 5 1 Live Call Screening while monitoring or allowing the message to be recorded without interruption There are two modes in this feature Hands free and Private Hands free permits the subscriber to hear the caller through the telephone s speaker and answer the call by lifting the handset The Private Mode alerts by tone and requires the telephone handset to be lifted before the message can be monitored Two way communication is established by pressing the feature button LCS Programming See 4 5 2 Live Call Screening Password Assignment See 4 5 3 Live Call Screening Password Canceling See 4 5 4 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment via System Progr
225. ed telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface e Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Note If you live in an area that can have frequent power failures we strongly recommend that you purchase a suitable UPS uninterruptible power supply for your VPS and PBX if needed The power rating of your VPS may be found in the specifications Installation Manual 29 INSTALLATION 2 2 UNPACKING Unpack the box and check the items below Table 5 Main Unit 1 AC Cord 1 Screws Wall Mounting 3 Anchor Plugs Wall Mounting 3 30 Installation Manual INSTALLATION 2 3 MOUNTING THE VPS ON THE WALL The wall where the VPS is to be mounted must be able to support the weight of the VPS If screws other than the ones supplied are used use the same sized diameter screws as the enclosed ones To Mount on a Wooden Wall 1 Place the template included on the wall to mark the 3 screw positions 2 Install the 3 screws included accessories into the wall Wooden Wall VA Drive the screw to this position 3 Hook the unit on the screw heads Installation Manual 31 INSTALLATION 24 FRAME GROUND CONNECTION IMPORTANT Connect the frame of the main unit to the ground 1 Loosen the screw 2 Insert the grounding wire 3 Tighten the screw 4
226. ee Remote Call Forwarding Set 406 Installation Manual Glossary Remote Call Forwarding Set Available with DPT Integration only A subscriber and the Message Manager can program his extension from a remote location to forward various types of calls to a desired extension or an outside telephone There are 6 forwarding settings available 1 Forward All Calls 2 Forward Busy Calls 3 Forward No Answer Calls 4 Forward Busy or No Answer Calls 5 Forward to a CO Line 6 Forward Cancel See Remote Call Forward to CO Review Plays back a message Rewind Replays the last 4 s of a message Rotary Telephone A telephone capable of pulse dial only Callers using a rotary telephone will be automatically forwarded to the operator or the General Delivery Mailbox SAVE One of the utility commands that is used to save VPS data to a personal computer Scanning Messages Allows the subscriber to listen to only the first 4 s of each message Another method is to press 2 while listening to a message this instructs the VPS to skip to the next message Service Mode The System Administrator or the System Manager can change the call handling method programmed in the Time Service setting Station Programming Programming via the proprietary telephone Subscriber A person who has an assigned mailbox Installation Manual 407 Glossary System Administration System programming can be performed via 2 ways 1 Locall
227. eeeseneeaees 48 3 2 2 JIRS 232C Set ngs i n oe Hebe ly Ce rie niet etr re qud eel cesa 48 3 2 3 Port Settings euis ee ed ee ert rH Pe T Ue E e Pee i ette Pind 48 3 24 PBX Interface Parameters 2 eee eene eee tese ii 49 33 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES 52 3 3 1 VPS Programming for Inband Integration 52 3 3 2 KX T123211D Software Verification and Programming for Inband Integration 53 3 3 3 KX TA Series Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager s Extension 55 3 3 4 KX TD500 Programming for Inband Integration with KX TVS80 58 3 3 5 KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TA1232 and KX TD308 Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager s Extension e 67 3 3 6 KX TD816 KX TD1232 and 1232 Programming for Inband Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool eee 68 3 3 7 KX TD308 Programming for Inband Integration via the Operating and Maintenance LIE i 71 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION eeeeeeee ene te re zio nioeionioneoee 76 4 1 1 Why Digital Integration is Important ener 76 4 2 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC 624 78 4 2 1 KX TA624 Software Verification and Programming for Digital Integ
228. elete Message Confirmation Message Waiting Notification External Message Delivery and Auto Forwarding But the Message Manager can only utilize the following features Remote Call Forward to CO Delete Message Confirmation and Message Waiting Notification and the System Manager can only utilize the Delete Message Confirmation feature See Remote Call Forward to CO Delete Message Confirmation Authorization for Message Notification Authorization for External Message Delivery and Authorization for Auto Forwarding in Table 40 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Remote Call Forward to CO Delete Message Confirmation and Authorization for Message Notification in Table 41 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS System Clock allows the correct setting of the date and time to be made for proper VPS operation See 7 2 4 Set Time TIME See C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK See 05 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK System Reports Eight System Reports are available to the System Administrator and System Manager to monitor VPS operating status These reports include Mailbox Assignments COS Assignments System Service Report Call Account Report Port Usage Report Flash Memory Usage Report Mailbox Usage Report and the Fax Call Report See 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS
229. em Reset Clear 5 Quick Setup VT100 Mode Only Enter the number 2 Type 4 for System Initialization System Reset Clear Menu 1 Mailbox No Length 3 2 System Manager s Mailbox No 999 3 Message Manager s Mailbox No 998 Will you change the settings Y N Note Depending on the PBX extension numbering the Mailbox No Length might be 2 to 5 3 Type Y this places the VPS in the off line mode System Reset Clear Menu 1 Mailbox No Length 3 2 5 2 System Manager s Mailbox No 999 3 Message Manager s Mailbox No 998 Are these parameters acceptable Y N 160 Installation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 4 Type Y to start the system resetting System Initializing 5 When system initializing is complete the following display will appear ON LINE MODE gt Note The execution time for System Reset Clear may differ each time it is performed because of system capacity and system programs Generally initialization will take about 2 min to accomplish Installation Manual 161 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS In the Utility Command Mode the System Administrator can access the functions described below by entering the appropriate command at the prompt and Pressing RETURN To select the Utility Commands Menu follow the menu path as shown System
230. en 2 Assign Destination Day Night Lunch Break for each trunk CO line to a specific extension number 3 Click Apply to save the changed data Note Specify the FDN for the extension group to which Operator has been assigned Screen output Card Ho 106 ELCOT Port Ho nit yp Dial Type GroupHo 1 cooo DTMF 80 M Destination TOTIS icd El CPC Signal C Enable G Disable Detection Time 400 ms M IH Detection C Enable Detection Time C Disable Caller ID C Disable 41 Trunk Line OK Apply Cancel Help 62 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS b Assignment of IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer destination 1 Go to the 3 1 Trunk Group screen 2 Assign Intercept Destination Day Night for the trunk CO line group 3 Click Apply to save the changed data Note Specify the FDN for the extension group to which VM or AA has been assigned Screen output 3 1 Trunk Group ES Group Ho 1 M Copy Intercept Destination Pause Time before Flash Max Dial Ho after EFA Signal Line Hunting Order Tenant Ho Flash Time Hormal 1 600 ms M Disconnecting Time Pause Time PBX Access Code we se III Humbering Plan ID Public PBX Dial Tone 2 Di Incoming pefautt M Private M PBX Ringback Tone C Enable Disable Type of Humber Public Private Outgoing nefautt Defautt M Cyclic Signal De
231. enabled go to Step 24b below b Press 1 2 3 4 or 5 to choose the desired Beeper Callback Number Entry Mode 1 Caller Select Mode 2 Without message mode 3 Before message recording mode 4 After message recording mode 5 Disable All Entry Mode Caller cannot access beeper Confirm the entry is correct and Press 6 to accept it d The current setting of MWL Notification for Unreceived Message plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable e Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it f The current setting of Device Notification for Unreceived Message plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable g Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Return to Step 24a above Installation Manual 311 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE External Message Delivery a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable If the External Message Delivery is enabled set the prompt mode for receiving External Delivery Messages go to Step 25b below b The current prompt mode plays Press 1 2 3 or 4 to choose the desired mode I System Prompt 2 User 1 Prompt 3 User 2 Prompt 4 Selective Prompt Confirm the entry is correct and Press 5 to accept it Return to Step 25a above Auto Forwarding a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable If Auto Forward
232. ension numbering the mailbox numbers might be 2 to 5 digit long At the System Administration Top Menu Type 5 and Press ENTER or Type 3 then QSET and Press ENTER See 7 2 17 Quick Setup QSET for more information Screen output System Administration Top Menu 5 or System Administration Top Menu 3 QSET Quick Setup Utility for connection to Panasonic KX T series telephone systems This utility provides a quick way of programming the Voice Processing System to operate in a standard automated attendant or voice mail configuration when connected to a Panasonic KX T series telephone system The system will prompt you to enter modify or confirm settings based upon which PBX type you select By entering the appropriate information in the following screens the system sets PBX integration parameters identifies the extension numbers connected to it creates default mailboxes sets its ports to handle callers with automated attendant or voice mail service sets system passwords and sets the time and date Finally it confirms that you want to activate the system based on the information you entered modified or confirmed To proceed press Enter To exit and cancel Quick Setup now press V Installation Manual 119 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 1 PBX Type a Press ENTER Screen output KX TVS50 Quick Setup PBX type Please select your PBX type KX T308 KX T616 KX T1232 KX T96 KX T336 KX TD816 KX TD1
233. ent parameter settings Note Depending on the PBX extension numbering the mailbox numbers might be 2 to 5 digit long To select the Mailbox Assignments Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 1 Mailbox Assignments JUL 28 2001 11 30 AM MBOX Extn Name Fir Lst COS CExtn IVMBOX AITrf MNist MN2nd MN3rd 510 201 JONE DELY 2 601 621 511 202 SCHE 2 602 611 Bep Tel 512 203 MAY 16 603 612 Tel Bep 520 310 JONE 1 X Tel Bep 521 320 DAVE 1 888 de sx 522 410 CLUS ALCC 21 523 421 WHIT BLUE 32 642 COS Class of Service CExtn Covering Extension IVMBOX Interview Mailbox AITrf All Call Transfer to Mailbox MNI st Message Notification Device 1 MN2nd Message Notification Device 2 MN3rd Message Notification Device 3 Bep Beeper Tel Telephone Note An X displayed on the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is set to YES 7 3 2 COS Class of Service Assignments The COS Class of Service Assignments report provides information concerning all Class of Service numbers For a complete explanation of COS parameters please see Tables 40 and 41 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS To select the COS Assignments Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 2 180 Installation Manual
234. enu f Custom Service Transfers the caller to another Custom Service and plays the menu g Voice Mail Service Allows the caller to access Voice Mail Service h Call Transfer Service Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant Service i Subscriber Service Allows the caller to access Subscriber Service Digits received after entering this code are assumed to be the subscriber s mailbox number If this option is enabled it is strongly recommended that each subscriber establish a password this will prevent unauthorized callers from accidentally or intentionally accessing subscribers mailboxes j Department Dialing Transfer the caller to the Department Dialing menu k Dial by Name Requests the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 letters of a last name of the person they wish to reach then transfers him to the corresponding extension 1 Repeat Menu Repeats the Custom Service menu prompts m Main Menu Returns the caller to the Custom Service top menu n Fax Transfer Allows the caller to send fax messages to the extension specified as the fax extension Installation Manual 131 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 5 2 4 Recording Menus After you have finished entering the parameters in each menu record the menu messages Menu messages inform the caller of available options and their corresponding keys For this reason the prompts must match the programm
235. enu Enter the Mailbox Number appears on the screen Enter the mailbox number you wish to reset Enter the Mailbox Number appears again Enter a new number if you wish to reset more than one password From Mailbox Setting Menu Enter The Number 3 Program Mailbox Setting Password Reset Enter the Mailbox Number Enter the Mailbox Number Installation Manual 147 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 5 5 5 Mailbox Listing This listing is a report of mailbox number assignments From Mailbox Setting Menu KX TVS50 Enter The Number 4 Program Mailbox Setting Mailbox Listing 1 101 2 103 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 amp 29 30 System Manager s Mailbox No 999 Message Manager s Mailbox No 998 KX TVS80 Enter The Number 4 Program Mailbox Setting Mailbox Listing 1 101 2 103 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2Hh 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 5
236. eps complete the basic installation of the VPS For each mailbox on the system a No Answer Busy and After Hours Greetings should be recorded as well as the Owner s Name and Password Please follow the steps below to set up the mailboxes accordingly 6 2 1 Recording Personal Greetings The No Answer Greeting plays whenever the caller enters your mailbox during business hours The Busy Greeting plays when the caller is told your line is busy and then selects to leave a message in your mailbox The After Hours Greeting plays whenever the caller enters your mailbox when the VPS is in the Night Mode 1 Dial the Extension Number of the VPS 2 When the VPS answers Press 6 X and Dial the Number of the mailbox for which you wish to record Personal Greetings 3 Enter your Password if programmed then Press You are now inside the mailbox Press 5 for Mailbox Management Press 1 to change the Personal Greetings Press 1 again to change the No Answer Greeting do The system will then say No Answer Greeting is not recorded Record greeting at the tone 8 State your Greeting at the tone Example Hi this is Tom I am away from my desk right now but please leave a message at the tone and I will return your call as soon as possible 9 Press 1 when finished The system gives the options of reviewing accepting or erasing the message 10 Press 1 to review the greeting 11 Press 2
237. er or mailbox number For example we will use the number 250 There are 2 ways to use a System Group Distribution List Option A For inside messages The System Group Distribution List number can be designed so that any subscriber can press 2 and then enter the list number which is 250 in this example to deliver a message The message will be delivered to all specified mailboxes Option B For outside messages The System Group Distribution List number can be designed as a custom greeting for incoming callers For instance the greeting might be 7o leave a message for the parts section press 3 The digit 3 would be assigned to System Group Distribution List number 250 in Custom Service Setting Each message waiting lamp will remain on until the message is cleared from the individual station 5 2 8 Extension Groups An extension group places several extensions into the same mailbox These extensions may be assembled into a list called a Extension Group List The extensions in the group list cannot have a personal mailbox When a message is left in this mailbox it lights all of the message waiting lamps of the phones that are in this group list There are 20 group lists available and each group list can have up to 20 entries When a message is left for the extension group it will light the message waiting lamps on each phone The first person that retrieves the call cancels the message waiting lamp on the other Installat
238. ers all incoming outside calls promptly Go to Recommended Settings 1 The VPS answers when the operator does not take the call after a specified number of rings Go to Recommended Settings 2 The VPS answers when an extension user does not take the call after a specified number of rings Go to Recommended Settings 3 Recommended Settings 1 If the VPS is answering all incoming outside calls a Assignment of DIL 1 1 line 1 Go to the 4 1 Trunk Line screen 2 Assign Destination Day Night Lunch Break for each trunk CO line to a specific extension number VPS port 3 Click Apply to save the changed data Note Specify the FDN for the extension group to which VM or AA has been assigned In order to utilize the Caller ID features you must Set Caller ID to Enable Screen output Card Ho 106 ELCOT M Port Ho 1 M Copy Hame Dial Type GroupHo 1 cooo DTMF 80 Destination Day 11005 Hight 5 Lunch Break 1005 Bi CPC Signal Cid nable Disable Detection Time 400 ms M IH Detection C Enable Detection Time C Disable Caller ID C Disable 4 1 Trunk Line M OK Apply Cancel Help Installation Manual 61 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS Recommended Settings 2 If the VPS is only answering incoming outside calls not answered by the Operator Operator backup a Assignment of DIL 1 1 line 1 Go to the 4 1 Trunk Line scre
239. es will automatically be set to 6 min Mailbox 5 100 msgs Specifies the maximum number of both new and saved Capacity 100 messages that can be stored in a mailbox Maximum Messages Mailbox 5 100 min Specifies the total number of available minutes for storing Capacity 0 Unlimited both new and saved messages in each mailbox Maximum 100 Message Time Message 1 LIFO Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved Retrieval Order 2 FIFO played back for listening LIFO 1 LIFO Messages are retrieved starting with the most recent 2 FIFO Messages are retrieved starting with the oldest 244 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 41 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Message 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS adds the message sender s name and Scanning with 2 No the recording date and time to the message during the Information No message scan Prompt Mode 1 System Specifies the language used for voice prompts 2 User 1 3 User 2 Note If User 1 or User 2 is specified as Prompt Mode but User 1 not recorded by the Message Manager the VPS will automatically play the factory recorded System prompts in English By default User 1 and User 2 prompts are not recorded Remote Call 1 Yes If set to Yes Remote Call Forwarding can be set to an Forward to CO 2 No outside CO line the Message Manager can program No
240. es can also be transferred using either the System or Personal Group Distribution Lists See Transferring Messages in D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX See Message Transfer in Glossary See 2 3 Message Transfer in the Subscriber s Guide Message Waiting Notification Device automatically notifies the subscriber Message Manager of the reception of new message s by calling either a specified telephone or beeper number The message will automatically play when the subscriber Message Manager answers a call to the telephone When a beeper is called the subscriber Message Manager must call the VPS and access the message from the mailbox Notification can be scheduled either on or offfor a maximum of 2 times during any 24 h period The subscriber Message Manager can program a maximum of 3 telephones or beepers in sequence The VPS will recall the number or number sequence for a specified number of times until answered Notification is terminated when the subscriber Message Manager has received the message when the last number has been called a specified number of times or at the completion of the programmed time period See Message Waiting Notification from an SLT in 3 1 4 PBX Requirements for Integration See Notification Setting in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Authorization for Message Notification in Tables 40 and 41inB3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLA
241. es to PITS PGM Mode For KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PITS PGM Mode 2 Press the Flexible button CO or DSS BLF that you want to assign as the TWR button 3 Dial 90 Screen output 2Way Rec 4 Dial the Voice Mail extension number Screen output 2Way Rec ___ _ _ _ The extension number you entered 5 Press Store 6 For KX TA624 Set the MEMORY switch to SET For KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset 7 Repeat these steps for each telephone 110 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 4 5 10 Conditions This button must be a CO or DSS BLF key to be programmed as a TWR button If this key is pressed when all Voice Mail ports are busy the user will hear a reorder tone Two Way Transfer Button Assignment via Station Programming For the Two Way Transfer feature to work at an extension the extension must have a TWT button on it This key must either be a DSS BLF or CO key with a lamp Follow the procedure below to assign a TWT button on an extension This is a station level program and should be done at each individual telephone PC programming is also available for KX TD500 users see 4 5 12 Button Assignment via PC Programming Enter PITS Programming For KX TA624 With the phone on hook Se
242. ess Tones SLT Signals ringback on off hook busy hookswitch flash reorder touchtones Touchtones The VPS must also have access to certain PBX features For example if the VPS takes a message one way it can notify the mailbox owner is by dialing the PBX s Message Waiting Lamp On code Once new messages are retrieved the VPS dials the Message Waiting Lamp Off code for that same mailbox owner 3 1 4 PBX Requirements for Integration The PBX must have certain capabilities and features to work with the VPS Although this section includes tests to help you evaluate the PBX it may be necessary to refer to the PBX s documentation for detailed capability and feature descriptions Single Line Tip Ring Port Circuits The VPS can only be connected to a PBX that supports SLT sets Some PBXs need an OPX card to provide this connection However some OPX cards do not provide all the capabilities listed in this section Following are the minimum current and voltages that the PBX must supply Table 9 Minimum Loop Current 20 mA Minimum Line Voltage 7N DC Minimum Ringing Voltage 40 V AC Station to Station Touchtone Signaling For system users to access VPS services and features they must be able to send touchtones from their telephones to the VPS port As a general rule SLT sets can perform station to station touchtone signaling however many proprietary telephones cannot Some PBXs need to be programmed to
243. essage or call another extension In some cases a call to another extension is not available For more information see the Note on Caller Select in Table 24 in 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters 2 Leave Message Instructs the caller to leave a message in Operator 3 s mailbox 3 Disconnect message Disconnects the caller after playing Thank you for calling Notes An operator seeking call will always reach Operator 1 first The call will then be transferred to Operator 2 and Operator 3 sequentially depending on system programming Next Operator is not applicable for No Answer Coverage Mode of Operator 3 Operator s Parameters Night Mode Operator 1 2 3 Same as Day Mode Operator s Parameters Lunch Mode Operator 1 2 3 Same as Day Mode Operator s Parameters Break Mode Operator 1 2 3 Same as Day Mode 258 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Alternate Extension Assignment Assigns extensions that should be transferred differently from the normal extension transfer sequence Calls to the extensions in this group will be transferred following the sequence defined by Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence see Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence in Table 75 in B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension Assignment Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 3 Alternate Extension Group
244. essage Waiting MON 00 59 min Notification service for 1 week for this device Lo AM PM WED Note These parameters are active only when Use THU a Mode is set to Scheduled FRI All Day SAT Space No Use No Use From Mailbox Setting Menu Enter The Number 1 Enter the Mailbox number Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Menu 1 Mailbox Setting 2 Notification Setting 3 Remote Call FWD to CO Enter The Number 3 Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Remote Call FWD to CO 1 Telephone No 1 0 9 X Enter the telephone No 1 2 Telephone No 2 0 9 X Enter the telephone No 2 146 Installation Manual CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Enter the data using the following table as a guide Table 27 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Telephone Up to 16 digits Specifies the telephone number to which the callers are Number 1 2 With the KX forwarded when Remote Call Forwarding is set to a CO TD816 TD1232 line TA1232 or The telephone number can contain the digits 0 9 and Up to 24 digits With the KX 30 Note This feature is available with DPT Integration None only 5 5 3 Deleting a Mailbox From Mailbox Setting Menu Enter The Number 2 Program Mailbox Setting Delete Enter the Mailbox Number Are you sure Y N 5 5 4 Password Reset To reset a subscriber s password go to the Password Reset M
245. essage is played even though the specified time expires Callback Up to 32 digits the Callback Telephone Number When the Telephone No None recipient has failed to retrieve the sender s message because of incorrect password entries the VPS announces the Callback Telephone Number for him to call in order to retrieve it 284 Installation Manual Other Parameters Call Hold SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE To access the proper menu for Call Hold follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 5 Table 65 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Call Hold 1 Disable If set to Enable the VPS gives callers the option of Mode 2 Enable either holding for a specific extension or selecting one of Enable several Incomplete Call Handling service options While on hold the VPS periodically gives callers the choice to either continue to hold or select one of the Incomplete Call Handling service options If set to Disable the VPS immediately offers callers the Incomplete Call Handling service Call Queuing 1 Disable If set to Enable callers on hold are informed of their Announcement 2 Enable current position in the call hold queue Mode Enable Example One other person is waiting to connect Call Retrieval 1 30 s Specifies the interval between the voice guidance Announcement 2 message that asks whether or not calls are to be retrieve
246. f the following procedures must be done after entering system programming Refer to the KX TD1232 Programming Guide or Installation Manual for instructions on how to enter the system programming mode Software Verification 1 Verify Software If you are configuring a 2 cabinet system remember to check both cabinets The software must be the same in each Check the software version of the KX TD1232 using System Program 116 Example P231UYMMDDA The underlined digits represent the software production date code year month day For DPT Integration the software version of the PBX must be P231U or higher For KX TD816 the version must be P3010 or higher for KX TA1232 the version must be P831AA or higher 92 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX If the software version of the PBX is lower than this you may not be able to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration For more information call National Parts Center at 1 800 833 9626 From the SYS PGM NO screen a Enter 116 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE c Enter the system number 0 or 1 master slave The system displays the ROM version and the date it was created This version must be P231U or higher for DPT Integration to be utilized both systems if system connection is used 2 Set the date and time using System Program 000 3 Set PBX extension numbering usin
247. features that are only available with Digital Integration several of which are described below Table 13 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES Remote Call Forwarding Set DPT Integration only The subscribers and the Message Manager can program their extensions from a remote location to forward various types of calls to a desired extension or an outside telephone Auto Configuration The VPS knows what extension numbers exist on the PBX and creates mailboxes for each extension automatically Also sets the VPS clock with data from the PBX clock Live Call Screening Extension users can monitor messages as they are being left in the mailbox or intercept if required Two Way Recording Extension users can record conversations into their own mailboxes by pressing one button Two Way Transfer Extension users can record conversations into another person s mailbox by pressing a button and dialing an extension number Direct Mailbox Access The subscriber can directly enter his mailbox when he calls the VPS He does not have to dial his mailbox number Trunk Service Universal Port Each PBX trunk CO line group can be assigned one of 4 incoming call services Voice Mail Service Automated Attendant Service Interview Service and Custom Service 76 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX Table 13 DIGITAL INTEG
248. fic mailboxes from No 200 to No 209 Type 20 and Press RETURN or 200 209 and Press RETURN 186 Installation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 10 Mailbox Usage Report JAN 4 2001 7 46 PM MBOX 111 JONE BLUE New MSGs 4 Received MSGs 6 ED MSGs 0 FROM JAN 3 2001 9 53 AM Subscriber Access Time 00 00 40 MBOX Use Time 00 00 12 of 01 40 00 1 Used ED MN IM GM AF Feature Usage 11 31 20 14 22 LD Lcl Beep Extn Outcalling 6 13 0 28 Time 00 05 10 00 10 45 00 00 00 00 31 21 Rcv Del Exp MSG Received 42 30 11 FROM The date and time of the last clearing of this report MN Message Notification GM Personal System Group Distribution List LD Long distance call 8 digits or more Lcl Local call less than 8 digits Del Deleted Note ED External Delivery IM Interview message AF Auto Forwarding Rcv Received Exp Expired New MSGs Received MSGs and ED MSGs are current status indications All else are accumulated indications since the last clearing of this report Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear The Mailbox Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again System Administration Top Menu 2 2 3 To clear the Mailbox Usage Report follow the menu path as shown System Reports System Report Clear Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear Enter the Range May I clear mailbox usage report data Y N Typ
249. following items will not work e time table overflow function DISA message from a DISA card IRNA Integration with the wrong PBX or with certain Key Systems presents limitations to the VPS standard functions We do not recommend these systems for integration with the VPS The section 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible explains problems with compatibility Installation Manual 17 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 12 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MANAGEMENT AND USE 1 2 1 System Administration System Administration is accomplished by the installer using terminal emulation software It concerns setting and changing system parameters and diagnosing system problems 1 2 2 System Management Two system functions are performed by the customer System Management and Message Management System Management concerns changing system parameters through the System Manager s Mailbox Message Management concerns recording voice prompts through the Message Manager s Mailbox These messages include Company Greetings Company Name Department Dialing menu Custom Service menus voice labels for System Group Distribution Lists user prompts multilingual selection menu and System Caller Names 1 2 3 Subscriber Use System users are called subscribers Subscribers are assigned personal mailboxes which they can customize Subscribers can record their names record personal greetings set covering extensions record questions for an in
250. fter you record the company greeting it may be necessary to enter programming through the terminal and set the company greeting assignment under the Port Settings Menu Trunk Service Menu and Holiday Service Menu This tells the system what company greeting to play on each port and trunk CO line group A company greeting should be very short Example Thank you for calling ABC Company It is not necessary to give any other instruction within the company greeting because instructions will follow the company greeting automatically If Interview Service follows explanations should be included in the first question work for the subscriber who maintains the Interview Service mailbox If Custom Service follows explanations should be included in the first menu work for the Message Manager 6 1 4 Recording the Company Name Enter 6 998 5 2 TVS80 only Access the Message Manager s Main Command Menu Press 5 to modify messages Press 2 to record the Company Name gt BO Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus Prompts lead you through the choices and recording process Note The company name is only played when the External Message Delivery feature is used 6 1 5 Custom Service Greetings Enter 6x998 5 4 Access the Main Menu of Message Manager s Service Press 5 to modify messages Press 4 to change the Custom Service Menu gt r3 BO Continue following voice prom
251. ftware enables the keyboard to be used as a data entry device While both the laptop and data terminal are working the laptop allows screens to be saved in a file throughout the process It is often helpful to retrieve these files later if technical support is needed 1 3 5 Specifications Table 2 Ports 2 ports Voice Storage approximate s KX TVS50 2h KX TVS80 6h Custom Services 100 Message Retention 1 to 30 days or unlimited Number of Mailboxes e KX TVS50 30 Subscriber and 2 Manager Mailboxes e KX TVS80 62 Subscriber and 2 Manager Mailboxes Number of Messages per Mailbox 100 maximum programmable 1 3 6 Hardware 1 KX TVS50 or 2 KX TVS80 Flash Memory Card s e Optional Flash Memory Position for KX TVS52 card KX TVS50 only 2 Telephone Inputs RJ11C e RS 232C Connector e 1 DIP Switch 4 bit 1 3 7 Flash Memory Expansion Capabilities KX TVS50 only Expansion of the flash memory capacity requires an optional expansion memory card KX TVS52 The KX TVS50 initially has 2 h memory The KX TVS52 increases the capacity by 2 h Installation Manual 23 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 3 8 Recommendations for System Configuration General guideline a ratio of 6 1 for every 6 lines 1 port There are 2 questions to ask when considering how many ports are desirable Are the ports answering all incoming calls or just forwarded transferred calls If they
252. function Test from an SLT to determine the sequence Light On Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp This is the dialing sequence that the VPS must use to turn on a message waiting lamp at an extension Light Off Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp This is the dialing sequence that the VPS must use to turn off a message waiting lamp at an extension Call Waiting Sequence This sequence is carried out by the VPS to perform call waiting when the called extension is busy PBXs differ in how they handle this function Test from an SLT to determine the sequence Release Sequence for Call Waiting This sequence is carried out by the VPS to release call waiting PBXs differ in how they handle this function Test from an SLT to determine the sequence Inband Signaling These parameters are used when the Integration Mode is set to Inband If the PBX type is set to a KX T series system these parameters will be automatically set If another type PBX is used check that system s installation manual for settings Table 11 Code Call State Sent to the Voice Mail Port When default 1 Ringback Tone The extension dialed is ringing 2 Busy Tone The extension dialed is busy Reorder Tone An invalid extension number is dialed or the call is 3 inadvertently connected to another Voice Mail port also heard when no touchtone receiver is available to the Voice Mail extension 4 DND The extension dialed has set DND feature Do N
253. g Lamp Light Off This is the dialing sequence that the VPS must perform to Sequence for disable the Message Waiting Lamp at an extension None Message Waiting Lamp Installation Manual 297 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 75 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Call Waiting 1 The VPS carries out this sequence when performing call Sequence waiting if the extension being called is busy Release The VPS performs this sequence to release call waiting Sequence for F Call Waiting Inband Signaling Parameters Use these parameters if the PBX sends touchtones to the VPS to indicate the state of a call busy answered disconnected etc The integration mode must be set to Inband If PBX type is set to a KX T series telephone system the Inband Signaling parameters will automatically default to the proper codes as shown To access the proper menu for Inband Signaling Parameters follow the menu path System Administration Top Menu 1 6 3 2 The following parameters can be programmed using 0 9 X and A D Table 76 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Ringback 1 Indicates Ringback Tone Sent to the VPS when the extension dialed is ringing Busy Indicates Busy Tone Sent to the VPS when the 2 MN extension dialed is busy Reorder Indicates Reorder Tone Sent to the VPS when an 3 invalid extension
254. g System Program 003 4 Assign the Voice Mail Port This program tells the PBX which jack will be connected to the VPS This allows the PBX to send the proper DPT Integration information to those ports e KX TVS50 KX TVS80 2 ports assign I jack Note If you are configuring a 2 cabinet system all Voice Mail Ports should be assigned to either the Master or Slave System From the SYS PGM NO screen a Enter 117 b Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output M c Enter the jack number 02 64 of the port you will use for the Voice Mail d Press STORE e Press END HOLD when finished Conditions Jack 01 cannot be used as a Voice Mail port A jack programmed as a Manager Extension System Program 006 cannot be used in this program 5 Skip this step unless setting flexible numbering System Program 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment is automatically set This program allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port Since a jack connected to the VPS provides 2 extensions this enables you to assign extension numbers to each port You can assign any extension number that is not already assigned to another port To reach the VPS users dial these extension numbers It is not necessary to change the default programming for the extensions 165 and 166 Installation Manual 93 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX From the SYS PGM NO s
255. ge Manager and COS 64 is for the System Manager Either the System Administrator using a PC or the System Manager using a telephone can change COS assignments See 7 3 2 COS Class of Service Assignments See B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Creating and Editing a Mailbox 2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Company Greeting KX TVS80 only is a prerecorded message designed to greet all incoming callers and provide relevant information This feature allows the use of up to 32 different greetings for each individual Time Service period Day Night Lunch and Break as well as holidays Available for both Port and Trunk services Note The System Manager can change the Company Greeting setting remotely by simply calling the VPS Only the System Administrator can assign specific greetings for holidays See 6 1 3 Company Greetings Enter 6 998 5 1 KX TVS80 only See C6 CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING SETTING KX TVS80 ONLY See Company Greeting No in Tables 42 and 43 in B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE See Company Greeting No in Table 57 in B6 3 Holiday Setting See D6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Company Greeting in Glossary Company Name KX TVS80 only is used by External Message Delivery Service when the intended receiver enters the password incorrectly 3 times The V
256. ge Transfer permits subscribers to transfer their messages to other mailboxes Message Scan permits subscribers to listen to the first 4 s of each message See Message Transfer and Message Scan in this Table See 2 1 Receiving Messages in the Subscriber s Guide See 2 2 Replying to Messages in the Subscriber s Guide 218 Installation Manual SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Remote Call allows a subscriber and the Message Manager See 5 5 2 Entering a Mailbox Forwarding Set to program his extension from a remote See Remote Call Forward to DPT Integration location to forward various types of calls to a CO Setting in B2 SYSTEM only desired extension or an outside telephone ADMINISTRATION There are 6 forwarding settings available MAILBOXES FWD All Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number FWD Busy Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when the line is busy FWD No Answer Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when there is no answer FWD Busy or No Answer Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when the line is busy or there is no answer FWD to CO Forward all incoming calls to the Telephone number 1 or 2 programmed in the Mailbox Setting or to any other number FWD Cancel Cancel the forwarding setting Must be enabled in the COS Class of Service settings to be utili
257. ger 508 415 499 388 415 416 Please leave a message at the tone 416 417 Please wait a moment 417 49 417 418 PM 418 419 POUND 419 420 Prompt mode for external message 420 delivery is caller select 421 Prompt mode for external message 421 delivery is system 422 Prompt mode for external message 422 delivery is user 1 423 Prompt mode for external message 423 delivery is user 2 424 Prompt mode is system 424 425 Prompt mode is user 1 425 426 Prompt mode is user 2 426 427 Prompt number number 427 428 Prompt restored 428 429 PULSE DIALING MODE 429 430 Question erased 430 366 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 431 Question number number 431 432 received on date 304 432 17 433 Record caller name at the tone 433 434 Record company name at the tone 434 435 Record greeting at the tone 435 436 Record label at the tone 436 437 Record menu at the tone 437 438 Record owner s name at the tone 438 439 Record the group name at the tone 439 440 Record the prompt at the tone 440 441 Record the question at the tone 441 442 Record the recipient s name at the 442 tone 443 Record your name at the tone 443 444 Recording accepted 444 445 Returning to top menu automated 445 attendant service
258. ger to use the Callback Number Callback Select Entry feature No Entry 2 Without Mode 3 Before 4 After Caller After recording a message the caller is asked 5 Disable Select if the message is urgent If urgent the caller is Disable asked to enter the callback number Without Without recording a message the caller is asked to enter the callback number Before Before recording a message the VPS asks the caller to enter the callback number After After recording a message the VPS asks the caller to enter the callback number Disable Disables the Callback Number Entry feature Note To utilize this feature the callback number entry code must be included in the subscriber s beeper number When Disable is selected or if the caller does not enter a callback number System Callback No see Table 63 will be displayed on the beeper s display If a caller s number is received through a telephone company s Caller ID service the caller s number will be displayed instead of System Callback No MWL 1 Yes If set to Yes the message waiting lamp illuminates when Notification for 2 No unplayed messages remain after the Message Manager has Unreceived Yes accessed the mailbox Message Device 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS calls the appropriate device in Notification for 2 No numerical order until all unplayed messages are received Unreceived No Message Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE
259. h in Tables 40 and 41 inB3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Unlimited Message Length in Glossary Utility Commands allow the System Administrator to access critical VPS functions See 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS Voice Mail Service permits a caller non subscriber to leave a message in any mailbox See 5 2 6 Voice Mail See B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE See Voice Mail in Glossary Installation Manual 223 SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Voice Prompts are announcements that instruct the caller e See 6 1 5 Custom Service Greetings Enter 6 998 5 4 There are 3 kinds of voice prompts See Prompt Mode in Tables 1 System Prompts recorded at the factory 40 and 41 in SYSTEM in English ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF 2 User 1 P t t ded a SERVICE PARAMETERS and e See B6 5 Prompt Setting e See SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Recording User Prompts inD6 RECORDING MESSAGES See Voice Prompt in Glossary 3 User 2 Prompts not recorded 224 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Appendix SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Installation Manual 225 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION Use either a VT or RS 232C terminals
260. he current setting Go to Step 9 Note Operator 1 s extension number cannot be deleted 7 Type the extension number 8 The VPS plays the current extension setting Press 2 to accept it 9 Repeat Steps 6 8 to assign or to delete the extension number for the Day Night Lunch and Break Modes for each operator 10 The VPS plays the current Telephone number 1 setting Press 1 to change the telephone number If a telephone number has not yet been assigned go to Step 11 Press 2 to accept the current setting Go to Step 13 11 Type the telephone number using 0 9 and X Notes Please make sure you begin the telephone number with a Line Access Code to seize a CO line e When connected to the KX TD816 TD1232 TA 1232 the maximum number of characters allowed to be entered is 16 when connected to the KX TD500 24 12 The VPS plays the current Telephone number 1 setting Press 2 to accept it 13 The VPS plays the current Telephone number 2 setting Press 1 to change the telephone number If a telephone number has not yet been assigned go to Step 14 Press 2 to accept the current setting 14 Type the telephone number using 0 9 and x 15 The VPS plays the current Telephone number 2 setting Press 2 to accept it Installation Manual 333 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK The Message Manager can set the system clock directly from the telephone It is important to set the exa
261. he default setting of this mode for all ports is OFF PUTD Target Port Don t leave enabled after troubleshooting 176 Installation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING To change the mode from PUTD to OFF Type PUTD again PUTD Target Port 00 Don t leave enabled after troubleshooting Note means enable for the port 0 means disable for the port To set the mode for only 1 port Type PUTD and the port number PUTD I Target Port 0 Don t leave enabled after troubleshooting Sample display PUTD Target Port for Debug 1 DTMF 3 1 DTME 8 1 A Attend 1 DTMF 1 DTMF 6 1 Voice Mail 1 DTMF 1 1 DTMF 0 1 DTME 1 1 NonSub Svc 1 1 DTMF 1 DTMF 9 1 Thank you WARNING PUTD is a command originally used when troubleshooting Do not use this command for any other purpose Do not disconnect the RS 232C connection while the PUTD command is enabled This could cause data overflow Installation Manual 177 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 2 20 Wait for Caller ID WCID Use the WCID command to specify the length of time in seconds the VPS must wait for the Caller ID after the VPS has received the incoming call from the PBX If Caller ID is not needed at all set the waiting time to 0 to accelerate the VPS response to incoming calls Type WCID the
262. he menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 1 3 System Group Assignment Extension Group You can assemble several extensions into a single list The VPS is able to maintain up to 20 Extension Group Lists Each list can support up to 20 extensions You can add delete and review the extensions Members within a list are able to share the same mailbox and be notified by the Message Waiting Notification Lamp feature if authorized when a message is present Installation Manual 267 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Extension Group Enter shown To access the proper menu for Extension Group Enter follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 2 1 Group List No Table 52 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Group List 2 5 digits Specifies any vacant extension number No None Note The Extension Group List number can be assigned as The Extension of the Owner of a mailbox This permits all group members to share the information in the mailbox Group Name Up to 16 Specifies a group name If a group name is not required characters press RETURN and specify the mailbox numbers None Any alphanumeric character and space can be used Member 2 5 digits Specifies the extension number belonging to the group 1 20 None Note Members cannot have a personal mailbox Extension Group Delete Deletes specified extensions from the list
263. he password periodically for instructions see 7 2 3 Set Password PASS in 7 2 UTILITY COMMANDS To go to the next screen without assigning the password Press ENTER 124 Installation Manual CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 7 Date and Time Setting Screen output Quick Setup Time Setting Current time is 3 04 PM Enter new time HH MM AM PM Current date is MON JAN 1 2001 Enter new date MM DD YY Enter the time hour minute in 2 digits comma and A or P and date month day and year in 2 digits To go to the next screen Press ENTER 8 Activating the Quick Setup Screen output Quick Setup Setup To set up the mailbox and restart select Yes To cancel and exit select No 1 Yes 2 No To activate the Quick Setup Press 1 and Press ENTER Note To cancel the Quick Setup Press 2 and Press ENTER This cancels all changes made up to this point The VPS begins to change system programming data Screen output Quick Setup To set up the mailbox and restart select Yes To cancel and exit select No 1 Yes 2 No Setup 101 Then PORT TEST SYSTEM SETUP and 1 2 3 appear on the screen by one Screen output PORT TEST SYSTEM SETUP Lan 209 Screen output when Quick Setup is finished ON LINE MODE 2 Installation Manual 125 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS Design each
264. help they can Press 0 on their telephone keypad to be transferred to an operator extension In each Day Night Lunch and Break Modes up to 3 operators Operator 1 2 3 can be specified The extension number assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode will be for the Message Manager Telephone Numbers 1 and 2 for Remote Call Forward to CO The customization of the Message Manager s mailbox only allows you to assign Telephone number 1 and or 2 to enable call forwarding to the telephone number assigned by following the steps below follow the instructions in D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET If you should change the telephone number after you have enabled call forwarding to a CO line you must go back to D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET to reset the call forwarding setting otherwise you will be transferring calls to the old telephone number unknowingly 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 3 to customize Mailbox 3 The VPS plays the current password setting Press 1 to change the password If a password has not yet been assigned go to Step 4 Press 2 to accept the current setting Go to Step 6 332 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 4 Type the password and Press 5 The VPS plays the current password setting Press 2 to accept it 6 The VPS plays the current operator s extension setting Press 1 to change or assign the operator s extension Press 2 to accept the current setting or Press 3 to delete t
265. hen Press RETURN If no VPS ports are in use the VPS will immediately suspend the Call Progression Mode OFLN OFF LINE MODE If any VPS port is in use the VPS will display the following warning Now line is used WAIT The following message indicates that the VPS is in the Off Line Mode OFF LINE MODE 7 2 2 On line Set ONLN Use the ONLN command to place the VPS in the Call Progression Mode Type ONLN then Press RETURN ONLN ON LINE MODE 7 2 3 Set Password PASS Use the PASS command to create change and clear system passwords Valid passwords are created using up to 10 characters any alphanumeric character space and can be used IMPORTANT We strongly recommend that you set the password to 10 characters for maximum protection against hackers Do not carelessly reveal the password to other persons Please change the password periodically Installation Manual 163 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Type PASS then Press RETURN PASS 1 Administrator Password 2 System Reset Clear Password 2 To create a password or change an existing password Go to Step 3 To clear a password Go to Step 4 3 To create a password or change an existing password a Type 1 or 2 Maximum 10 characters NEW PASSWORD Note When you press 2 to change the System Reset Clear password
266. hookswitch flash Choose the amount that is equal to or greater than the PBX s setting CPC Signal Calling Party Control Signal NONE 6 5 150 300 450 600 ms The length of time allowed for the short break in loop current that is used to indicate that the caller has hung up usually set to NONE since most PBXs do not provide this signal to single line ports If choosing a setting other than NONE use an amount equal to or less than the PBX or telephone company provided CPC signal Disconnect Time 1 8 s The length of time that the line is temporarily unavailable after a call has ended Dial Mode Touchtone Pulse 10 pps Pulse 20 pps The type of signaling the PBX single line port expects to receive pps pulses per second 48 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 3 2 4 PBX Interface Parameters Dialing Parameters PBX Type Specifies the type of PBX which is connected to the VPS Integration Mode Specifies the method of integration to be used between the VPS and PBX If PBX type is set to the Panasonic KX T series the Inband Signaling parameters are set automatically and should not be altered APT Integration is only available when a KX TA624 PBX is connected and the software is upgraded DPT Integration is only available when a KX TD series or KX TA1232 PBX is connected and the software is upgraded Table 10 SEQUENCE CODES D Disconnect F Hookswitch Flash
267. ies the method of integrating the VPS with the Mode 2 Inband PBX 3 APT 4 DPT 1 None Both PBX and VPS work independently KX TVS50 E information concerning the status APT KX TVS80 2 Inband The PBX sends touchtone codes to the VPS DPT to indicate the state of the call busy answered disconnect etc Inband Integration improves the VPS performance because call state recognition is faster than with standard call progress tone detection The PBX code for each call state must be set in the Inband Signaling Parameters If PBX type is set to a KX T series telephone system the Inband Signaling Parameters will automatically default to the proper codes This is available with any of the following Panasonic KX T series telephone systems T1232 TA series T96 T336 TD816 TD1232 1232 TD308 and TD500 3 APT The VPS communicates with the PBX via the APT interface This is available only with Panasonic KX TA624 4 DPT The VPS communicates with the PBX via the DPT interface This is available with any of the following Panasonic KX T series telephone systems TD816 TD1232 TA1232 TD308 and TD500 Extension 2 5 digits Specifies the extension number of VPS port 1 Number of TA624 107 VPS Port 1 TD816 TD1232 TA1232 165 TD308 295 TD500 None Extension 2 5 digits Specifies the extension number of VPS port 2 Number of TA624 108 VPS Port 2 TD816 TD1232 TA1232 166 TD308 296 TD500 None 296 Ins
268. ification Table 91 411 Please enter your callback number 411 Please enter your callback number 822 You can enter up to number 822 You can enter up to number 82 digits 82 digits 820 When you are finished hang up stay on the line to confirm or change your number 575 This call is for name 247 from name Interview Mailbox Management Table 92 14 Answer length is number 454 seconds Fax Management Table 93 824 You have number 764 Transferred number 164 FAX messages 600 times 398 Installation Manual Glossary Glossary Alternate Extension Group Transfers the call coming into the extensions in this group following the sequence specified by Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence APT Integration Digital Integration between the KX TA624 and the VPS Auto Configuration Available with APT DPT Integration only The VPS can automatically draw information from the KX TA624 the KX TD8 16 the KX TD1232 the KX TA1232 the KX TD308 or the KX TD500 This information includes among other things extension number assignments for each VPS port This saves time in the initial setup Auto Configuration can be executed by DIP Switch settings or by System Administration Quick Setup Auto Forwarding Allows unretrieved messages to be copied or moved to another mailbox Automated Attendant The Automated Attendant feature of the VPS requests the caller to enter an extension num
269. ilbox The storage period begins the day after the message reception Saved Message 1 30 days Defines the number of days that a played message will Retention Time 0 Unlimited remain in the mailbox The timing is refreshed 5 whenever the message is played back If 0 Unlimited is selected the saved message will remain in the mailbox until erased by the subscriber Message 1 6 min Defines the maximum message length Length 0 Unlimited f set to 0 Unlimited a subscriber can record two way 3 conversations of unlimited length into his or another person s mailbox Two Way Recording or Two Way Transfer The maximum recording time for other messages will automatically be set to 6 min Mailbox 5 100 msgs Specifies the maximum number of both new and saved Capacity 10 messages that can be stored in a mailbox Maximum Messages Mailbox 5 100 min Specifies the total number of available minutes for Capacity 0 Unlimited storing both new and saved messages in each mailbox Maximum 10 Message Time Message 1 LIFO Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved Retrieval 2 FIFO played back for listening Order LIFO 1 LIFO Messages are retrieved starting with the most recent 2 FIFO Messages are retrieved starting with the oldest Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 40 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Message 1 Ye
270. imes of the Lunch Start End 00 59 min Service AM PM a m p m Sun None Start End Time Service Break Service To access the proper menu for Break Service follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 2 2 3 Table 56 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Mon 1 12 h Specifies the Start and End times of the Break Break 1 Service 00 59 min Service Break 2 Service Break 3 Service Start End Sun Break 1 Service Break 2 Service Break 3 Service Start End None AM PM a m p m Note When Break Service periods overlap Lunch Service period Lunch Service has priority 272 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B6 3 Holiday Setting You can program special settings for up to 20 Holiday Services On the day s specified as holiday s settings in this parameter have priority over settings for Trunk Service Port Service and Caller ID Call Routing When setting specific day s as holiday s you have the following 2 options e The first option is to specify a single day on which to enable the Holiday Service setting For example you can specify the New Year s Day as a holiday The second option is to specify a range of days to enable the Holiday Service setting on all days within the specified range For example you can specify the start and the end dates of your Christmas vacation Note Holidays ca
271. ind the Important Note for Dial Number in Table 38 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Unable to call an extension Improper setting of extension Adjustthe extension numbering numbering plan plan properly see Numbering Plan 1 16 in Table 61 in B6 7 Other Parameters 190 Installation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Table 32 PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION Unable to access the mailbox Improper setting of the mailbox number Readjust the number of digits in the mailbox number see Mailbox Number in Table 36 inB2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES Unable to access to Operator 1 Improper setting of the operator extension number Adjust the operator extension number to that of the connected PBX see Operator s Extension in Table 45 in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters Connected terminal RS 232C port does not operate Improper connection Improper setting of the parameter Be sure you are using a null modem cable see 2 8 TERMINAL CONNECTION The terminal and VPS should have the same parameter settings for Baud Rate Word Bit Length Parity and Stop Bit Length see B7 1 RS 232C Parameters Unable to make reconnection when the line is busy Improper setting of the busy signal reconnection procedure Readjust the busy signal reconnection procedure to that of the connected PBX se
272. ing is enabled go to Step 26b below b The current forwarding destination mailbox number plays Press 1 to change the mailbox number c Type the mailbox number d Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it e The current delay time is played Press 1 to change the setting The delay time is the period of time that the VPS must wait before forwarding messages For example enter 115 to set the delay time to 1 h 15 min 30 to set 30 min f Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it g The current forwarding mode is played Press 1 to change the setting copy or move h Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Return to Step 26a above 312 Installation Manual SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK The system clock can be set directly from the telephone It is important to set the exact time because Message Waiting Notification External Message Delivery redialing and rescheduling of External Message Delivery and Automatic Message Deletion are all scheduled using this setting The System Administrator and Message Manager are also able to set the clock The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate when daylight saving time begins and ends Note The System Manager cannot set the system clock while the System Administrator programs via a computer the Message Manager sets the system clock records the Voice Labels and System Caller N
273. ing lamp notification 329 for unreceived message enabled 330 Messages 330 824 330 331 number messages to verify 331 332 minutes 332 309 332 763 332 72 264 332 72 332 333 MONDAY 333 334 more caller ID numbers 821 334 335 more members 821 335 336 MORE THAN ONE HUNDRED 336 337 more times 272 337 338 New message 338 339 New message retension time is day 339 70 340 new messages 824 340 362 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 341 Night mode first operator s extension 341 is extension number 342 Night mode first operator s extension 342 is not assigned 343 Night mode second operator s 343 extension is extension number 344 Night mode second operator s 344 extension is not assigned 345 Night mode third operator s extension 345 is extension number 346 Night mode third operator s extension 346 is not assigned 347 NINE 347 348 NINE HOUR 348 349 NINE MINUTE OWE NINE 349 350 NINETEEN 350 351 NINETEEN HOUR 351 352 NINETEEN MINUTE 352 353 NINETEENTH 353 354 NINETY 354 355 NINETY EIGHT 355 356 NINETY FIVE 356 357 NINETY FOUR 357 358 NINETY NINE 358 359 NINETY ONE 359 360 NINETY SEVEN 360 361 NINETY SIX 361 362 NINETY THREE 362 363
274. ing that has been input Note The Message Manager s mailbox might be 98 998 9998 or 99998 1 Dial an Extension Number that is connected to the VPS to access the Message Manager s mailbox 998 When the VPS answers Press 6 998 to enter the Message Manager s mailbox Press 5 to modify messages Press 4 to change the Custom Service Menu bh WwW IN You will hear Enter the Custom Service prompt number 1 through 100 To record Custom Service Exit prompt press 0 e Enter Custom Service Number you want to record 7 You will hear Custom Service number entered number Record menu at the tone Follow the instructions until all Custom Service prompts have been recorded using the tree that you created as a guide 5 2 5 Checking Operation After you have entered and recorded all menus it is important to try the program yourself to see that all functions perform properly Dial into the system and try all the choices to see if you are routed correctly Verify that each menu choice works as it should 5 2 6 Voice Mail Voice Mail service is a message taking service that allows non subscribers to leave messages to subscribers This service is often assigned when incoming calls are answered by a live person This person can then send the caller to the Voice Mail service if desired Callers can access Voice Mail service by Voice Mail Port This service can be programmed independently of an
275. ion Manual 133 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM phones Extension groups work well in areas where the call would not be intended for a specific person e g a Parts Center Technical Support Group etc To establish an extension group 1 From the System Administration Top Menu Type 1 5 1 2 1 Program System Parameter System Group Assignment Extension Group Enter 2 Enter an Extension Group List Number that has not been assigned to another mailbox or Extension Group List this must be a vacant number Enter the Extensions that are to be assigned to this group list 3 Enter the Extension Numbers that are to be assigned to the Extension Group List 4 Return to the Main Program Menu 5 Type 1 1 1 Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Assign the Extension Group List Number to a mailbox If you used the number 7000 for an Extension Group List number assign the number 7000 as a new mailbox You must also enter 7000 as an extension Messages can be delivered to the new number through normal operation 5 2 9 Interview Service The subscriber can leave a series of prerecorded questions up to 10 for the caller in an Interview Mailbox As the caller answers questions answers are recorded in the mailbox After a caller records the answers the interview mailbox lights a message waiting lamp When retrieving the messages the subscriber only hears the answers to the questions There are 2 ways to access an interview mailbox
276. ist Record the comments and Press 1 Press 2 to accept the comments entered 328 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION The VPS can notify the Message Manager when unplayed messages are waiting in his mailbox Two types of Message Waiting Notification are available Notification by Message Waiting Lamp and Notification by Calling Setting Message Waiting Lamp Status The VPS illuminates the message waiting lamp on the extension when a new message is recorded in the Message Manager s Mailbox Note The extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is the Message Manager s extension However its default extension number 0 cannot be used with the Message Waiting Lamp feature When using this feature you must assign the extension number that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 2 to set Message Waiting Notification 3 Press 1 to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status 4 Press 1 to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status or 2 to accept it Setting Notification by Calling Status The VPS calls the preset telephone or beeper when a new message is recorded in the Message Manager s Mailbox Set the following parameters as appropriate Setting Device Status For each device the notification is enabled or disabled according to a preset schedule The Message Manager cannot enable a
277. l Use System Programs 51 and 52 to set this parameter c If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by user extensions Flexible Ringing Assignment For each outside CO line use System Programs 47 Day Mode and 48 Night Mode to enable ringing on every extension jack that you want to have ring Delayed Ringing Assignment To give users time to answer the call before the VPS picks up we recommend setting the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each extension connected to the VPS Use System Programs 49 Day Mode and 50 Night Mode CO Mode Set the mode for each outside CO line to Normal Use System Programs 51 and 52 to set this parameter 3 3 3 KX TA Series Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager s Extension Note If your PBX is the KX TA 1232 please refer to the procedure described in 3 3 5 KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TA1232 and KX TD308 Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager s Extension or 3 3 6 0816 KX TD1232 and KX TA1232 Programming for Inband Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool for programming 1 Enable System Program 102 for each extension connected to the VPS Jack 07 or jacks 07 and 08 can be assigned for the VPS1 as the Voice Mail port Jack 15 or jacks 15 and 16 can be assigned for the VPS2 This parameter is used to tell the KX TA series which extensions are connected to the VPS Ports with this parameter enabled can receive Follow on ID and
278. l Greeting in Table 40 Greeting Personal Greeting The Guidance for inB3 SYSTEM Recording message instructs the caller how to terminate the call access more features and rerecord the message ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Port Service allows assignment of call services to each port The incoming call service determines which service is used when answering incoming calls These services include Voice Mail Service Automated Attendant Service Interview Service and Custom Service See 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS See B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION PORT TRUNK SERVICE Private Message allows a subscriber and the System Manager to specify a message as Private when sending it to other subscribers the Message Manager and or the System Manager A message specified as Private cannot be transferred It is also possible to specify messages recorded in the Voice Mail Service as Private See Delivering Messages to Specified Mailboxes in C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES See Private Message in Glossary See 3 1 Delivering Messages to Other Subscribers in the Subscriber s Guide Receive Message allows subscribers to access messages left in their mailboxes Three options are available to subscribers Reply to Message Sender permits subscribers to reply to the message sender without specifying the extension Messa
279. l Voice Mail port extensions have this feature enabled to avoid interruption of recording by Executive Override tone or Call Waiting tone 9 Select the appropriate outside CO Line feature settings depending on how your customer plans to use the VPS A to answer all incoming calls B as an operator backup or C to only answer calls not answered by user extensions Recommended outside CO line feature settings a If the VPS is answering all incoming calls Outside CO Line Mode Use System Programs 51 and 52 to set this parameter Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group The KX T123211D will allow incoming CO calls to hunt only if the outside CO lines are DIL to the first port of the hunt group Lines programed as Normal do not hunt 54 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS b If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by the operator Operator Backup Flexible Ringing Assignment For each outside CO line use System Programs 47 Day Mode and 48 Night Mode to enable ringing at the operator s extension jack Delayed Ringing Assignment To give the operator time to answer the call before the VPS picks up we recommend setting the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each extension connected to the VPS Use System Programs 49 Day Mode and 50 Night Mode Outside CO Line Mode Set the mode for each outside CO line to Norma
280. l interface signals Data Terminal Ready DTR output This signal line is turned on by the unit to indicate that it is RS 232C on line Circuit DTR ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the terminal printer It is switched off when the unit is RS 232C off line 42 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS Section 3 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS Installation Manual 43 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 3 1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION 3 1 4 APT DPT Inband Signaling There are 3 types of integration available on the VPS Inband Signaling APT and DPT The VPS used with any other brand of telephone equipment requires inband equipment KX TA624 that can use APT Integration is e KX TA624 Version Y581A or higher KX TD series PBXs that can use DPT Integration are KX TD308 Version P871F or higher KX TD816 Version P3010 or higher e KX TD1232 Version P231U or higher KX TD500 Version Q171A or higher Likewise the KX TA1232 can also use DPT Integration e KX TA1232 Version P831AA or higher all versions Notes e To the VPS the KX TA1232 looks identical to the KX TD1232 Depending on the model and or the software version of the connected PBX you may not be able to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration see 4 1 1 Why Digital Integration is Important For more information call N
281. l the operator X to return to previous menu 1 to dial by name 3 Department Dialing 5 Login 6 Voice Mail Service 7 to restart Subscriber s main menu 8 to call transfer 9 to exit See 5 2 6 Voice Mail See 5 2 10 Automated Attendant See 1 5 Service Access Commands in the Subscriber s Guide Service Mode allows the System Administrator or the System Manager to change the call handling method that is programmed in the Time Service setting Once the Service Mode has been changed it is retained unless the System Manager or System Administrator changes it again even after the power turns off There are 6 Service Modes available Automatic Mode Operates according to the setting in Time Service Manual Day Mode Operates only in Day Mode Manual Night Mode Operates only in Night Mode Manual Lunch Mode Operates only in Lunch Mode Manual Break Mode Operates only in Break Mode PBX Control Mode Operation changes depending on PBX time period APT DPT Integration only See Time Service in this Table See Time Service Service Mode in B6 2 Time Service See C5 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING 220 Installation Manual Table 34 SYSTEM FEATURES FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Special Feature Authorization permits mailbox owners to use the following special features Remote Call Forward to CO D
282. lass of Service Number 1 64 Personal Greeting Length 5 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current length b Type the Personal Greeting length 8 60 s Note The value goes up in increments of 4 s c Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it New Message Retention Time 6 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current time b Type the retention time up to 30 days c Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Installation Manual 307 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE Saved Message Retention Time 7 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current time b Type the retention time up to 30 days or 0 unlimited c Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Message Length 8 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current length b Type the message length 1 6 min or 0 unlimited c Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Number of Messages 9 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current number b Type the number of messages 5 100 c Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Total Message Time 10 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current time b Type the total message time 5 100 min or 0 unlimited c Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Message Retrieval Order 11 a The current setting play
283. lbox Setting Menu Enter The Number 1 Enter the Mailbox number Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Menu 1 Mailbox Setting 2 Notification Setting 3 Remote Call FWD to CO Enter The Number 2 Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Notification Setting 1 1st Device 2 2nd Device 3 3rd Device Enter The Number 144 Installation Manual CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Enter the data using the following table as a guide Table 26 Parameter Value Range Default Description Function Dial Number Up to 32 digits consisting of 1 9 0 X P T M X None Assigns a telephone or beeper number to Device 1 2 or 3 The subscriber can also specify the dial number from his telephone P Pause T Dial Tone Detection M Dial Mode Switching Code Touchtone to Pulse or Pulse to Touchtone X Callback Number Entry Code 1 9 0 X Dial Codes Note The callback number entry code X must be included in the number to be called if the Beeper Callback No Entry Mode is enabled through COS and Type of Device is set to Beeper The proper number of Pauses must be inserted before the callback entry code Important Note When the VPS calls to a CO line via the KX TD500 PRI Card KX TD50290 PRI23 ISDN Primary Rate Access Interface card be sure to add after the telephone number 1112223333 in the example here Example 9P1112223333 PP123PP456PPX Type of Device 1
284. le Enable Note All non touchtone input calls in Automated Attendant Service will be transferred to the General Delivery Mailbox when the Operator Service is disabled Installation Manual 253 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 45 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Operator s 1 5 digits Specifies the extension number for Operator 1 Extension 0 Note 1 The default setting 0 cannot be used with the Message Waiting Notification Lamp feature An extension number must be assigned that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan Note 2 The extension number must not be assigned anywhere else in particular the extension must not have a mailbox Otherwise you will get an error message Operator s 2 5 digits Callers to Operator 1 are prompted to leave a message in Mailbox No 998 this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No Answer Coverage modes are set Operator No 10 60 s When a call to Operator 1 2 or 3 is not answered within Answer Time 30 the time set the VPS will offer other options as defined by the No Answer Coverage Mode Note 1 This timer applies to Operator 1 2 and 3 Note 2 If more than 1 operator is assigned we recommend to reduce the time on the Operator No Answer Time to 15 s Busy Coverage 1 Hold Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 1 Mode 2 No Answer extension is busy Coverage 3 Call Waiting 4 Disconnect Message Hold
285. lephone number 863 2 press 2 864 To forward to the other number press 864 3 865 Enter the destination telephone 865 822 82 number for forwarding 866 Your extension is call forwarded to 866 telephone number telephone number 867 Call forwarding is cancelled 867 868 To set station call forwarding press 6 752 745 652 742 699 868 670 869 To change Remote Call Forwarding 637 636 634 743 628 869 to CO setting press 6 Installation Manual 393 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 870 To change Telephone number 1 press 870 1 To change Telephone number 2 press 2 871 Telephone number 1 is not assigned 871 872 Telephone number 1 is telephone 872 number 873 Telephone number 2 is not assigned 873 874 Telephone number 2 is telephone 874 number 875 Enter the telephone number 875 822 82 876 Telephone number 1 for Remote Call 876 Forward to CO is not assigned 877 Telephone number 1 for Remote Call 877 Forward to CO is telephone number 878 Telephone number 2 for Remote Call 878 Forward to CO is not assigned 879 Telephone number 2 for Remote Call 879 Forward to CO is telephone number 880 Message length is unlimited 880 881 Total message time available per 881 mailbox is unlimited 882 Remote Call Forward
286. lers will know which key to press Note Callers cannot jump between Custom Service menus more than 8 times shown To access the proper menu for Custom Service Parameter follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 4 2 Custom Service No 1 100 Table 49 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Description Up to 32 The information typed in this field is for reference only characters Any ASCII character except can be used None Prompt Mode 1 System Specifies the language of services within Custom 2 User 1 Service 3 User 2 System Note This parameter overrides Incoming Call Service Prompt Menu Repeat 1 3 times Specifies the number of times Custom Service menu Cycle 3 messages will be repeated to the caller 260 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 49 Parameter Value Range Default Description Function Call Transfer Anytime Extn Mbx No Extn Specifies the destination to which the call will be transferred The Extn setting enter E enables callers to be transferred directly to their intended party by dialing the extension number The Mbx setting enter M enables callers to leave messages in a mailbox by entering the mailbox number The No setting enter N disables extension transfer and mailbox transfer only 1 digit entries work following the Custom Service menu Note This
287. livery Mailbox See 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES See 6 2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES See 7 3 1 Mailbox Assignments See 7 3 9 Report See 7 3 10 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear See B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES Mailbox Usage See Section 1 Mailbox Setup in the Subscriber s Guide Message Delivery Internal allows the VPS to automatically deliver a single message to multiple mailboxes See Group Distribution List Personal Group Distribution List System and Message Delivery Status in this Table 212 Installation Manual SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Message Delivery allows a subscriber to check the status of See 3 2 Checking Mailbox Status messages that have been sent The sending Distribution in the Subscriber s subscriber has the option of canceling any of the messages after checking their status If a recorded message has not been received the VPS will voice report the following the message s destination mailbox number and its contents Message delivery status information is automatically deleted after the message has been received by the subscriber or when the subscriber cancels the delivery or when a new message arrives after 84 delivery status messages have been stored in the subscriber s mailbox the oldest status message is always deleted first Guide Message Reception Mode al
288. ll automatically play the factory recorded System prompts in English By default User 1 and User 2 prompts are not recorded Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 40 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Remote Call 1 Yes If set to Yes Remote Call Forwarding can be set to an Forward to CO 2 No outside CO line a subscriber can program either from No a remote location or on site his extension to forward various types of calls to either Telephone No 1 or Telephone No 2 preprogrammed in the Mailbox Setting or to any other telephone number Note The Remote Call FWD to CO feature is available if DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX T series telephone system Important Note With respect to PBX programming it is possible that Call Forward to CO is disabled To enable VPS Remote Call Forwarding the KX TD1232 for example must be programmed properly For the COS of the extensions whose calls are to be forwarded to a CO line enable the following 504 Call Forward to Outside Line Delete 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS requests confirmation from the Message 2 No mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the Confirmation No mailbox If set to No the message is erased immediately Number of 0 30 Specifies the maximum number of Caller IDs which CIDs for Caller 30 subscribers can assign for the Personal Caller Name Name An
289. ll group distribution lists deletes the personal group distribution lists assigned to the mailbox erases the subscriber s name and cancels all external delivery messages To access the proper menu for Deleting a Mailbox follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 2 Mailbox No Resetting a Mailbox Password Follow the procedure below to set the parameters for clearing a mailbox password To access the proper menu for clearing a mailbox password follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 3 Mailbox No Installation Manual 235 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Listing Mailboxes Follow the procedure below to display the mailbox number list To display the list of all mailbox numbers follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 1 4 236 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS The COS Class of Service parameters define the set of services that are available to mailbox owners A maximum of 64 1 64 classes can be specified A class of service number can be assigned for each mailbox More than 1 subscriber can share the same class of service COS number 63 is only available to the Message Manager while COS number 64 is only available to the System Manager The procedure below determines the utilization of the following special featu
290. ller ID numbers can be saved When the saved Caller ID numbers are loaded using LOAD command the following things should be done For System Caller Name Announcement the Message Manager rerecords caller names see Recording System Caller Names in D6 RECORDING MESSAGES For Personal Caller Name Announcement subscribers rerecord caller names see 4 12 Personal Caller Name Announcement in the Subscribers Guide User Prompt files are very large and can take 1 h to save Store saved files in a safe area 158 Installation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Section 7 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Installation Manual 159 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 1 INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM Initializing the system clears all voice data except user prompts and returns all system parameters to their default settings Throughout this section menu selections are indicated as System Administration Top Menu Selection Number This means that the System Administration Top Menu must first be accessed On the first menu displayed make the menu selection corresponding to the first menu displayed Repeat this process for each subsequent menu when additional selection numbers are listed To initialize the system follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 4 1 Go to the System Administration Top Menu 1 Program 2 System Reports 3 Utility Command 4 Syst
291. lows incoming calls to be received by either a subscriber s regular or interview mailbox This mode is effective for 1 Incomplete Call Handling Service when the subscriber s line is busy or he cannot take the call or when he has enabled Call Blocking and 2 when the transfer destination of calls is set to a Logical Extension See Interview Service and Logical Extension All Calls Transfer to Mailbox in this Table See All Calls Transfer to Mailbox in Table 37 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See 4 4 Message Reception Mode in the Subscriber s Guide Message Scan permits the subscriber to scan the first 4 s of each message The subscriber can replay the previous message play the next message or play the entire message See Message Scanning with Information in Table 40 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Scanning Messages in Glossary See 2 1 Receiving Messages in the Subscriber s Guide Installation Manual 213 SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Message Transfer allows the subscriber to transfer messages to other mailboxes after playing The subscriber can also add a personal comment at the beginning of the message to be transferred if desired One or more individual mailboxes can be specified for message transfer Messag
292. lue Range Description Function Default Table Input digit Up to 8 Do not assign more than 1 code to an incoming 1 8 digits signal If this occurs the system will take the first 2 assignment Output consisting of digit 0 9 X A D None 300 Installation Manual SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE Appendix C SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE Installation Manual 301 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C1 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S MAILBOX The System Manager s Mailbox must be accessed before performing any System Manager task To access the System Manager s Mailbox three items of information must be known the telephone number connected directly to the Voice Mail Service the System Manager s Mailbox Number and the Password for that mailbox if assigned The System Manager s Mailbox Number is 99 999 default 9999 or 99999 depending upon the mailbox number length specified in System Programming The System Manager s password is assigned through the System Manager s Service To Access the System Manager s Mailbox 1 Dial the Extension Number connected to the Voice Mail Service Or Dial any VPS Extension Number and Press 6 Service Access Command Please enter your party s mailbox number To enter by name press and 1 If you are using a rotary telephone stay on the line To call the operator press 0 2 Press X then Type the System Manager s Mailbox Number 99 999 9999 or 99999 En
293. ly 1 digit entries work following the Custom Service menu Note This parameter should be set to No when Subscriber Service is specified as a Custom Service option and it is desired that digits can be entered very quickly to specify a mailbox Therefore in most cases No is the best setting for this parameter This is especially true if you do not want to explain Call Transfer Any Time in your Custom Service menu recording Wait for 1 5s Used when the first digit of an extension is also a menu Second Digit 1 choice within the Custom Service If a second digit is not dialed within the specified time the menu choice is used No DTMF a f Used when a caller does not dial anything when hearing Input c the menu usually rotary callers Operation a n Specifies the action to be performed when a keypad Keypad d 0 c digit is dialed Callers can access specific services by Assignment pressing the appropriate keys on their telephones Installation Manual Keypad Assignment Options CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Table 22 Entry Function a Transfer to Mailbox Allows the caller to leave messages in a specific mailbox b Transfer to Extension Transfers the caller to a specific extension c Operator Transfers the caller to the operator d Exit Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and disconnects the caller e Previous Menu Returns the caller to the previous m
294. m system program 2 Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Screen output Jack No gt 3 Enter the jack number Screen output _ _ Stop Rec _ _ the jack number you entered Press the SELECT button AUTO ANSWER until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press the NEXT button SP PHONE Repeat the steps 4 to 6 until all jacks are programmed N Mm 106 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 4 5 5 Live Call Screening Private Hands Free Mode Assignment via Station Programming This program assigns a VPS response for when a message is being left in a mailbox It determines whether an alert tone is sent or whether the recorded message is played through the built in speaker of the extension The default mode is hands free This is a station level program and should be done at each individual telephone PC programming is also available for KX TD500 users see 4 5 6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming 1 Enter Station Programming For KX TA624 With the phone on hook Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM Display changes to PITS PGM Mode For KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PITS PGM Mode 2 Dial the code for the mode you want this telephone to have Hands Free Press 11 for KX TA624 or 71 for KX T series PBX that
295. mailbox 5 2 10 Automated Attendant Automated Attendant service answers incoming calls and waits for the caller to input an extension number It transfers the caller to the appropriate extension Callers can access Automated Attendant Service by Automated Attendant Port This service can be programmed independently of any or all ports of the VPS Callers reaching these ports access Automated Attendant service Service Access Command A caller can switch to Automated Attendant service by dialing 8 during a call Via Custom Service The call transfer service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a Custom Service After pressing this key the caller enters Automated Attendant Service Note When the VPS calls an extension the VPS waits for a reply This waiting time is established by Call Transfer No Answer Time in Table 62 B6 7 Other Parameters 5 2 11 Department Dialing Service Callers can access extensions by pressing a key 1 through 9 one touch dialing As a guide for the caller the Message Manager should record the Department Dialing Menu for example Thank you for calling For overseas travel press 1 For domestic travel press 2 For group travel press 3 This service can be assigned to a keypad digit within Custom Service after pressing this key the caller will hear the Department Dialing Menu Installation Manual 135 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 5 2 12 Operator Service This service when enabl
296. me 133 279 Call transfer status 196 Callback number entry 197 Callback Telephone Number 282 Caller ID call routing 197 Caller ID screening 197 Caller name announcement personal 198 Caller name announcement system 198 Calling abeeper 199 Class of service COS 200 Company greeting 151 200 315 Company name 200 Connections optional expansion memory card KX TVS52 33 Connections PBX 35 Covering extension 201 Custom service 201 D Data loading new or saved data to the VPS LOAD 168 Data saving the system data to the backup device SAVE 155 166 Daylight saving time assignment 201 Delete message confirmation 201 Department dialing 202 Dialing byname 202 Digital integration 20 23 73 DIP switch 18 31 81 87 92 100 Direct mailbox access 202 DPT integration 20 73 203 E Extension group 203 Extension numbering plan 203 External message delivery list 203 External message delivery service 204 External message delivery status 204 F Fax management 205 Flash Memory Expansion Capabilities 21 G Group distribution list personal 205 Group distribution list system 205 H Hardware settings 46 289 Hold 205 Holiday service 206 I Inband Integration 206 Incomplete call handling service 206 Initializing the system 158 Intercom paging 207 Interview service 208 L Live Call Screening 209 LOAD 168 Logical extension 210 M Mailbox 210 Message delivery status 211 Mes
297. menu Note This menu is displayed only when the attribute of the ports is assigned to VPS DPT in step 2 This program tells the KX TD500 which extension ports are connected to the VPS This allows the KX TD500 to send the proper Digital Integration information to these ports Jack No 1 must be assigned because its port is used as the channel to control the VPS C Assign DN for the port click DN Refer to check the available directory numbers Note This program allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port Since each port connected to the VPS provides two extensions this enables you to assign extension numbers to each port To reach the Voice Mail system users dial these extension numbers d Assign Extension Group No for the port Note Specify the extension group number 126 or 127 by default to which VM or AA is assigned Group numbers 1 to 128 are available to the VPS through additional programming Selecting VM has the same effect as selecting AA regardless of how the VPS is programmed e Click Apply to save the changed data f Set Status to INS 88 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX Screen output 1 4 VPS DPT Port Assignment m TvSWo ME gt vPscard 101 DHLC 200 1 E Jack Ho Port Ho DH Group Ho DH Group Ho To set the trunk CO line feature
298. min Omin 0 2 240 min Omin 0 FROM JAN 21 2001 10 20 PM New Cpy Del Exp MSGs 0 0 0 Installation Manual 185 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Drive Specifies the memory card 1 is the MASTER memory card factory provided 2 is the SLAVE memory card FROM The date and time of the last clearing of this report Cpy Copy Transfer Del Deleted Exp Expired and Removed 7 3 8 Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear The Flash Memory Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again To clear the Flash Memory Usage Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 2 2 System Reports System Report Clear Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear May I clear Flash Memory usage report data Y N Type Y yes or N no If Y is entered the system will clear the data Wait until Flash Memory Usage Report Data Cleared appears on the screen before proceeding 7 3 9 Mailbox Usage Report The Mailbox Usage Report provides information about the usage at specific mailbox It includes the number of recorded messages the total amount of outgoing calling time and external message message notification and group message delivery To select the Mailbox Usage Report follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 7 Enter the Range 111 Note Specify the range or the mailbox number To obtain information on speci
299. mmand is only valid when in the ASCH TERMINAL mode 7 2 10 Program Version Display VERS Use the VERS command to display the version numbers of the flash memory and main ROM Type VERS then Press RETURN VERS V P S PROGRAM VERSION MAIN FLASH MEMORY VF21AB 4 00 MAIN ROM VF01AA 2 00 Installation Manual 171 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Note The numbers are examples only Your system will show different numbers 7 23 41 Custom Service Report CREP Use the CREP command to display the Custom Service menu access count the keypad assignments message recording status and the tree structure of the Custom Service Type CREP Press Space Enter the Custom Service number 1 100 and Press RETURN 2 3 Custom 100 System Access 9 Menu Msg None lt multilingual pick gt N Xfer Mbx 998 0 Operator 1 Custom 1 System Access 2 Menu Msg None English service N Operator 0 Operator 1 A A Service 2 V M Service 3 FAX Transfer x Subscriber 2 Custom 2 User 1 Access 2 Menu Msg None French service N Operator 0 Operator 1 A A Service 2 V M Service 3 FAX Transfer x Subscriber 3 Custom 3 User 2 Access 3 Menu Msg None Vietnamese service N Operator 0 Operator 1 A A
300. mode press 2 To set Manual Night mode press 3 To set Manual Lunch mode press 4 To set Manual Break mode press 5 To set PBX Control mode press 6 901 Current service mode is Automatic 901 mode Installation Manual 395 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 902 Current service mode is Manual Day 902 mode 903 Current service mode is Manual 903 Night mode 904 Current service mode is Manual 904 Lunch mode 905 Current service mode is Manual 905 Break mode 906 Current service mode is PBX Control 906 mode 907 To change press 2 612 907 661 908 908 To review press 4 612 907 661 908 909 To change caller ID number press 1 909 To change caller name press 2 To accept press 3 910 All caller ID numbers deleted 910 911 To turn on the prompt press 3 647 750 911 714 680 911 912 The prompt is now turned on 912 913 Enter a message retention time up to 913 30 days or 0 for unlimited days 914 Enter a group number from 1 to 17 914 Linked Prompts List Subscriber Service Table 84 824 You have number 544 There were number of failure 338 new message 809 unsuccessful attempts to enter this mailbox 396 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Receive Message
301. mpt No s No 733 To review press 3 611 657 733 639 603 733 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 691 647 603 733 608 692 693 647 603 733 608 692 693 691 612 660 733 612 660 733 604 734 To rewind press 5 717 725 734 683 670 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 753 698 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 735 To select caller select mode press 1 735 To select without message mode press 2 To select before message recording mode press 3 To select after message recording mode press 4 To disable all entry modes press 5 To accept press 6 736 To send to 1 recipient press 1 736 To send by mailing list press 2 737 To set call transfer status press 1 737 To set up covering extension press 2 To set message reception mode press 3 To set incomplete handling status press 4 738 To set delivery time or make this 738 603 message private press 1 739 To set delivery time press 1 739 For immediate delivery press 2 740 To set dial mode press 6 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 647 603 733 608 692 740 693 691 386 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 741 To set leaving a message status press 7
302. n 2 Leave Message Instructs the caller to leave a message in Operator 1 s mailbox 3 Disconnect Message Disconnects the caller after playing Thank you for calling 4 Next Operator Transfers the caller to Operator 2 Message 1 3 Times Specifies the number of times that the VPS will Repeat Cycle 3 play the Automated Attendant top menu Note In the following cases the caller cannot select He is directed to Operator 1 s mailbox when he is transferred to the operator but the operator does not answer 1 No input to Automated Attendant 2 No input to Custom Service menu when No DTMF Operation is set to C Operator in Table 53 in B5 2 Custom Service 3 No input to Voice Mail service when Rotary Telephone Call Coverage is set to Operator Extension in Table 70 in B6 7 Other Parameters 142 Installation Manual CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES 5 5 1 Mailbox Setting Menu Access the Mailbox Setting Menu through the following sequence System Administration Top Menu Enter The Number 1 Program Enter The Number 1 Mailbox Setting Program Mailbox Setting Menu 1 Enter Edit 2 Delete 3 Password Reset 4 Mailbox Listing 5 5 2 Entering a Mailbox From Mailbox Setting Menu Enter The Number 1 Enter the Mailbox number Program Mailbox Setting Enter Edit Menu 1 Mailbox Setting 2 Notification Setting 3 Remote Call FWD to CO Enter The Number
303. n 1007 1 M Paralle M Unknown 1 M Parallel M IHS E a Unknown 1 M M LL 1 3 Extension Port Assignment M OK Apply Cancel Help 86 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 3 Assignment of VPS card and its model a Go to the 1 4 VPS DPT Port Assignment screen b Select the corresponding equipment number in the TVS No menu c Select TVS80 110 200 1 200 2 in the Type menu Note Depending on the version of the KX TD500 the selection might be TVS200 1 In this case select TVS200 1 to connect the KX TVS80 d Select the card 101 DLC DHLC for jacks 1 8 201 DLC DHLC for jacks 9 12 which connects with the VPS in the VPS Card menu Screen output 1 4 VPS DPT Port Assignment VPSCard Hone Jack Ho Port Ho o c 9 e c 1 I un 4 5 d e 2 p D 3 o 3 gt _ Installation Manual 87 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 4 Assignment of the extension ports connected to the VPS a Continue the programming in the 1 4 VPS DPT Port Assignment screen b Select the extension port number of the card DLC DHLC to which the VPS DPT jack is to be connected in the Port No
304. n 2 INSTALLATION The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing After turning the power on the system starts up in the following sequence The Power Indicator light goes on The Power Indicator light begins to flash Checking Flash Memory Cards is displayed on the screen 94 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX Screen output Checking Flash Memory Cards Please wait PORT TEST SYSTEM SETUP L1 252 34 The VPS tests the CPU card the flash memory and the ports until 1 2 3 is displayed Active ports are displayed on the screen Screen output Active COs 12 ON LINE MODE DPT Interface Connection is Established The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully Screen output Active COs 12 OFF LINE MODE DPT Interface Connection is not Established This message will appear when the DPT connection between the VPS and telephone system cannot be established Possible causes of the message DPT Interface Connection is not Established Table 17 Cause Remedy The PBX is not a correct type Since the VPS is configured to communicate with the default PBX type KX TVS50 with the KX TA series under APT Integration KX TVS80 with the KX TD816 TD1232 TA1232 TD308 under DPT Integration this message
305. n Day Mode 4 Manual 3 Manual Night Mode Operates only in Night Mode Lunch Mode 4 Manual Lunch Mode Operates only in Lunch Mode 5 Manual 5 Manual Break Mode Operates only in Break Mode Break Mode 6 PBX Control Mode Operation changes depending 6 PBX Control on PBX time period Mode Automatic Note Once the Service Mode has been changed it is Mode retained unless the System Manager or System Administrator changes it again even after the power is cut and restored PBX Control Mode is available only if APT DPT Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX TA624 or other KX T series telephone system If PBX Control Mode does not function after it has been selected the VPS will operate in Automatic Mode In Automatic Mode services have this order of priority Holiday Service gt Caller ID Call Routing gt Trunk Service gt Port Service Holiday service has the highest priority In Manual Modes Day Night Lunch or Break services have this order of priority Caller ID Call Routing gt Trunk Service gt Port Service Holiday Service is disregarded Time Service Time Service Time Service is a timer function that selects the desired call handling method based upon time of day Day Night Lunch and Break Services are available Night Service can be assigned within Day Service parameters Night Service starts when Day Service ends and ends when Day Service starts There are 3 periods for Break Servi
306. n Display VERS 171 7 2 11 Custom Service Report CREP 172 7 2 12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear CCLR ii 173 7 2 13 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times MWL sees 173 7 2 14 Setting Minimum Recording Length MRL esee 174 7 2 15 Modified Prompt List MPLT esses enne entente enne 174 7 2 16 Utility Command List HELD ten terr Ser Pn ee ter tH Ee Eee 175 7 217 Quick Setup OSET tee teret eet teri et ie den 176 7 2 18 Circuit Condition Display LMON 176 7 2 19 Touchtone Information Display PUTD eese 176 4732 20 Waittor Caller ID CW CID tete ee eed eg ene dee 178 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS ria 179 7 3 1 Mailbox Assignments ii 180 7 3 2 COS Class of Service Assignments essere eren rennen 180 133 System Service Report eee epe tee reet egent aas 182 7 3 4 Call Account Report eie ili li ae E Henz ies 183 7 3 5 Port Usage eG Eee eee e me E PR 184 13 6 Port Usage Statistics Clear i c erret rhe n eerte eee cesses asd 184 123 1 Flash Memory Usage Report entend rerit P ertet 185 7 3 8 Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear esee 186 1 3 9 Mailbox Usage Report 1 tt eite ia e
307. n Press RETURN WCID WAIT TIME FOR CALLER ID 5 sec 0 60 sec 0 178 Installation Manual SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 SYSTEM REPORTS The System Administrator is able to generate 8 System Reports to monitor VPS operating status The reports can be displayed on a data terminal or printed The terminal or printer must be connected to the RS 232C port The System Manager is also able to output System Reports To select the System Reports Menu follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 1 System Reports System Report Menu Mailbox Assignments COS Assignments System Service Report Call Account Report Port Usage Report Flash Memory Usage Report Mailbox Usage Report 8 Fax Call Report Enter the Number The following 4 reports can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again To clear the following 4 reports follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 2 2 System Reports System Clear Menu 1 Port Usage Statistics Clear 2 Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear 3 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear 4 Fax Call Report Clear Enter the Number Installation Manual 179 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 1 Mailbox Assignments The Mailbox Assignments report provides information about the applied mailbox authorized features and curr
308. n only By default the extension number for the Message Manager s extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is 0 However the default setting cannot be used with this feature When using this feature you must assign the extension number that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan FWD to CO must be enabled in the COS Class of Service setting to be utilized see Remote Call Forward to CO in Table 41 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Assigning the Remote Call Forwarding Set 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 6 to set Remote Call Forwarding 3 Press 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 to select the desired forwarding setting Installation Manual 341 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE 1 FWD All 2 FWD Busy 3 FWD No Answer 4 FWD Busy or No Answer 5 FWD to CO 6 FWD Cancel 4 For the items selected in Step 3 follow these steps For FWD All Go to Step 5 For FWD Busy Go to Step 5 For FWD No Answer Go to Step 5 For FWD Busy or No Answer Go to Step 5 For FWD to CO Go to Step 7 For FWD Cancel Go to Step 10 5 Type the extension number 6 Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Go to Step 11 Note Press 1 to change the extension number Return to Step 5 7 Press 1 or 2 to select Telephone number 1 or Telephone number 2 Go to Step 9 or Press 3 to select another telephone number
309. n output Checking Flash Memory Cards Please wait PORT TEST SYSTEM SETUP 1 2 3 The VPS tests the CPU card the flash memory and the ports until 1 2 3 is displayed Active ports are displayed on the screen Screen output Active COs 12 APT Interface Connection is Established ON LINE MODE The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully Screen output Active COs 12 APT Interface Connection is not Established OFF LINE MODE This message is shown when the digital APT connection between the VPS and telephone system cannot be established Installation Manual 81 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX Possible causes of the message APT Interface Connection is not Established Table 15 Cause Action The PBX is not a correct type Since the VPS is configured to communicate with the default PBX type KX TVS50 with the KX TA series under APT Integration KX TVS80 with the KX TD816 TD1232 TA1232 TD308 under Connect a correct PBX and set the PBX type by using Quick Setup see Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM DPT Integration this message will always appear when connecting to another type of PBX The cabling between the PBX extension ports and the VPS is not 4 wire or is improperly connected Confirm the cabling is connected as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION
310. n several callers hold their calls to the same extension callers are connected in the order in which they originally called See Other Parameters Call Hold in B6 7 Other Parameters Installation Manual 207 SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Holiday Service permits the VPS to record store and play several different holiday greetings Up to 20 Holiday Service settings can be programmed It is possible to either specify a single day or a range of days on which to enable the Holiday Service setting Note Holidays cannot overlap See B6 3 Holiday Setting Inband Integration allows the PBX using Inband Integration to send information to the VPS using Touchtones Inband integration is characterized as Voice Mail Integration and Touchtone Integration Voice Mail Integration works with the Call Forwarding Feature of the PBX to permit a caller to leave a message when the mailbox number of the called extension is not known Touchtone Integration works with the Automated Attendant Service to enable the VPS to immediately recognize the state of the call busy answered ringing etc and improve its call handling performance See Voice Mail in 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible See 2 7 CONNECTIONS See 3 1 1 APT DPT or Inband Signaling See Section 3 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS See Inband Signaling in Glossary
311. nasonic Consumer Electronics Company Division of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America One Panasonic Way Secaucus New Jersey 07094 www panasonic com Copyright Panasonic Sales Company PSC Division of Matsushita Electric of Puerto Rico Inc Ave 65 de Infanter a Km 9 5 San Gabriel Industrial Park Carolina Puerto Rico 00985 This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd KME You may print out this manual solely for internal use with this model Except above you may not reproduce this manual in any form in whole or part without the prior written consent of KME and its licensee 2001 Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Printed in Japan PSQX2569ZA KK0701AH0
312. ne touch dialing For example the top menu could be For English press 1 For French press 2 For Spanish press 3 For German press 4 For Japanese press 5 For Chinese press 6 etc of course selections should be recorded in their respective languages At the next level create menus in each language for Day Mode For example Custom Service Menu 2 the one for English callers might be For departure information press I For arrival information press 2 For reservations press 3 To leave a message press 4 To send a fax press 5 Thus at this level or at an even lower level a caller can be guided in his native tongue to the right person extension the right message taker mailbox or the right device fax machine In parallel create menus in each language for Night Lunch and Break Modes For example Custom Service Menu 16 for Night Mode might be Sorry we are closed for the day Our regular business hours are from 9 am to 5 pm Monday through Friday If you would like to leave a message press 1 now If you would like to send a fax press 2 now Record a similar message for the other languages in each mode Installation Manual 127 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 5 2 2 Custom Service Features Time Service 1 5 2 2 Set each day of the week for the correct Day Night Lunch or Break Mode Intercom Paging 1 5 7 7 This feature is only available with Digital Integration When needed change the paging code fo
313. ng For the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension the extension must have an LCS button lit at the time of the message reception This key must either be a DSS BLF or CO key with a lamp Follow the procedure below to assign an LCS button on an extension This is a station level program and should be done at each individual telephone PC programming is also available for KX TD500 users see 4 5 12 Button Assignment via PC Programming 1 Enter PITS Programming For KX TA624 With the phone on hook Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM Display changes to PITS PGM Mode For KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PITS PGM Mode 2 Press the desired FLEXIBLE CO or DSS BLF button you want to assign as the LCS button 3 Dial 92 Screen output LCS 4 Press STORE 5 For KX TA624 Set the MEMORY switch to SET For KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset 6 Repeat these steps for each telephone 4 5 8 Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment via Station Programming This button assignment allows you to assign a Flexible CO DSS button as a Live Call Screening Cancel button PC programming is also available for KX TD500 users see 4 5 12 Button Assignment via PC Programming 1 Enter PITS Programming For KX TA624 With the phone on hook Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRA
314. ng Button Assignment via Station Programming 110 4 5 10 Two Way Transfer Button Assignment via Station Programming 111 4 5 11 Voice Mail Transfer Button Assignment via Station Programming 112 4 5 12 Button Assignment via PC Programming eee nennen 112 4 5 13 Live Call Screening Activation iii 114 4 5 14 Live Call Screening Password Control eee 115 4 5 15 Two Way Recording into Mailbox e 115 4 5 16 Two Way Transfer into MailbOx i 115 4 5 17 A Restriction on TWR TWT Activation i 115 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Sal STARTING UR meme E 118 5 l l Before Programming eene e eto ier apis 118 5 1 2 Quick Setup ere edere eie pce ee a eee doe i dede eg ds 118 5 1 3 Starting the Quick Setup ertet nhe rit erret etie de eye 119 5 2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS Pind E FUP siste 126 5 2 Custom Service Setting Example sse nennen 126 5 2 2 Custom Service Features vii liner e e aLaaa edere 128 5 2 3 Custom Service Programming eese nnne 129 524 Recording Menus eei tote eh EGRE Sakon alii 132 5 2 5 Checking Operation eie tes E ee UP e REESE ED LU e beds 132 5 2 0 Voice Mall nice Rep ue per de pre eb ee ics 132 2 21 Mailbox Groups e eot ete d te ttd ee 133 5 2 8 Extension Group
315. ning to Messages The Message Manager can monitor the status of the General Delivery Mailbox through his mailbox He can listen to the messages stored in the General Delivery Mailbox and if necessary transfer them to their intended recipients 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 The VPS plays the number of new messages Press 1 to listen to the messages 3 The VPS plays each message identifying the sender and indicating when the message was recorded Press 0 to listen to the entire menu 1 Repeat this Message 1 1 Replay the Previous Message 2 Play the Next Message 3 1 Erase this Message 4 Reply 5 Rewind 6 Fast Forward 7 Transfer 8 Message Scan Transferring Messages Messages left in the General Delivery Mailbox must be transferred to their intended recipients with voice comments attached when necessary When a message has been transferred we recommend that the original be deleted from the General Delivery Mailbox 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 1 to transfer messages from the General Delivery Mailbox Installation Manual 327 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE The VPS plays the first next last message Press 7 to transfer the message Type the destination mailbox number Press 2 to accept the number Press 2 to transfer with comment Note Press 1 to transfer messages without comment Press 3 to add a mailbox number Press 4 to review the Mailing L
316. nnot overlap For example if you have set Dec 22nd to Jan 6th as holidays you cannot set Jan Ist as a holiday To provide a special message to callers on a holiday for example Today is New Year s Day and our office is closed If you wish to record a message please press 1 now you can create a Custom Service menu Use this setting to direct calls to this Custom Service on Jan 1st Use foreign languages where appropriate To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 3 Holiday Setting Enter To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting Enter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 3 1 Holiday No 1 20 Table 57 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Name of Up to 16 characters For reference Any alphanumeric character and Holiday None space and can be used Installation Manual 273 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 57 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Date MM DD MM DD Specifies the day or the range of days on which to or enable Holiday Service setting MM DD pes ee If you want to set a single day as a holiday specify Dey only one date None If you want to set a range of days as holidays specify both the start and the end dates of the range Note Holidays cannot overlap Retain Holiday
317. not jump between Custom Service menus more than 8 times Discuss available options with the customer before programming the system 126 Installation Manual CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Company Greeting Custom Service 100 Main Greeting all ports day Custom 2 Custom 3 Transfer Transfer Extension List Extension List to Service to Orders New Cars Used Cars The top of the tree should include what callers will hear when they are first connected to the VPS Then create a branch for each option until each caller option has been documented Next fill in each box with the action that it represents so you can easily remember what action corresponds to each keystroke Remember that it is possible and often necessary to have 1 custom service lead to another custom service For example if someone presses 1 for sales you might want another menu to say for new car sales press 1 for used car sales press 2 This way callers are routed directly to the person best suited to handle them Sample Custom Service for Foreign Languages If you are an airline or travel agency your callers might not be fluent in English You can easily accommodate several languages with Custom Service For example each key on the keypad there are 12 keys could be assigned to a language Record Custom Service Menu 100 so that the caller can select a language with o
318. nouncement Announcement Personal 1 Yes If set to Yes subscribers can utilize the personal Greeting for 2 No greeting feature for Caller ID CID Yes Caller ID 1 Yes If set to Yes subscribers can utilize the Caller ID Screening 2 No Screening feature Yes Authorization 1 Yes If setto Yes subscribers are able to utilize the Message for Message 2 No Waiting Notification feature The sub parameters to be Notification No set include Beeper Callback No Entry Mode MWL Notification for Unreceived Message and Device Notification for Unreceived Message If set to No sub parameters cannot be assigned Note This parameter in COS No 1 is set to Yes when the Quick Setup procedure is used to create Subscriber Mailboxes Installation Manual 241 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 40 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Beeper 1 Caller Select Permits subscribers to use the Callback Number Entry Callback 2 Without feature No Entry 3 Before Mode 4 After 5 Disable Caller After recording a message the caller is Disable Select asked if the message is urgent If urgent the caller is asked to enter the callback number Without Without recording a message the caller is asked to enter the callback number Before Before recording a message the VPS asks the caller to enter the callback number After After recording a message the VPS asks the caller to e
319. nown by entering the first 3 or 4 letters of ADMINISTRATION the mailbox owner s last name The VPS MAILBOXES identifies all subscribers with that letter combination and states each name for the caller The caller selects the desired subscriber by entering the appropriate number Direct Mailbox allows subscribers to call the VPS and access See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR Access their mailbox without entering the mailbox DIGITAL INTEGRATION APT DPT number See Direct Mailbox Access in Table 40 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Direct Mailbox Access in Glossary 204 Installation Manual SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES DPT Integration is the interface data link that permits certain See Voice Mail in information and command functions to be transmitted between the VPS and PBX The information and command functions include Remote Call Forwarding Set Auto Configuration Caller ID Call Routing Caller Name Announcement System Personal Direct Mailbox Access Intercom Paging Live Call Screening Personal Greeting for Caller ID Time Synchronization with PBX Two Way Record and Two Way Transfer Note Depending on the model and or the software version of the connected PBX you may not be able to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration For more informati
320. ns of the KX T series system that uses Digital Integration that were automatically transmitted to the VPS Auto Configuration Other System The same numbers as those of the extensions entered in step 3 122 Installation Manual CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM The length of mailbox numbers The Message Manager mailbox General Delivery Mailbox might be 2 to 5 digit long 98 998 9998 or 99998 The System Manager mailbox might be 2 to 5 digit long 99 999 9999 or 99999 If both 3 and 4 digit extension numbers exist at the same time the VPS will unify all mailbox numbers to 4 digit length by entering 0 at the end of all 3 digit numbers Example Extension Mailbox Numbers Numbers 201 201 0 202 202 0 203 203 0 2000 2000 2001 2001 2002 2002 The VPS puts 0 at the end of 3 digit numbers Note After creating mailboxes for subscribers by Quick Setup the COS parameter Authorization for Message Notification see Table 40 in SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS for COS number 1 will be set to Yes It will stay No for COS number 2 through number 62 To program mailbox parameters other than the extension numbers and Owner s Last Name or First Name see 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES The caller can use Dial by Name feature using the Owner s Last Name when in Automated Attendant Service or Voice Mail Service Installation Manual 123 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 5 Port
321. nstallation Manual 193 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Table 33 Dimensions x W x D 173 mm x 318 mm x 65 mm 6 13 16 x 12 1 2 x 2 9 16 Approximately 1 2 kg 2 7 Ib Mass Weight 194 Installation Manual SYSTEM FEATURES Appendix A SYSTEM FEATURES Installation Manual 195 SYSTEM FEATURES Al SYSTEM FEATURES The Voice Processing System has many features that are available to the System Administrator the System Manager and or System Subscribers The Table 34 lists and briefly describes each key VPS system feature In addition references to specific sections of this manual and the Subscriber s Guide are provided in the references column that pertains to each feature listed The specific procedure steps required to initiate access or utilize each feature are detailed at these references Note Depending on the model and or the software version of the connected PBX you may not be able to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration For more information call National Parts Center at 1 800 833 9626 Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Alternate Extension Group a group of extensions which require a different call transfer sequence than normal placed into a separate group See Dialing Parameters in 3 2 4 PBX Interface Parameters See Alternate Extension Assignment in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters See Al
322. ntee adequate integration of the VPS with other PBX systems or with Key Systems If the customer does not have a recommended Panasonic PBX system be sure that the system has the features listed below The PBX should have the following features for successful integration Single line tip ring port circuits Some PBXs need an OPX card to provide this connection Station to station touchtone signaling Message Waiting Notification from an SLT single line telephone Screened transfer from an SLT Message Waiting Notification on proprietary multi line sets message waiting lamp accessed by dialing on off codes If the PBX does not have these features VPS operation will be limited See 3 1 4 PBX Requirements for Integration You will find the following information about each feature listed Description Limitations of the system without the feature Tests to determine whether the PBX has the feature VOICE MAIL The recommended Panasonic PBX systems have Follow on ID and Inband Integration When callers are transferred to an extension that is forwarded to Voice Mail Follow on ID sends callers directly to the mailbox Without Follow on ID the caller would have to re enter the mailbox number when connected to Voice Mail Touchtone Integration enables the VPS to recognize the current state of the call and improve its call handling performance When enabled the PBX informs the VPS of the status of the call busy answere
323. nter at 1 800 833 9626 DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Commonly referred to as touchtone External Call Forwarding Available on the KX TD816 the KX TD1232 the KX TA1232 the KX TD308 and the KX TD500 Forwards calls to an extension that has call forwarding activated to an outside phone Installation Manual 401 Glossary External Delivery Message A message intended for automatic delivery to outside parties and or extensions The message can be delivered immediately or at a specified time External Message Delivery List Allows the subscriber to create 2 lists to deliver messages to outside parties Each list can have 8 destinations External Message Delivery Redial Allows the System Administrator to instruct the VPS when making external message deliveries how many attempts to make when the line is busy or when there is no answer Fast Forward Puts the user 4 s ahead in the current message Follow On ID See Called Party ID General Delivery Mailbox When the caller does not dial anything either because he does not want to or he is using a rotary telephone the VPS sends him to the General Delivery Mailbox Periodically daily is best the Message Manager should transfer the contents of the General Delivery Mailbox to the appropriate destinations Hash Sign Same as Pound Sign HELP One of the utility commands that is used to list all utility commands with a brief description of each Immediate Reply All
324. nter the callback number Disable Disables the Callback Number Entry feature Note To utilize this feature the callback number entry code must be included in the subscriber s beeper number When Disable is selected or if the caller does not enter a callback number System Callback No see Table 63 will be displayed on the beeper s display If a caller s number is received through a telephone company s Caller ID service the caller s number will be displayed instead of System Callback No MWL 1 Yes If set to Yes the message waiting lamp will illuminate Notification for 2 No when unplayed messages remain after the subscriber has Unreceived Yes accessed the mailbox for Subscriber Service Message Device 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS calls the appropriate device in Notificationfor 2 No numerical order until all unplayed messages are Unreceived No received Message Authorization 1 Yes If setto Yes subscribers are able to utilize the External for External 2 No Message Delivery feature The sub parameter to be set is Message No Prompt Mode If set to No sub parameter cannot be Delivery assigned Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 40 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Prompt Mode 1 System When an external message is delivered the receiver will 2 User 1 be greeted by the VPS in the specified language 3 User 2 prompt However
325. nto System Program 106 and assign the new Extension Group to Auto Attendant AA Installation Manual 67 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 3 3 6 KX TD816 KX TD1232 and KX TA1232 Programming for Inband Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool 1 Go to the Main Menu Choose System Data Programming BATCH 1 or INTERACTIVE 2 Before choosing Batch Programming you must open a file in the Disk File Management Menu Item 3 Before choosing Interactive Programming you must connect with the system in the DSHS Connect Disconnect menu Main Menu 1 System Data Programming BATCH 2 System Data Programming INTERACTIVE 3 Disk File Management 4 DSHS Management 5 DSHS Connect Disconnect 6 Quit Select the number 2 Choose Station from the System Data Programming Main Menu System Data Programming Main Menu 1 Line 2 Station 3 System 4 Toll Restriction 5 ARS 6 Aux Ports 7 Additional Function 8 Caller ID Select the number 2 3 Choose Station Setting from the Station Menu Station Menu 1 Station Setting 2 COS amp Mailbox ID 3 CO line Outgoing 4 DIL 1 N 5 ISDN Extension Setting 6 SDN Extension CO outgoing 7 Flexible CO Keys 8 Flexible PF Keys 9 DSS 10 Lunch Break Group 11 FWD DND Setting 12 FWD DND Setting OPX Select the number 1 68 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTE
326. o TE a ne e ee 269 3 gt Holiday Setting ata dee ede teret eee ia 273 B6 4 Daylight Saving Time DST enne 275 BOS Prompt S ttng 4 oett eee a Ae det ine 276 B6 6 System Caller Name Announcement ie 278 B6 Other Parametets eic ace Reti beet pei th etn E USER e e 279 B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HARDWARE SETTINGS 291 B7 RS 232CG Parameters oue cere te det ente t re e Ep o dee 291 B72 Port Set mng zone ere oet itle iet ote it 292 B7 3 PBX Interface Parameters eoe d A eet ne s 293 Appendix C SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C1 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S 6 302 C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES eres eeee nete setae tn enne 303 C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE 306 C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK eeeeeeee etes enses tastes tns ceceno nese ee ereonionecnene 313 C5 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING eeeeeeeeee ee serio nionecnene 315 C6 CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING SETTING KX TVS80 ONLY 317 C7 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE SYSTEM REPORTS 318 C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES eese esee ee eene neta stantes sensn setas etse ceci orione ce senses sone tne 320 C9 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM MANAGER S
327. o and from DST at 2 00 AM According to current U S guidelines in most of the United States DST begins at 2 00 AM on the first Sunday in April and ends at 2 00 AM on the last Sunday in October B6 5 Prompt Setting This setting is required when Multilingual Service is enabled To access the proper menu for Prompt Setting follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 5 276 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 59 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default System Prompt 1 9 Assigns a selection number 1 9 to each prompt Callers Selection None use the numbers to select the desired language for their Number message prompts This setting is required when either one T or both of the following parameters are set to Selective User 1 Prompt Selection Number Port Assignment Incoming Call Service Prompt Authorization of External Message Delivery Prompt User 2 Prompt Mode Selection NUDE Example For service in English press 7 For service in French press 8 For service in Chinese press 9 The Message Manager is responsible for recording this Multilingual Selection Menu Note The Prompt Selection Number should not match the first digit of any mailbox number because mailbox extension access is possible during and after the Multilingual Selection Menu Position of 1 Before This parameter setting is functional only when User 1 or
328. o be generated after the System Administrator has completed programming and system prompt gt is displayed on the computer Clearing the Reports The Port Usage Flash Memory Usage Mailbox Usage and Fax Call Reports can be cleared 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 5 for the System Report Menu 3 Press 2 to clear the Flash Memory Usage Reports 3 to clear the Port Usage Reports 4 to clear the Mailbox Usage Reports or 8 to clear the Fax Call Report 4 Press 2 to clear the report To clear the Mailbox Usage Reports Go to Step 5 5 Type the mailbox number of the start of the range Note If a is entered in place of each digit of the mailbox numbers e g for 3 digit mailbox numbers reports for all mailboxes will be cleared and the System Report Menu will appear In this case Step 6 can be skipped 6 Press 1 to specify the mailbox range and Type the mailbox number of the end of the range Press 2 to clear all Mailbox Usage Reports Installation Manual 319 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES The System Manager can deliver the same message to all or specified subscribers mailboxes When delivering a message to specified mailboxes he can check the distribution status of each message Delivering Messages to All Mailboxes Broadcasting Messages The Broadcasting Messages feature allows the System Manager to deliver the same message to all subscribers at the same time
329. ode 415 Night Mode 416 Lunch Mode to set this parameter Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group The KX TA624 will allow incoming outside calls to hunt only if the outside CO lines are DIL to the first port of the hunt group Lines programmed as Normal do not hunt b If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by the operator Operator Backup Flexible Ringing Assignment For each outside CO line use System Programs 408 Day mode 409 Night Mode and 410 Lunch Mode to enable ringing at the operator s extension jack Delayed Ringing Assignment To give the operator time to answer the call before the VPS picks up we recommend setting the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each extension connected to the VPS Use System Programs 411 Day Mode 412 Night Mode and 413 Lunch Mode Outside CO Line Mode Set the mode for each outside CO line to Normal Use System Programs 414 Day Mode 415 Night Mode and 416 Lunch Mode to set this parameter Table 14 2 CO Outside Lines 2 Ports CO Lines Ports 1 1 2 2 1 2 c If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by user extensions Flexible Ringing Assignment For each outside CO line use System Programs 408 Day Mode 409 Night Mode and 410 Lunch Mode to enable ringing on every extension jack that you want to have ring Delayed Ringing Assignment To give users time
330. ommission pursuant to the procedures set forth in Subpart E of Part 68 of the FCC Telephone Equipment Rules Telephone Network and Terminal Equipment compatibility Availability of Telephone Interface Information When requested by the customer the telephone company must provide the following information fechnical information concerning interface parameters fechnical information not specified in FCC rules such as the number of ringers that can be connected to a particular telephone line Changes in Telephone Company Communications Facilities Equipment Operations and Procedures The telephone company may make changes to its communication facilities equipment operations or procedures when such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with FCC rules FCC Telephone Equipment Rules Part 68 The customer shall be given adequate notice in writing when changes will 6 Installation Manual Important Information e render the customer s equipment incompatible with telephone company communications require modification or alteration of customer terminal equipment e materially affect customer terminal equipment use or performance Adequate notice provides the customer with the opportunity to make any necessary alterations in order to maintain uninterrupted service Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to
331. on call National Parts Center at 1 800 833 9626 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible See 1 4 1 General See 1 4 4 DPT Integration See 1 4 5 Connection Example DPT Integration See 2 7 CONNECTIONS See 3 1 1 APT DPT or Inband Signaling See Section 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX See DPT Integration in Glossary Extension Group places several extensions into the same mailbox to share information using an Extension Group List The System Administrator must establish this list The VPS can maintain up to 20 lists with a maximum of 20 entries on each See 5 2 8 Extension Groups See System Group Assignment Extension Group in B6 1 System Group Assignment Extension Numbering Plan permits the VPS to recognize an extension number as valid See Other Parameters Extension Numbering Plan in B6 7 Other Parameters External Message Delivery List allows a subscriber to send a message to outside parties and or extensions with a single operation One subscriber can maintain up to 2 lists with a maximum of 8 entries on each This feature is only available when External Message Delivery has been authorized for the subscriber s COS See External Message Delivery Service in this Table See External Delivery Message External Message Delivery List and External Message Delivery Redial in Glossary See 3 3 Setting
332. on Manual SYSTEM FEATURES Integration Only numbers to the desired extension mailbox System Group Distribution List included or Custom Service The Company Greetings will not play when calls are routed as programmed by this feature Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Callback Number enables the caller to leave a callback number See Notification Setting in Entry in several different ways depending upon B2 SYSTEM which option is programmed into the VPS ADMINISTRATION The VPS can forward the callback number to MAILBOXES a beeper See Beeper Callback No Entry Mode in Tables 40 and 41 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Other Parameters Message Waiting Notification in B6 7 Other Parameters e See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Caller ID Call allows the System Administrator to assign up See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR Routing to 120 Caller ID numbers and program the DIGITAL INTEGRATION APT DPT route for the calls from these assigned e See B53 Caller ID Call Routing Parameters See Caller ID Call Routing in Glossary Caller ID Screening APT DPT Integration Only allows extension users to hear prerecorded caller names when calls from assigned numbers are transferred from the VPS to the extension users See Caller Name Announcement Personal and Caller Name Announcement System in this Table
333. one system Installation Manual 239 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 40 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Direct Mailbox 1 Yes If set to Yes a subscriber is able to directly enter Access 2 No Subscriber Service This is accomplished by calling a Yes VPS extension directly from the subscriber s extension The Subscriber Service Access Code X and mailbox number need not be dialed Password entry may be required if specified beforehand Note The Direct Mailbox Access feature is available if APT DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX TA624 or other KX T series telephone system Intercom 1 9 Specifies the Intercom Paging group number available to Paging Group COS NO 1 9 the subscriber Group 1 9 If set to 9 with the KX TVS50 or 17 with the KX COS NO 10 62 TVS80 the Intercom Paging feature is activated for all Group 1 groups Or 1 17 Note The Intercom Paging feature is available if APT COS NO 1 17 DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic Group 1 17 KX TA624 or other KX T series telephone system COS NO 18 62 Group 1 Prompt Mode 1 System Specifies the language used for voice prompts played for 2 User 1 the subscriber during a Message Waiting Notification 3 User 2 Call and Subscriber Service User 1 Note If User 1 or User 2 is specified as Prompt Mode but not recorded by the Message Manager the VPS wi
334. orward to Mailbox Without this feature the VPS cannot immediately play the greeting when the line is busy or there is no answer and allow the caller to leave a message Installation Manual 47 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 3 2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS 3 2 1 General Guidelines and Definitions Optimal performance of the VPS PBX system relies on proper VPS programming There are 3 categories of hardware settings RS 232C Port Settings and PBX Interface Parameters Entering a number sets some of the parameters while others use sequence codes 3 2 2 RS 232C Settings Baud Rate 300 38400 Specifies the speed at which the data is transferred in bits per second Word Bit Length 7 8 Defines the number of bits in each byte or character Parity N O E Specifies the parity used for error detection Stop Bit Length 1 2 Specifies the number of bits used to signify the end of the byte Default 9600 8 N 1 3 2 3 Port Settings There is no need to change these in a typical installation Only change these parameters when connecting the VPS to a PBX other than a KX T series PBX Each port on the VPS should match the type of signaling the PBX expects If you need to change these settings refer to the PBX manual or customer support office to get the correct values for these settings Flash Time 100 300 600 900 ms The minimum length of time that the PBX requires to recognize a
335. ot Disturb 5 Answer The extension dialed is answered Forwarded to Voice The extension dialed is forwarded to Voice Mail and another 6 Mail Ringing Voice Mail port is able to answer This lets the first Voice Mail port usually an Auto Attendant send the call to the other Voice Mail port 50 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS Table 11 Code Call State Sent to the Voice Mail Port When default Forwarded to Voice The extension dialed is forwarded to Voice Mail and no 7 Mail Busy other Voice Mail ports are available to accept the call This signals the Voice Mail port usually Auto Attendant to let the caller to leave a message 8 Forwarded to Extn The extension dialed is forwarded to another non Voice Mail extension 9 Confirmation Tone The Message Waiting Lamp On or Message Waiting Lamp Off code is dialed successfully Disconnect The caller disconnects The central office must set a CPC 9 signal to the PBX line for this signal to work for outside calls Digit Translation Table Parameters These parameters allow PBXs that have a fixed Follow on ID sequence to be used with the VPS For example a Follow on ID sequence of X X 1001 can be changed to 61001 by using these parameters Inter Digit Time Out This parameter defines the interval of incoming signals Follow on ID from the PBX to the VPS The Digit Translation Ta
336. ows the message receiver to reply to a message without specifying the extension number or the mailbox number of the sender Inband Signaling The Follow On ID or Called Party ID that integrates the VPS and the PBX Uses intercom paths to light message wait light Does not give high end features such as Intercom Paging Direct Mailbox Access Live Call Screening etc 402 Installation Manual Glossary Incomplete Call Handling Service Calls are considered incomplete when there is no answer or if the line is busy There are 6 options for the Incomplete Call Handling Service 1 to record a message from the caller 2 transfer the caller to a covering extension 3 page the mailbox owner via the PBX 4 notify the mailbox owner via beeper 5 transfer the caller to the operator or 6 let the caller try another extension Integration Required between the VPS and the PBX See Inband Signaling APT Integration and DPT Integration Intercept Routing No Answer Transfers an unanswered call to another extension or to the VPS This is a PBX feature Intercom Paging Available with APT DPT Integration only Allows up to 8 with the KX TVS50 or 16 with the KX TV S80 different paging groups An outside party can reach a subscriber who is away from her telephone using either internal or external page groups For a Caller ID caller if her name has been recorded for the Caller Name Announcement feature the name will be announced
337. p follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 2 Trunk Group No 1 48 4 Note The maximum number of trunk CO line groups depends on the VPS model Installation Manual 251 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE BS SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SERVICE SETTINGS B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters The Automated Attendant Service has 3 main functions Department or Speed Dialing Operator s Parameters and Alternate Extension To access the proper menu for Automated Attendant Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 Department Dialing Department Dialing is a speed dialing feature that permits a caller to reach the intended extension by dialing a single digit 1 9 To access the proper menu for Department Dialing follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 1 Table 44 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Department 2 5 digits Specifies the department extension number Dialing No 1 9 None Note 1 The Extension Group List or Logical Extension Numbers cannot be assigned Note 2 The Message Manager must record the Department Dialing menu 252 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Operator s Parameters Use these parameters to specify the operator s operator 1 2 3 extensions and mailboxes as well as how to treat operator seeking calls Operato
338. parameter should be set to No when Subscriber Service is specified as a Custom Service option and it is desired that digits can be entered very quickly to specify a mailbox Therefore in most cases No is the best setting for this parameter This is especially true if you do not want to explain Call Transfer Any Time in your Custom Service menu recording Wait for Second Digit 1 5s 1 Resolves the problem when the first digit of the extension or mailbox number is the same as one of the Custom Service menu choices The VPS waits the specified period of time for a second digit to be dialed If the time period expires without a second digit being entered the system assumes the caller has selected a menu choice Use this parameter only if Call Transfer Anytime is set to Extn or Mbx No DTMF Input Operation a f c See the following Keypad Assignment Specifies how to handle a call when there is no response to the menu message No response usually indicates that the caller is using a rotary phone The factory setting is C Operator which allows the caller to be automatically connected to an operator after message playback Installation Manual 261 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 49 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Keypad a n Any of the 14 services listed below a n can be Assignment d 0 assigned to the 0 through 9 X and ke
339. pe 1 2 Program Class of Service and COS No 1 62 Select an Intercom Paging Group 1 9 with the KX TVS 50 1 17 with the KX TVS80 for this COS If set to Group 9 with the KX TVS50 or Group 17 with the KX TVS80 the Intercom Paging feature is activated for all groups 2 From the System Administration Top Menu type 1 5 7 7 Program System Parameter Setting Others Intercom Paging Parameters Adjust the No Answer Time for Intercom Paging to your preference the default is 5 s For the Intercom Paging Group you selected in Step 1 set the Intercom Paging access code in Paging Code for Group 1 9 with the KX TVS50 or Paging Code for Group 1 17 with the KX TVS80 and Paging Code for All Groups Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Intercom Paging permits callers to page subscribers by PBX See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR APT DPT paging there are different kinds of PBX DIGITAL INTEGRATION See Intercom Paging 1 5 7 7 in 5 2 2 Custom Service Features See Intercom Paging Group in Table 40 in SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Other Parameters Intercom Paging Parameter in B6 7 Other Parameters See Intercom Paging in Glossary Installation Manual 209 SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Interview Service plays a set of recorded questions when a caller accesses the service The caller is provid
340. per menu for External Message Delivery follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 4 Table 64 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Retry Times 0 9 times Specifies the number of times to attempt an external 3 message delivery call when the destination is busy or if there is no answer Busy Delay 1 60 min Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS must wait 3 after a busy condition is received before trying to deliver the message again No Answer 60 120 min Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS is to wait Delay 60 after a no answer condition is received before trying to deliver the message again Outgoing Call Port No Specifies the port numbers used for the External Message Ports 1 2 Delivery feature Message 1 6 min Specifies the allowable message length of external Length 3 delivery messages that the subscriber can record Max Messages 1 100 msgs Specifies the maximum number of external delivery for Mailboxes 3 messages that can be stored in 1 mailbox System 1 9 min Specifies the maximum telephone connect time allowed External 3 for an external message delivery call to prevent excessive Message telephone charges Time begins counting when the Delivery destination number answers the call The VPS terminates Duration Time the call when it exceeds the specified length of time However the VPS does not terminate a call until the whole m
341. peration Indication Meaning FLASH MEMORY STORAGE SPACE IS 80 or more of the Flash Memory voice NOW EXCEEDING message save area is used 80 ASCII TERMINAL program Load Error Error loading of ASCII terminal control program 7 2 7 Saving the System Data to the Backup Device SAVE All system programming data and voice prompts can be saved in separate data files To save this data connect a data terminal to the RS 232C port of the VPS Save the files individually Execute the SAVE command for each data file It will require several minutes to execute this command for all the data selected When performing this operation always wait until the process completion indication appears WARNING Never save back up and upload the Program without Panasonic Technical support The memory required to save each data component is indicated below 1 Program approximately 1 Mbytes See Warning above 2 Parameters approximately 0 4 Mbyte System Configuration 3 System Prompts approximately 5 Mbytes Do not save prompts are saved as defaults in the flash memory Saving items 4 7 below will depend upon the length of the recorded messages 4 User Prompts 1 Modified prompts Modifications to default settings 5 User Prompts 2 Modified prompts Modifications to default settings 6 Custom Service Menus Custom service recordings 7 Personal Greetings Subscriber greetings 8 Company Greetings
342. portant to spend time training the receptionist Making sure that the receptionist understands the system and is capable of answering basic questions will save you time in the end Show the receptionist how to transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages See Appendix D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX 5 1 2 Quick Setup Quick Setup provides a quick way to set the following programming items Each of these must be initially set to start the VPS operation Notes DI SS da WN m Quick Setup requires VT100 emulation software Quick Setup cannot be performed in ASCII mode PBX type Extension numbers of VPS ports Extension numbers for mailboxes Creating mailboxes Port service setting Password setting Date and time setting Activating the Quick Setup 118 Installation Manual CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Depending on your PBX type some steps will be skipped as shown below Table 19 PBX Type Required Procedures KX T308 T616 12 23 4 5 6 7 8 KX T123211D T336 T96 153 54 55 6 7 8 Non Panasonic System 1535455 6 7 8 KX TD816 TD1232 TA1232 TD500 TD308 1 54 55 56 8 Not available in the United States 5 1 3 Starting the Quick Setup The sequence must be followed through to the end to take effect If you press you will have to start over Quick setup may be performed again without erasing prior data Note Depending on PBX ext
343. pts in a row without reviewing the current recording Go to Step 7 6 To change specific prompts a Press 1 b Enter the prompt number you want to change There is a complete list of modifiable prompts inD9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS The VPS plays the prompt number d Press 1 to change the prompt If a prompt has not yet been recorded the VPS plays the system prompt go to Step 6g If you wish to turn off a certain prompt please first record a dummy prompt Then go back to Step 6 and you will be able to turn it off by going through these steps Note Press 2 to return to Step 6b e The VPS plays the current prompt Press 1 to change the prompt Note Press 2 to retain the current recording Return to Step 6b f Press 1 to record a new prompt Note Press 2 to erase the current recording Return to Step 6b Press 3 to turn off on the specified prompt Return to Step 6b g Record a prompt at the tone and Press 1 to end recording h Press 2 to accept the recorded prompt Note Press 1 to review the recorded prompt Press 3 to erase the recorded prompt and try again Return to Step 6f 338 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Press X to erase the recorded prompt and exit Return to Step 6b i Repeat Steps 6b to 6h to record other prompts 7 To change all prompts in a row a Press 2 b Enter the prompt number you want to change There is a complete list of
344. pts through appropriate menus Prompts lead you through the choices and recording process Example Custom Service Greeting Thank you for calling ABC Company If you know your party s extension you may dial it at any time during this message Installation Manual 153 FINAL SETUP Note This prompt should match the prompt that is selected for each port The recording will be played directly after the call is received 6 1 6 Customizing User Prompts Enter 6x998 5 6 The customer may want to enter user prompts in place of the factory provided system prompts To change the user prompts Access the Main Menu of Message Manager s Service Press 5 to modify messages Press 6 to modify the User Prompts Press 1 to change User Prompt 1 or Press 2 to change User Prompt 2 Press 1 to change specified prompts or Press 2 to change all prompts Enter the Prompt Number you want to change 0 Bh WN om Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus Prompts lead you through the choices and recording process Note Prompt 585 The system prompt is This is the General Delivery Mailbox You can record User Prompt 1 or User Prompt 2 as Thank you for calling ABC company We are currently closed however if you leave your name and phone number we will return your call as quickly as possible 154 Installation Manual FINAL SETUP 6 2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES The following st
345. r ID Call Routing Enter follow the menu path System Administration Top Menu 1 4 3 1 Caller ID List No 1 120 Table 50 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Caller ID No P O or Assigns the telephone number to which the VPS applies Up to 20 digits automatic forwarding to a desired destination X consisting of 1 9 substitutes any number wild card For example to 0 X route all calls from Area Code 201 enter 201 None To have a Private call automatically forwarded to desired destination enter P For an Out of Area call enter Description Up to 20 Enters a name and or description of the Caller ID number characters Any ASCII character except can be used None Note When nothing is registered in this parameter but the caller s name is transmitted from the Central Office the name will be automatically registered in this parameter When this is done an asterisk X will appear with the Call Transfer parameter if PUTD is enabled See 7 2 19 Touchtone Information Display PUTD for more information For example you might see this Custom 3 X This indicates the name was automatically registered in the VPS Call Transfer Custom Extn Specifies the destination to which the call from an Mbx assigned Caller ID number is automatically forwarded None The Custom setting enter C forwards callers to the specified Custom Service menu The Extn
346. r deleted from these lists and reviewed as needed To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 1 Mailbox Group Enter To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group Enter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 1 1 Group List No Table 51 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Group 2 5 digits Specifies any vacant mailbox number The caller can List No None specify that the VPS transfers or delivers messages to all members of a group by simply specifying the System Group Distribution List No 266 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 51 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Group Name Up to 16 Specifies a group name If a group name is not required characters press RETURN and specify the mailbox numbers None Any alphanumeric character and space can be used Member 2 5 digits Specifies mailbox numbers belonging to this group 1 20 None Mailbox Group Delete Deletes specified mailboxes from the list To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group Delete follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 1 2 Group List No Mailbox Group Listing Displays all System Group Distribution List numbers To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group Listing follow t
347. r each of the paging groups Example for KX TD1232 All sales telephones have been placed in extension group 3 in system program 602 No hunting type assigned in system program 106 Assign each salesperson s mailbox to a different COS in the VPS and assign the paging group to that COS This tells the VPS which paging group to dial In the Intercom paging section assign the number 333 to the paging group assigned to the sales dept Fax Management 1 5 7 8 Assigns up to 2 fax machines that can be extensions from the PBX If the CNG tone is heard the VPS will automatically forward the call to the first fax machine If the first fax machine is busy or does not answer is out of paper the VPS forwards the call to the second fax machine This also allows to assign an extension as the fax manager to be notified on incoming faxes Disconnect Parameter 1 5 7 9 Determines how many seconds of silence the VPS allows during a caller s message before disconnecting the call RS 232C Settings 1 6 1 Allows the System Administrator to change the baud rate parity bit etc Port Setting 1 6 2 Only to be used when connecting the VPS to a PBX other than a KX T series PBX Use the CPC control of the PBX for normal disconnect problems Dialing Parameters 1 6 3 1 These parameters are set automatically when Quick Setup is conducted Most of the settings will be left unchanged The only setting that will be changed quite often is the T
348. r of times to retry paging when the Paging Retry 2 paging destination is busy or if there is no answer Note This setting applies only when the subscriber has enabled Intercom Paging in Incomplete Call Handling Status Installation Manual 287 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Group 17 33 Table 67 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Paging Code Up to 12 digits Specifies the intercom paging access code required by for Group 1 8 consisting of the PBX KX TVS50 0 9 for each Or group Note The Intercom Paging Group Number available Paging Code Group 1 8 for each subscriber is determined on a COS by COS for Group 1 16 331 338 basis KX TVS80 All Groups Group 9 33x Paging Code Or for All Groups Group 1 16 3301 3316 All Groups Other Parameters Fax Management You can program the VPS to automatically forward incoming fax calls to a fax extension You can specify a maximum of 2 fax extensions as the destination for the Automatic Fax Transfer If the main fax extension is not available to receive a fax the VPS will forward the fax transmission to the alternate fax extension To access the proper menu for Fax Management follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 8 Table 68 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Automatic 1 Disable Enables or disables the Automatic Transfer of
349. r s parameters can be individually set for Day Night Lunch and Break Modes To access the proper menu for Operator s Parameters follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 2 Operator s Parameters Day Mode Operator 1 Use this parameter to enable or disable the Operator Service It specifies Operator 1 s extension and the treatment of the calls transferred to that extension The extension number assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode will be for the Message Manager When Operator service is enabled operator seeking calls first reach Operator 1 s extension Notes Because the extension number assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is for the Message Manager you cannot assign this extension to any other mailbox By default the extension number for the Message Manager s extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is 0 However the default setting cannot be used with the Message Waiting Notification Lamp feature and the Remote Call Forwarding Set feature When using these features You must assign the extension number that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan To access the proper menu for Operator Parameters Day Mode Operator 1 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 2 1 1 Table 45 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Operator 1 Disable Enables or disables the Operator Service feature Service 2 Enab
350. ransfer Sequence for the operator or the extension By default it is set at FX on APT DPT Integration and FTX for Inband Integration In other words the voice processor dials the flash waits for intercom tone and dials the extension number By default the VPS will stay on the line to monitor the status of the call If the extension user answers the voice processor will announce you have a call prior to releasing the call This can be alleviated by adding the letter A or D to the sequence A stands for answer the call will be transferred without the 128 Installation Manual CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM announcement you have a call For a blind or unscreened transfer add the letter D for disconnect 5 2 3 Custom Service Programming After you have finished constructing the tree enter the System Programming Custom Service Settings Menu Access the Custom Service Setting Menu through the following sequence System Administration Top Menu Enter The Number 2 1 Program Enter The Number 4 Service Setting Enter The Number 2 2 Custom Service The system then asks what Custom Service number you want to edit Enter the desired number 1 100 The Custom Service screen is displayed Program Service Setting Custom Service Setting Custom 1 Not recorded 1 Description 2 Prompt Mode System 1 System 2 Userl 3 User2 3 Menu Repeat Cycle 3 1 3 times 4 Call Transfer Anytime Extn
351. ration via the Managers EXtenisIonz eiii ee eb b i o eet grt ep e d EPA ve Ua dep 78 43 KX TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION WITH KX TVS80 84 44 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TA1232 AND KX TD30G eerie eee esent 92 4 4 4 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Manager Extension inni te ee ua n dae det e terae e 92 4 4 2 KX TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Operating and Maintenance TOOl i 97 4 4 3 KX TD308 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Manager s EPIIT 100 4 5 COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES 105 4 5 1 Live Call Screening LCS Programming eee 105 4 5 2 Live Call Screening Password Assignment i 105 4 5 3 Live Call Screening Password Canceling eese 106 4 5 4 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment via System Programming 106 4 5 5 Live Call Screening Private Hands Free Mode Assignment via Station Programming 107 4 5 6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming eee 108 Installation Manual 9 Table of Contents 4 5 7 Live Call Screening Button Assignment via Station Programming 109 4 5 8 Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment via Station Programming 109 4 5 9 Two Way Recordi
352. res on a COS basis Remote Call Forward to CO available for COS numbers 1 63 Delete Message Confirmation available for COS numbers 1 64 Message Waiting Notification available for COS numbers 1 63 External Message Delivery available for COS numbers 1 62 Auto Forwarding available for COS numbers 1 62 To access the proper menu for Class of Service Numbers 1 64 follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 2 COS No 1 64 Note In Tables 40 and 41 sub parameters are underlined These sub parameters can be assigned only when the corresponding authorization parameter is set to Yes Class of Service Setting COS Nos 1 62 for subscribers To access the proper menu for Class of Service Numbers 1 62 for subscribers follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 2 COS No 1 62 Installation Manual 237 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 40 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Personal 8 60sin4s Defines the maximum length of the personal greeting Greeting increments message that can be recorded by the subscriber Length 16 This parameter applies to Personal greeting on No Answer Personal greeting on Busy Personal greeting for After Hours Personal greeting for Caller ID New Message 1 30 days Defines the number of days that an unplayed message Retention Time 5 will remain in the ma
353. rs This improves the VPS integration with the KX T308 or KX T616 by allowing the VPS to discriminate between VPS extensions and non VPS extensions Type S to go to the next screen 3 Extension Numbers for Mailboxes Screen output Quick Setup Enter Extensions for Mailboxes What extensions need a mailbox on this system 1 110 2 111 3 112 4 113 5 114 6 115 7 116 8 117 9 118 10 119 11 120 12 121 13 122 14 123 15 124 16 125 17 126 18 127 19 128 20 129 21 130 22 131 23 132 24 133 25 134 26 135 27 136 28 137 29 138 30 139 Please enter extension numbers P Previous menu N Next menu S Next Screen Enter extension numbers of subscribers who need personal mailboxes the VPS accepts any extension numbers within a 2 to 5 digit range For example to enter the extension number 101 Press 101 and Press ENTER You can also enter multiple extensions Enter the extensions from No 101 to No 110 by Pressing 101 110 and Pressing ENTER The VPS will create mailboxes with the extension numbers entered See Step 4 Note The maximum number of mailboxes depends on the VPS model With the KX TVS50 a maximum of 30 extension numbers can be entered With the KX TVS80 a maximum of 62 extension numbers can be entered Installation Manual 121 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 4 Creating Mailboxes To go to the next screen S or to change the menu P or N the cursor must be in the MBX column Screen output
354. rson who is taking a detailed message for someone else and wants the message recorded in the mailbox at the same time A Restriction on TWR TWT Activation If your PBX is a basic KX TD500 you can have only 8 simultaneous activations of Two Way Recording and Two Way Transfer because the basic KX TD500 supports only 8 three way conferences However if you add the KX TD50104 TSW CONF TSW Conference Expansion Card to your PBX then the PBX supports an additional 64 three way conferences In this case the PBX will not limit the VPS on Two Way conversation recordings Installation Manual 115 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 116 Installation Manual CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Installation Manual 117 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 5 1 STARTING UP 5 1 1 Before Programming 1 Determine the customer s needs Work with the owner manager and receptionist to build the Custom Service Greetings and Holiday Greetings Figure out which ports are to be answered by which greetings Check the software level of the PBX Use System Administration and your computer for the startup sequence After the system becomes on line disconnect the CO lines going into the system until the greetings have been completed Work with the receptionist to record the system greetings These are listed in Appendix D6 RECORDING MESSAGES Itis im
355. s Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times MWL Use the MWL command to specify the number of times the VPS will attempt to turn on the Message Waiting Lamp of the called extension Apply this setting when a PBX other than the Panasonic KX T series telephone system is used MWL Current Setting of M W L Retry Count is 3 Enter M W L Retry Count 1 3 Note This setting is not valid if Message Waiting Lamp for Every Message is set to Yes Installation Manual 173 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 2 14 7 2 15 Setting Minimum Recording Length MRL Use the MRL command to specify the minimum message recording length 0 3 s Messages shorter than the specified minimum recording length are discarded from the mailbox Note The minimum recording length can only be set using this command 1 Type MRL then Press RETURN MRL Current Setting of Minimum Recording Length is 2 Enter Minimum Recording Length 0 3 2 Type the message length Modified Prompt List MPLT Use the MPLT command to display the user prompt recording status recorded not recorded or turned off 1 Type MPLT then Press RETURN MPLT gt both prompts MPLT 1 gt User 1 prompts MPLT 2 gt User 2 prompts MPLT I List of Registered User Prompt 1 No 1 2 914 1 OFF wd 76 Total number of Registered 3 Total number of TURN OFF 2 174
356. s cuu ee S t En DEED Yee Ie Reds 133 3 2 9 Interview Services e ete et eee ai 134 5 2 10 Automated Attendant iei detener ee toe tbe ee se Reate id 135 5 2 11 Department Dialing Service ii 135 2322 12 Operator Services nte edet E ett ete et datas 136 53 SETTING PORTS rA 137 S31 Service nent e er eni eret ieee ne 137 5 4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS 0 csessssssssssesscsscescenessceseseeees 139 5 4 1 Automated Attendant Menu ii 139 54 2 Department Dialing meet et ecc eR e e 139 5453 sOperator s Parameters i GU Ut ite ee E OR iaia 140 5 5 SETTING MAILBOXES urca 143 3 561 Mailbox Settins Menu eet tec ei eret et ite 143 2 3 2 Entering a vere ete e n ere e P ere le ede oo a 143 5 5 3 Deleting Mailbox eene su Re a eee 147 5 5 4 Password Reset ni eoe nre tau 147 55 5 Mailbox Listing SHE EN I ea LIE 148 5 6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER enero en o thoai turista sspe E eR 149 6 FINAL SETUP 6 1 MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX Mailbox 998 ceret 152 6 1 1 Accessing the Message Manager s Mailbox ee 152 6 1 2 Main Menu of Message Manager s Service 152 6 1 3 Company Greetings Enter 6 998 5 1 KX TVS80 153 10 Installation Manual Table of Contents
357. s Press 1 to change the current order LIFO or FIFO b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it 308 Installation Manual SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE Message Scanning with Information 12 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting 13 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Call Waiting on Busy 14 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Message Cancel for Live Call Screening 15 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Direct Mailbox Access 16 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the setting enable or disable b Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Installation Manual 309 SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE Intercom Paging Group Number 17 a The current setting plays Press 1 to change the current number b Type the group number 1 9 with the KX TVS50 or 1 17 with the KX TVS80 c Confirm the entry is correct and Press 2 to accept it Note If set to 9 Group 9 with the KX TVS50 or 17 Group
358. s announced when 1 extension users listen to the messages from assigned numbers left in their mailboxes 2 the VPS transfers calls from assigned numbers to the subscribers Caller ID Screening and 3 the VPS pages the subscribers by intercom Intercom Paging Caller ID Screening is enabled or disabled in the COS Class of Service settings If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both the system and personal caller name announcement the VPS will use the personal caller name See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION See Caller ID Screening in Table 40 inB3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See B6 6 System Caller Name Announcement See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Recording System Caller Names in 06 RECORDING MESSAGES See Caller Name Announcement System Personal in Glossary 200 Installation Manual SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Calling a Beeper allows a subscriber to be notified by a beeper when he has message s If the beeper has a display it is possible to send to it a callback number The callback number can be recorded when a caller leaves a message If the caller does not leave a callback number the System Callback No or the caller s number if it is received through a telephone company s Caller ID service will be sent instead To utilize this featur
359. s follow the instructions in Settings for the trunk CO line features 3 34 KX TD500 Programming for Inband Integration with KX TVS80 in 3 3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T SERIES PBXs Connect the jack assigned in Step 4 to the VPS Connect your laptop computer to the VPS and start your communication software i e HyperTerminal Procomm Plus Smartcom Communication Parameters 9600 8 Bit None 1 Disconnect the power from the VPS and set the DIP Switch to position 5 Only perform this step when initially setting up the system CAUTION Setting the DIP Switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System resulting in a loss of all user programming and voice messages except User 1 and User 2 prompts 9 Plug in and power up the VPS and wait approximately 2 5 min while the system initializes Before starting the VPS make sure all installation and line connections have been done as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION Installation Manual 89 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing After turning the power on the system starts up in the following sequence The Power Indicator light goes on The Power Indicator light begins to flash Checking Flash Memory Cards is displayed on the screen Screen output Checking Flash Memory Cards Please wait PORT TEST
360. s follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 Other Parameters Extension Numbering Plan Specifies the extension numbers of the PBX so that the VPS is able to recognize the dialed extension as valid This setting promotes the call handling of the Automated Attendant Service We recommend that this parameter be set for better integration with the PBX To access the proper menu for Extension Numbering Plan follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 1 Installation Manual 2770 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 61 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Numbering 2 5 digits Specifies the first 1 or 2 digits of the PBX extension Plan consisting numbers You can add up to 16 entries to the list Each entry 1 16 of 0 9 X can contain 2 5 digits 0 9 and a letter X which matches Numbering any digit Extension numbers cannot begin with 0 Plan 1 1 XX Examples Numbering Plan 2 16 None a If valid PBX extension numbers are to be specified 101 through 164 and 201 through 264 specify the numbers as follows 1XX Indicates any 3 digit extension number starting with 1 2XX Indicates any 3 digit extension number starting with 2 b If valid PBX extension numbers are to be specified 400 through 450 and 3300 through 3399 specify the numbers as follows 4XX Indicates any 3 digit extension number starting with 4 33
361. s If set to Yes the VPS adds the message sender s name Scanning with 2 No and the recording date and time to the message during Information No the message scan Play System 1 Yes If set to Yes directions for recording a message are Prompt after 2 No given to the caller immediately after the personal Personal No greeting has been played Greeting The following guidance messages are played To end recording hang up or press I for more features To pause and restart recording press 2 Use Call 1 Yes If set to Yes the VPS signals the busy extension that Waiting 2 No another call is waiting on Busy No Note To use Call Waiting on Busy you must also enable the use of the Call Waiting feature at your PBX Message 1 Yes The Live Call Screening feature permits the subscriber to Cancel for Live 2 No monitor incoming messages as they are being recorded Call Screening Yes or intercept them if desired If the subscriber chooses to speak to the caller if not disabled by the PBX beforehand the VPS will record the two way conversation If set to Yes the VPS will automatically delete this recording The two way conversation may be saved in the mailbox if the PBX allows the conversation to be recorded If set to No the recording will be automatically saved Note The Live Call Screening feature is available if APT DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX TA624 or other KX T series teleph
362. s and can simultaneously answer 2 calls This means that a fully configured 2 port system requires only jack from the PBX KX TD1232 15 Port 1 Extensions 165 and 166 When DPT Integration is activated a single extension jack provides 2 single line interfaces at a Port on the VPS For example when 1 line cord 4 wire is connected to Port 1 on the VPS 2 extensions are provided 26 Installation Manual INSTALLATION Section 2 INSTALLATION Installation Manual 27 INSTALLATION 2 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Please read the following precautions before installing the VPS 2 1 1 Installation The VPS needs to be mounted on a wall Improper placement of the system may result in malfunction noise or discoloration Avoid installing the VPS in the following places in direct sunlight in hot cold or humid places in new areas where there are thermal springs etc where sulfuric gas may damage the equipment or contacts where shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong in dusty places or places where water or oil may come in contact with the unit near high frequency generating devices such as sewing machines elevators or electric welders onor near computers telexes or other office equipment near microwave ovens or air conditioners Ideally the VPS should not be in the room with these items and should be at least 1 8 m 6 feet away from televi
363. s extension number 144 145 Enter the owner s extension number 145 146 Enter the prompt number 146 147 Enter the telephone number and wait 147 To insert a pause or special command enter the partial number and wait for the options menu 148 Enter the time followed by the hash 148 208 sign 148 664 208 149 Enter the time followed by the pound 149 208 sign 149 665 208 150 Enter the total message time available 150 per mailbox Valid entries are from 5 to 100 minutes 151 Enter your party s mailbox number 151 675 151 674 152 Enter your password followed by the 152 hash sign 152 746 153 Enter your password followed by the 153 pound sign 153 747 154 erased 52 154 61 154 155 Extension extension number 155 156 Extension number extension 156 number 157 External delivery message for name 157 815 24 158 External delivery message scheduled 158 379 17 for name 159 External delivery message scheduled 159 17 on date 354 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 160 External delivery message will be 160 sent right away 161 External delivery message will be 161 447 sent to name 162 External message delivery disabled 162 163 Ex
364. s wait dial telephone number 9 is the CO line access number F Hook Flash R Ringback Tone Detection S Silence Detection T Dial Tone Detection W Wait for 1 s 1 9 0 X Dial Codes Other Parameters Message Waiting Notification Controls the handling of message waiting notification calls To access the proper menu for Message Waiting Notification Parameter follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 5 7 3 Table 63 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Outgoing Call Port No Specifies the port numbers used for the Message Waiting Ports 1 2 Notification Device feature The VPS makes outgoing calls using the port specified in this parameter At least 1 port must be specified 282 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 63 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Message Port No Specifies the port numbers used for the Message Waiting Waiting Lamp 1 2 Notification Lamp feature Ports The VPS turns on the Message Waiting Lamp of the extension using the port specified in this parameter At least 1 port must be specified Message 1 No If set to Yes the VPS will turn on the Message Waiting Waiting Lamp 2 Yes Lamp of the extension each time a new message is for Every Yes recorded in the mailbox This will occur even if the Message Message Waiting Lamp was not turned off from
365. sage delivery internal 210 Message management 16 150 Message manager s guide 323 Message manager s mailbox recording company name 151 Message reception mode 211 Messagescan 211 Message transfer 212 Message waiting notification device 212 Message waiting notification lamp 213 Multilingual service 213 N No answer coverage mode 214 O Operator service 214 P Password administration 214 PBX Integration 214 Personal greeting for Caller ID 215 Personal greetings 215 Play system prompt after personal greeting 216 Port service 216 Private message 216 412 INDEX Q Quick setup 116 117 174 R Receive message 216 Remote Call Forwarding Set 217 339 Rotary telephone service 218 RS 232C parameters 289 S SAVE 155 166 Service access commands 218 Service mode 218 313 Special feature authorization 219 Specifications outline 21 Specifications VPS 191 Subscriber service prompt selection 238 System administration 16 System administrator s guide 223 System clock 219 311 System components 17 System management 16 System manager s guide 299 System reports 219 T Time service 220 Time synchronization 220 Troubleshooting 187 Trunk service 220 Twenty four hour time stamp 275 Two Way Recording 220 Two Way Transfer 221 U Unlimited message length 221 Utility commands 221 V Voice mail service 221 Voice prompts 222 413 INDEX 414 INDEX 415 Pa
366. sions Do not obstruct the areas around the PBX and the VPS Both require space above for cooling and space on the sides for maintenance and inspection 28 Installation Manual INSTALLATION 2 1 2 Wiring To assure good quality telephone connection it is recommended new and modifications to existing installation of customer premise wiring shall use solid twisted pair copper conductors with minimum 24 gauge that comply with the electrical specifications for Category 3 wiring as detailed in ANSI EIA TIA 570A Building Wiring Standards Donot wire the telephone cable parallel to an AC power source computer etc If cables are run near those wires shield them with metal tubing or use shielded cables and ground the Shields Use protectors if running cables on the floor Avoid running cables under carpets e Avoid sharing a 120 V AC power supply for computers telexes and other office equipment with the VPS Induction noise from such equipment may interrupt the VPS operation When making any connections or removing the cover be sure the power switch is turned off When installing telephone wiring basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm e Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations e Never touch uninsulat
367. software production date code format Y YMMDD In this example the date code is April 30 1994 year month day For this software version the software production date of the PBX must be April 30 1994 or later If the software production date of the PBX is earlier than 4 30 94 call National Parts Center 1 800 833 9626 to order a software upgrade 2 Enable System Program 80 for each extension connected to the VPS This parameter is used to tell the KX T123211D which extensions are connected to the VPS Ports with this parameter enabled can receive Follow on ID and DTMF call status signaling busy answered disconnect etc if the Voice Mail integration and DTMF integration features are also enabled 3 Enable System Program 81 to turn on DTMF Integration On extensions with the Voice Mail port parameter enabled the KX T123211D can send codes touchtones to indicate call states this increases VPS efficiency Codes apply to all transferred calls outside calls only indicate disconnect provided the KX T123211D is programmed for CPC detection and the Central Office sends the CPC signal Refer to the Table 10 in the Section 3 2 4 PBX Interface Parameters Installation Manual 53 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS Put all extensions connected to the VPS into 1 extension group using System Program 60 Reserve this extension group for these extensions Do not mix other extensions into this group
368. ssages are forwarded to the receiving mailbox and are not retained at the original location COS Nos 63 amp 64 for Managers Installation Manual 243 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE To access the proper menu for Class of Service Numbers 63 amp 64 for Managers follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 2 COS No 63 64 Only the parameters listed below can be assigned for COS numbers 63 and 64 COS number 64 cannot assign the parameters relating to the Message Waiting Notification and the Remote Call Forward to CO features Table 41 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default New Message 1 30days Defines the number of days that an unplayed message can Retention Time 30 remain in the mailbox The storage period begins the day after the massage reception Saved Message 1 30 days Defines the number of days a played saved message will Retention Time 0 Unlimited remain in the mailbox The timing is refreshed whenever 30 the message is played back If 0 Unlimited is selected saved messages will remain in the mailbox until erased by the mailbox owner Message 1 6 min Defines the maximum message length Length 0 Unlimited 6 If set to 0 Unlimited a manager can record two way conversations of unlimited length into his or another person s mailbox Two Way Recording or Two Way Transfer The maximum recording time for other messag
369. stallation Manual INSTALLATION 2 5 INSTALLATION STEPS The following is an overview of the standard installation process using Digital Integration When necessary other sections in this manual have been referenced for more detailed descriptions or instructions 1 Obtain a list of current users their extension numbers their departments and the type of systems they use mailbox no mailbox beeper car phone etc Assess your customers needs before setting up the system You will save yourself time later by giving customers what they need up front Ask the office manager how the VPS will be used Give examples Recommend that your customer use a word processor to log the greetings You will find these files much more easily than the worksheet pages if you need to make changes down the road Connect the power cord to the VPS CAUTION The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the socket outlet is located installed near the equipment and is easily accessible 4 Standard Initialization For Digital Integration Connection a Program the ports of the PBX for voice processing see Section 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX Program the KX TA624 the KX TD1232 the KX TA1232 the KX TD816 the KX TD308 or KX TD500 for Voice Mail integration KX TA624 e KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TA1232 KX TD308 KX TD500 Program may be performed on site
370. system according to the needs of your customer You should be familiar with all options for port assignment so that customers get exactly what they need and expect Each port can be assigned as Voice Mail Interview Service Automated Attendant or Custom Service Custom Service is the most flexible of all the services because it allows access to the other services by pressing one key We recommend programming all ports as Custom Service for caller convenience 5 2 1 Custom Service Setting Example Custom Service incorporates all features of the Automated Attendant and Voice Mail Custom Service offers callers a menu of single digits that they may use to reach the desired location quickly and easily Sample Company Greeting 1 Thank you for calling ABC company Company greeting should be short Note Company Greeting is only available with the KX TVS80 Sample Custom Service Message If you know the extension number of the person you are calling you can dial it at any time For a list of extensions Press 1 to reach the sales section Press 2 to reach the service section Press 3 if you would like to place an order Press 4 all other callers please wait and an operator will be right with you Sample Custom Service Tree Create a tree to design a route that leads callers to the desired extension mailbox or next menu This tree should include all available caller options and cannot be deeper than 8 layers Moreover callers can
371. t the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM Display changes to PITS PGM Mode For KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration a With the phone on hook Press the PROGRAM button b Dial 99 Display changes to PITS PGM Mode Press the desired FLEXIBLE CO or DSS BLF button that you want to assign as the TWT button Dial 91 Screen output 2Way Trans Dial the Voice Mail extension number Screen output 2Way Trans __ _ ___ The extension number you entered Press STORE For KX TA624 Set the MEMORY switch to SET For KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset Repeat these steps for each telephone Conditions This button must be a CO or DSS BLF key to be programmed as a TWT button When all Voice Mail ports are busy and this key is pressed the user will hear reorder tone Installation Manual 111 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 4 5 11 Voice Mail Transfer Button Assignment via Station Programming This feature allows an extension user to transfer calls directly to a Voice Mailbox This is available with both Digital and Inband Integrations PC programming is also available for KX TD500 users see 4 5 12 Button Assignment via PC Programming 1 Enter PITS Programming For KX TA624 With the phone on hook Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM Display changes to PITS PGM Mode For KX T series PBX that uses DP
372. tallation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE To program the following 10 Parameters in the next table use the Special Commands and Dial Codes listed below You can set up to 12 digits for each parameter D Disconnecting F Hook Flash R Ringback Tone Detection S Silence Detection T Dial Tone Detection W Wait for 1 s X Extension dialing A Answer 1 9 0 X ft Dial Codes Table 75 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Operator The VPS performs this sequence when transferring calls Transfer FX to the operator s extension Sequence Extension The VPS performs this sequence when transferring calls Transfer FX to any extension except the operator s Sequence Alternate The VPS performs this sequence when transferring calls Extension to extensions in the Alternate Extension Group FX Transfer Sequence Reconnect If an extension is busy this sequence allows the VPS to Sequence on F reconnect to the caller Busy Reconnect If the extension does not answer this sequence allows the Sequence on F VPS to reconnect with the caller No Answer Reconnect The VPS performs this sequence to retrieve a call placed Sequence on F on hold after the extension in the Call Screening mode Refuse Call has refused to accept it Light On This is the dialing sequence that the VPS must perform to Sequence for enable the Message Waiting Lamp at an extension None Message Waitin
373. tch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System resulting in a loss of all user programming and voice messages except User 1 and User 2 prompts 9 Plug in and power up the VPS and wait approximately 2 5 min while the system initializes Before starting the VPS make sure all installation and line connections have been done as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing After turning the power on the system starts up in the following sequence The Power Indicator light goes on The Power Indicator light begins to flash Checking Flash Memory Cards is displayed on the screen Screen output Checking Flash Memory Cards Please wait PORT TEST SYSTEM SETUP Wi 22 3 The VPS tests the CPU card the flash memory and the ports until 1 2 3 is displayed Active ports are displayed on the screen Screen output Active COs 12 DPT Interface Connection is Established ON LINE MODE 102 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully Screen output Active COs 12 OFF LINE MODE DPT Interface Connection is not Established This message will appear when the DPT connection between the VPS and telephone system cannot be established Possible
374. tection v Continuous Signal Detection v Silence Detection 3 1 Trunk Group M Apply Cancel Help E Incoming Defautt Defautt Installation Manual 63 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS c Assignment of IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer timer 1 Go to the 2 4 System Timer 1 2 screen 2 Assign Intercept Time parameter 3 Click Apply to save the changed data Note This parameter tells the KX TD500 how long to let a call ring at an extension before forwarding redirecting Screen output 2 4 System Timer 1 2 mje Ez Hold Recall Time 0 240 s Call Forwarding Ho Answer Time 1 12 rings s ring s Transfer Recall Time 0 48 rings Extension to CO line Call Duration Time h2 ring s ora min Pickup Dial Waiting Time 1 5 s CO to CO Line Call Duration Time 1 64 min h je min Call Duration Count Start Time 0 60 s B m Inter digit Time 1 30 s Door Opener Timer 0 10 s B Intercept Time 1 48 rings m ring s ox cone First Digit Time 5 120 s 64 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS Recommended Settings 3 If the VPS is only answering incoming outside calls not answered by user extensions a Assignment of DIL 1 1 line 1 Go to the 4 1 Trunk Line screen 2 Assign Destination Day Night Lunch Break for each trunk CO line to a specific extension number
375. ter your password followed by 3 Type the Password followed by 4 The Main Menu of System Manager s Service will be played You have number new message s To receive the message press 1 To deliver a message press 2 To customize your mailbox press 3 To check the mailbox distribution press 4 For a system report press 5 For other features press 6 To end this call press X 302 Installation Manual SYSTEM MANAGER S GUIDE C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES The System Manager s primary function is to create mailboxes for new subscribers and to maintain system organization by deleting unneeded passwords and mailboxes Note While the System Administrator programs via a computer the System Manager cannot set up mailboxes The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available Creating and Editing a Mailbox The System Manager can both create and edit Subscriber Mailboxes by following the steps below At any step when editing an assigned mailbox s parameters change current settings by Pressing 1 To leave the current setting unchanged Press 2 When creating a new mailbox the following parameters can be set Mailbox Number e Subscriber s Voiced Name The VPS allows a maximum of 4 s to record the name The name must be spoken slowly and clearly Use the subscriber s last name e Extension Number Initial 3 or 4 Letters of the Subscriber s Last Name Enter only
376. ternal message delivery enabled 163 164 FAX messages 824 164 165 FEBRUARY 165 166 FIFTEEN 166 167 FIFTEEN HOUR 167 168 FIFTEEN MINUTE 168 169 FIFTEENTH 169 170 FIFTH 170 171 FIFTY 171 172 FIFTY MINUTE 172 173 FIFTY EIGHT 173 174 FIFTY EIGHT MINUTE 174 175 FIFTY FIVE 175 176 FIFTY FIVE MINUTE 176 177 FIFTY FOUR 177 178 FIFTY FOUR MINUTE 178 179 FIFTY NINE 179 180 FIFTY NINE MINUTE 180 181 FIFTY ONE 181 182 FIFTY ONE MINUTE 182 183 FIFTY SEVEN 183 184 FIFTY SEVEN MINUTE 184 185 FIFTY SIX 185 186 FIFTY SIX MINUTE 186 187 FIFTY THREE 187 188 FIFTY THREE MINUTE 188 Installation Manual 355 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 189 FIFTY TWO 189 190 FIFTY TWO MINUTE 190 191 FIRST 191 192 First telephone number is telephone 192 number 193 First telephone number is not 193 assigned 194 FIVE 194 195 FIVE HOUR 195 196 FIVE MINUTE OWE FIVE 196 197 for 197 323 17 197 259 323 17 197 258 318 17 197 259 198 For Q press 7 132 198 199 199 For Z press 9 132 198 199 200 For a system report press 5 711 663 652 649 200 212 670 201 For automated attendant status press 711 663 648 201 210 212 670 4 711
377. ternate Extension Group in Glossary APT Integration is the interface data link that permits certain information and command functions to be sent to the VPS from the PBX The information and command functions include Auto Configuration Caller ID Call Routing Caller Name Announcement System Personal Direct Mailbox Access Intercom paging Live Call Screening Personal Greeting for Caller ID Two Way Recording Two Way Transfer See VOICE MAIL in 1 3 3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible See 1 4 1 General See 1 4 2 APT Integration See 1 4 3 Connection Example APT Integration See 2 7 CONNECTIONS See 3 1 1 APT DPT or Inband Signaling See INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX See APT Integration in Glossary 196 Installation Manual Table 34 SYSTEM FEATURES FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Auto Configuration APT DPT Integration Only creates mailboxes by obtaining extension numbers from the Panasonic KX TA624 or other KX T series telephone system that uses DPT Integration Also sets the time and date automatically by obtaining time information from the PBX See System Components in 1 3 2 System Components See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION See Creating Mailboxes in 5 1 3 Starting the Quick Setup See The length of mailbox numbers in 5 1 3 Starting the Quick Setup See Auto Configur
378. terview mailbox set the message reception mode set incomplete call handling status set call transfer status enter Personal Group Distribution Lists set the message waiting lamp and set notification by calling 18 Installation Manual VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 13 SYSTEM BASICS 1 3 1 General The KX TVS50 is initially configured with 2 ports and 2 h of storage the KX TVS80 is initially configured with 2 ports and 6 h of storage 1 3 2 System Components Main Cabinet RSL NSCS SEG FAG SM N Panasonic AC Inlet MODE DIP Switch Port 1 Port 2 Ferrite Core Ground Terminal RS 232C Power Indicator Note EIA port is at SELV Inside View of the Main Cabinet KX TVS50 Memory Card E S Connector KX TVS80 Memory Card Position for Optional Expansion Memory Card Installation Manual 19 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW System Components AC Inlet Connects the power cable to an AC outlet dedicated to the VPS Power Indicator Indicates the system status when flashing the system is off line not ready to receive calls MODE DIP Switch Check the status of this switch only at start up Provides the following additional functions Table 1 Position Additional Function 0 E Normal setting All switches in 0 position o
379. the next press 2 659 708 Installation Manual 383 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 709 To play the previous schedule press 4 728 707 719 709 707 719 709 710 To reach the covering extension press 710 2 711 To receive the message press 1 268 711 690 268 711 690 275 711 663 648 201 210 212 670 711 663 648 201 210 670 711 663 652 649 200 212 670 712 To record a message for external 712 delivery press 1 To check external delivery message status press 2 To set up mailing list press 3 713 To record a message press 1 713 To add new mailbox number press 2 To review the mailing list press 3 714 To record a new prompt press 1 714 680 757 714 680 911 715 To record the question press 1 715 To set the answer length press 2 To erase the question press 3 716 To record press 1 716 To erase press 2 717 To repeat this message press 1 717 725 670 717 725 734 683 670 717 706 679 726 753 208 717 724 706 679 726 734 683 753 698 717 706 679 753 208 717 724 706 679 734 683 753 698 718 To repeat this name press 3 602 213 718 671 719 To repeat this schedule press 3 728 707 719 709
380. this unit are listed on the product label This unit is equipped with a 3 wire grounding plug The plug will only fit into a grounded power outlet Do not modify this plug in any way If it cannot be inserted into the outlet have the outlet replaced by a licensed electrician Unplug and transport the unit to a service technician if the power supply cord is frayed or damaged if the cabinet is cracked or broken or when the unit has been exposed to moisture has been dropped or is not otherwise operating properly Unplug the unit from its power source before cleaning Do not block the vent slots and openings located on the front and top of the unit Do not disassemble this product Dangerous electrical shock could result The unit must only be disassembled and repaired by qualified Panasonic Factory Service Technicians Do not insert wires pins or any other material into the unit s vent slots or access points This could result in electrical shock and serious unit malfunction Do not install the unit near water or moisture heating appliances or electrical noise generating devices such as televisions monitors fluorescent lamps or electric motors Do not overload wall outlets Overloaded outlets could result in fire and or electrical shock Do not use solvents liquid cleaners water or abrasive powders to clean this unit Use only a damp soft cloth for cleaning Do not use the telephone during a lightning storm or to report a gas le
381. those devices ring when your telephone number is called In most but not all areas the sum of the REN s of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your line as determined by the REN you should contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area CAUTION Any change or modification made to the terminal equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment When programming and or making test calls to emergency numbers Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call Perform these tests during off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Installation Manual 7 Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO eereeeee enses 16 1 1 1 Why Voice Processing P iva ett ee e ei eee 16 L1 2 Basic Operations tette e Oe e OP Le ei eae 16 8 WPS Limitations ia cene eee ecrire eene ei eoe oes conden thd gece as 17 1 2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MANAGEMENT AND 18 1 2 1 System Administration eee Htec rer eer rte etes 18 1 2 2 System Management sic tose ede Rete e a a te Eo LL ue tace eats 18 1 23 Subscriber Use ire eee e erbe tet ote eb ete be ette 18 L3 SYSTEM BASICS onora 19
382. to CO disabled 882 883 Remote Call Forward to CO enabled 883 884 Delete message confirmation 884 disabled 885 Delete message confirmation enabled 885 886 To set up mailbox press 1 886 To set class of service press 2 To set the clock press 3 To change service mode setting press 4 To change company greeting setting press 5 394 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 887 To set up mailbox press 1 887 To set class of service press 2 To set the clock press 3 To change service mode setting press 4 888 For port setting press 1 888 For trunk setting press 2 889 Enter the port number 889 890 890 from 1 to number 889 ie 892 890 891 Port number is number 891 892 Enter the trunk group number 892 890 893 Trunk group number is number 893 894 For Day time press 1 894 For Night time press 2 For Lunch time press 3 For Break time press 4 895 Current company greeting setting is 895 number number 896 Current company greeting setting is 896 System Greeting 897 Current company greeting setting is 897 disabled 898 To change company greeting number 898 press 1 To set system greeting press 2 To disable press 3 890 If you really want to erase press 1 899 If not press 2 900 To set Automatic mode press 1 900 To set Manual Day
383. to request a live operator by pressing 0 on the telephone keypad Up to 3 operators can be specified to receive calls in the Day Night Lunch and Break Modes See 5 4 3 Operator s Parameters See Operator s Parameters in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters See Operator s Extensions in D4 CUSTOMIZING THE an integrated unit Three integration options are available Inband Integration APT Integration and DPT Integration MESSAGE MANAGER S MAILBOX Password allows the System Administrator or System See5 5 4 Password Reset Administration Manager to clear a subscriber password so See Deleting a Mailbox that a new one can be assigned Password in C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES PBX Integration allows the VPS and PBX to work together as e See2 7 CONNECTIONS See Section 3 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS See Section 4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 216 Installation Manual SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Personal Greeting _ permits subscribers to record up to 4 personal See 4 1 GUIDELINES FOR for Caller ID greetings for calls from pre assigned Caller DIGITAL INTEGRATION APT DPT ID numbers Each greeting supports up to8 See Personal Greeting Length Integration Only caller ID numbers This feature can be enabled or disabled in the COS Class of Service settings and
384. touchtone call status Signaling busy answered disconnect etc if the Voice Mail integration and Touchtone Integration features are also enabled 2 Enable System Program 103 to turn on Touchtone Integration On extensions with the Voice Mail port parameter enabled the KX TA series can send codes touchtones to indicate call states this increases VPS efficiency Codes apply to all transferred calls outside calls only indicate disconnect provided the KX TA series is programmed for CPC Detection and the Central Office sends the CPC signal Refer to the Table 10 in Section 3 24 PBX Interface Parameters Installation Manual 55 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 3 Put all extensions connected to the VPS into 1 extension group using System Program 600 Reserve this extension group for these extensions Do not mix other extensions into this group Note Up to two VPS units can be connected to the KX TA624 When two VPS units are connected to the KX TA624 2 different extension groups should be assigned for each VPS in System Program 600 One extension group is for jack 07 or jacks 07 and 08 of the KX TA624 The other extension group is for jack 15 or jacks 15 and 16 4 Enable hunting for the VPS extension groups using System Program 100 5 Set the hunting type for the VPS extension groups to circular using System Program 101 6 Atevery VPS extension temporarily connect an SLT or butt set go
385. tructions below to record Custom Service prompts and user prompts Note The Message Manager s mailbox might be 98 998 9998 or 99998 6 1 1 Accessing the Message Manager s Mailbox 1 Enter an Extension Number that is connected to Voice Mail You will hear the initial prompt Good morning Good afternoon Good evening Welcome to the Voice Processing System 2 Press 6X9 9 8 to access the Message Manager s mailbox You will hear the following prompt if mailbox 998 has a password set Enter your password followed by a pound sign 3 Enter the Message Manager s Password if programmed Otherwise you will hear the Main Menu of Message Manager s Service 6 1 2 Main Menu of Message Manager s Service You have number new message s To transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages press 1 To set up message waiting notification press 2 To customize your mailbox press 3 To set the clock press 4 To modify message press 5 To set station call forwarding press 6 To end this call press X 152 Installation Manual FINAL SETUP 6 1 3 Company Greetings Enter 6x998 5 1 KX TVS80 only Access the Message Manager s Main Command Menu Press 5 to modify messages Press 1 to change the Company Greeting C b Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus Prompts lead you through the choices and recording process A
386. u 1 Day Mode 2 Night Mode 3 Lunch Mode 4 Break Mode SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY 1 Operator 1 2 Operator 2 3 Operator 3 SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY Enter the data using the table below as a guide The table below is for Operator 1 as an example Please refer to it for Operators 2 and 3 Table 24 Description Value Range Description Function Default Operator 1 Disable Enables or disables the Operator Service feature Service 2 Enable Note Enable All non touchtone input calls in Automated Attendant Service will be transferred to the General Delivery Mailbox when the Operator Service is disabled 140 Installation Manual CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Table 24 Description Value Range Default Description Function Operator s Extension 1 5 Digits 0 Specifies the extension number for Operator 1 Notes The default setting 0 cannot be used with the Message Waiting Notification Lamp feature and the Remote Call Forwarding Set feature When using these features you must assign the extension number that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan The extension number must not be assigned anywhere else in particular the extension must not have a mailbox Otherwise you will get an error message Operator s Mailbox No 2 5 Digits 998 Callers to Operator 1 are prompted to leave a message in this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No
387. umber in System User 1 User 2 Prompt Selection Number in Table 59 in B6 5 Prompt Setting Note f Selective is specified you will need to select a prompt available for rotary callers See Prompt for Rotary Callers below Prompt for 1 System Specifies which language System User 1 User 2 a Rotary Callers 2 User 1 rotary caller or an External Delivery Message receiver 3 User 2 hears when he cannot enter any digit Prompt Selection Number after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been System played Delayed 0 60 s Specifies whether the port answers immediately 0 or in Answer Time 0 delay 1 60 s 138 Installation Manual CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM 5 4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS Automated Attendant parameters include Department Dialing Operator Parameters and Alternate Extension If the VPS needs a special transfer procedure for an extension such as modem extension alternate extension should be assigned see Alternate Extension Assignment in B5 1 Automated Attendant Parameters 5 4 1 Automated Attendant Menu Access the Automated Attendant Menu through the following sequence System Administration Top Menu Enter The Number 1 Program Enter The Number 4 Service Setting Enter The Number 1 Automated Attendant Program Service Setting Auto Attn Setting Menu 1 Department Dialing 2 Operator s Parameters 3 Alternate Extension 5 4 2 Department Dialing
388. up an External Message Delivery List in the Subscriber s Guide Installation Manual 205 SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES External Message Delivery Service allows a subscriber to send a message to several subscribers and non subscribers including outside parties at a specified time or immediately This feature also permits the receiver to reply to the message without having to specify the mailbox number If the sender wishes he can require the receiver to enter a 4 digit password to receive the sender s message If the receiver enters the password incorrectly 3 times the VPS 1 plays the Company Name if it has been recorded provided that your VPS model is the KX TVS80 2 plays the Callback Telephone Number if registered and 3 plays the sender s extension if both the Callback Telephone Number and the Extension of the Owner have been registered With this information the receiver can possibly track down the message even if he does not remember the password COS programming determines whether this feature can be used or not See The Extension of the Owner in Table 37 in B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAILBOXES See Authorization for External Message Delivery in Table 40 inB3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See Other Parameters External Message Delivery in B6 7 Other Parameters See C3 SETTING CO
389. used in the Dial Number above The subscriber can also specify the type of device from his telephone Use Mode Not Use 2 Continuously 3 Scheduled Continuously Specifies how Device 1 2 or 3 is to be used The subscriber can also specify the use mode from his telephone Not Use Device 1 2 or 3 is not used for a notification call 2 Continuously Device 1 2 or 3 is called whenever a message is recorded in the mailbox 3 Scheduled Device 1 2 or 3 is called on a schedule basis when a message has been left in the mailbox Installation Manual 233 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Table 38 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default No of Retries 0 9 times Specifies the number of times that a notification call to 0 Device 1 2 or 3 should be attempted after a busy or no answer condition is received Busy Delay 0 120 min Specifies the time in minutes the VPS must wait after Time 3 a busy condition is received before making another notification call to Device 1 2 or 3 No Answer 60 120 min Specifies the time in minutes the VPS must wait after Delay Time 60 a no answer condition is received before making another notification call to Device 1 2 or 3 Time Frame 1 2 1 12 h Specifies the daily schedule for the Message Waiting MON 00 59 min Notification service for 1 week for this device TUE AM PM WED FRE Note These parameters are a
390. uses DPT Integration Private Press 12 for KX TA624 or 72 for KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration Screen output Hands Free or Private 3 Press STORE 4 For KX TA624 Set the MEMORY switch to SET For KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset 5 Repeat these steps for each telephone Conditions None For the KX T series PBX that uses DPT Integration A single line telephone that is connected to the same extension as a proprietary telephone can also be used to monitor an incoming message Be sure that Live Call Screening on the connected proprietary telephone has been activated This feature is useful when you are using a cordless telephone The handset sounds an alert tone to let you know that a message is being recorded To intercept the call flash the hook Installation Manual 107 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 4 5 6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming The KX TD500 users can program Live Call Screening features via PC programming Follow the procedure below to assign each feature 1 Go to 4 2 Extension Line screen Screen output 4 2 Extension Line Ms E3 Hame Max 10 Characters Mailbox Ho Max 16 Digits CO Key PE Key Initial Display Selection COS Ho Caller ID M Primary Secondary 1 M Preferred Line Pickup Dialing Dial Mode Outgoing Prime Line ICM PDH Key
391. ve the Contact National Parts Center proper software level to support APT DPT at 1 800 833 9626 Integration or use Inband Integration under hardware settings The PBX is not programmed properly to support Do required integration APT DPT Integration programming as described in this chapter 10 Start up completed a The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start up has been successful The delay varies according to the system s condition b ON LINE MODE is displayed System prompt gt is displayed on the screen To enter system administration Press ENTER All parameters can be set through the menu driven program 11 Goto the System Administration Top Menu Select 5 and Press ENTER or Type 3 then QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration Instructions TEST Press the INTERCOM button and then 1065 If the VPS answers you have a DPT connection Set the DIP Switch to position 0 after initialization is complete The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX TD500 should be able to communicate through DPT Integration We recommend that the KX TD500 system has any optional extension cards installed and telephones connected before starting the VPS When running the Quick Setup command Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM from the VPS the PBX transmits the station information automatically This saves time when programming the VPS
392. wed 125 by the hash sign 126 Enter the day of the month followed 126 by the pound sign 127 Enter the day followed by the hash 127 sign 128 Enter the day followed by the pound 128 sign 129 Enter the delay time followed by the 129 hash sign 130 Enter the delay time followed by the 130 pound sign 131 Enter the destination mailbox number 131 675 131 674 132 Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the 132 198 199 person s last name 132 133 Enter the first 4 letters of the owner s 133 last name 134 Enter the interview mailbox number 134 135 Enter the last 2 digits of the year 135 followed by the hash sign 136 Enter the last 2 digits of the year 136 followed by the pound sign 137 Enter the mailbox number 137 137 812 137 813 138 Enter the maximum number of caller 138 IDs for caller name announce Valid entries are from 0 to 30 139 Enter the maximum number of 139 messages per mailbox Valid entries are from 5 to 100 140 Enter the month followed by the hash 140 208 sign 141 Enter the month followed by the 141 208 Installation Manual 353 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Table 83 Prompt Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No s No 142 Enter the new time followed by the 142 208 hash sign 143 Enter the new time followed by the 143 208 pound sign 144 Enter the operator
393. will always appear when connecting to another type of PBX Connect a correct PBX and set the PBX type by using Quick Setup see Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM The cabling between the PBX extension ports and the VPS is not 4 wire or is improperly connected Confirm the cabling is connected as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION The PBX is a correct type but does not have the proper software level to support APT DPT Integration Contact National Parts Center at 1 800 833 9626 or use Inband Integration under hardware settings Installation Manual 95 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX Table 17 Cause Remedy The PBX is not programmed properly to support Do required integration APT DPT Integration programming as described in this chapter 10 Start up completed a The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start up has been successful The delay varies according to the system s condition b ON LINE MODE is displayed c System prompt gt is displayed on the screen To enter system administration Press ENTER All parameters can be set through the menu driven program 11 Go to the System Administration Top Menu Select 5 and Press ENTER or Type 3 then QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration Instructions TEST Press the INTERCOM button and then 165 If the VPS
394. x owners to periodically call the VPS to check for messages TEST See if dialing the On code from an SLT can turn on an extension s message waiting indicator Screened Transfer from an SLT The PBX must provide a screened transfer from an SLT for the VPS to function properly A screened transfer 1 Puts the caller on hold usually with a hookswitch flash 2 Dials the extension 3 Checks to see if the called subscriber is in out or on another line and whether or not that subscriber accepts the transfer 4 Completes the transfer by going on hook or returns to the caller to say that the party is busy or not available It then gives the caller an opportunity to leave a message If the PBX does not provide screened transfer from an SLT the VPS cannot give callers the option to leave a message in a subscriber s mailbox 46 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS TEST Place an outside call from an SLT See if you can set up a screened transfer to another extension Next try the same test with an internal call The VPS may have to transfer both types of calls Follow on ID or Called Party ID When forwarding or transferring a call to the VPS a PBX with Follow on ID sends the mailbox number of the called subscriber to the VPS before connecting the caller The VPS responds by playing that subscriber s personal greeting This operation is sometimes called Call F
395. xes Department Dialing Transfers the caller to the Department Dialing menu Dial by Name Requests the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 letters of a last name of the person they wish to reach then transfers him to the corresponding extension Repeat Menu Repeats the Custom Service menu prompts Main Menu Returns the caller to the Custom Service top menu FAX Transfer Allows the caller to send fax messages to an extension specified as the fax extension B5 3 Caller ID Call Routing Parameters Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be assigned to be automatically forwarded to a desired destination The VPS automatically forwards the calls from the assigned Caller ID numbers to a programmed extension mailbox System Group Distribution List included or Custom Service It also forwards Private caller s number is not received and Out of Area calls to a desired extension mailbox or Custom Service The company greetings will not play for calls forwarded by this feature Services have this order of priority Holiday Service gt Caller ID Call Routing gt Trunk Service gt Port Service Holiday Service has the highest priority shown To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing follow the menu path as System Administration Top Menu 1 4 3 Installation Manual 263 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Caller ID Call Routing Enter as shown To access the proper menu for Calle
396. xtension 107 or 108 as the destination not extension 115 or 116 see the following diagram s oe Extension 106 Port 1 Extension 107 Port 2 Extension 108 KX TA series Port 1 Extension 115 Port 2 Extension 116 Installation Manual 57 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS 3 3 4 KX TD500 Programming for Inband Integration with KX TVS80 Whenever possible we recommend that you use DPT Integration However in some cases this is not possible In the following situations you need to use Inband Integration Your PBX is a third party telephone system e You have a KX TD500 but all the extension cards are analog types e You have a KX TD500 but the DHLC DLC cards are ancient versions therefore cannot support DPT Integration 1 Assignment of the extension card to be connected to the VPS a Go to the 1 1 Slot Assignment screen b Assign the slot card type to be installed to DHLC HLC SLC ESLC or SLC M SLT interface supports c Click Apply to save the slot card type assignment d Set Card Status to INS Screen output 1 1 Slot Assignment Basic Shelf Slot Ho Card Type Status INS INS Expansion Shelf 1 Card Type aa Status Expansion Shelf 2 OA C N A A 58 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE S
397. y personal computer connected directly to the RS 232C port of the VPS or 2 remotely personal computer connected via the telephone network and the external modem of the VPS Note Local programming and remote programming are mutually exclusive System Administrator Unlike the Message Manager and the System Manager who use a telephone to perform their duties the System Administrator uses a personal computer to program the VPS The System Administrator s handbook is the Installation Manual System External Message Delivery Duration Time The maximum time allowed for an external message that is to be delivered by the VPS specified by the System Administrator System Group Distribution List The VPS can maintain up to 20 distribution lists each containing a maximum of 20 mailboxes Each list is referenced by a System Group Distribution List number and is assigned via system administration A recording into a System Group Distribution List number will go into the mailboxes of all group members System Manager Mailbox 99 999 9999 or 99999 The person who can perform very basic and limited system programming using a telephone He can create delete mailboxes clear subscriber passwords when they are forgotten set Class of Service parameters set the System Clock and generate System Reports System Report The System Administrator or System Manager can generate 8 System Reports to monitor the VPS operating status as required TIME
398. y Greeting Number 1 32 For Company Name Go to Step 5 For the Department Dialing Menu Go to Step 5 e For the Custom Service Menus Enter a Custom Service Number 1 100 Enter 0 to record the Custom Service exit prompt For the Voice Labels Enter a System Group Distribution Lists number to be labeled The System Administrator assigns list numbers For the Multilingual Selection Menu Go to Step 5 5 The VPS plays the current message Press 1 to change the message If a message has not yet been recorded go to Step 7 6 Press 1 to record the message Press 2 to erase the current message and return to Step 3 or 4 7 Record the message at the tone and Press 1 8 Press 2 to accept the message Note Press 1 to review the recorded message Press 3 to erase the recorded message and try again Return to Step 7 Press 4 to add a message Available with the KX TVS80 only Installation Manual 337 MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Press to erase the recorded message and exit Return to Step 3 9 Repeat Steps 4 8 to record other Company Greetings Custom Service Menus and or Voice Labels Recording User Prompts 1 Log in the Main Menu N Press 5 to modify messages Ge Press 6 to modify user prompts gt Press 1 to change User Prompt 1 or 2 to change User Prompt 2 5 To change specific prompts Go to Step 6 To change all prom
399. y are recorded by the factory in English However the Message Manager can record User 1 Prompts and User 2 Prompts in any language he wishes The Multilingual Selection Menu maximum length 6 min With this menu callers can select the language they prefer to hear all prompts mentioned in the previous paragraph The User Prompts For example the Message Manager can record a menu like this For English press 7 For French press 6 For Chinese press 9 e The System Caller Names maximum length 4 s each Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be registered by the System Administrator The Message Manager is responsible for recording a name for each Caller ID number While the System Administrator programs via a computer the Message Manager cannot record the Voice Labels and System Caller Names The VPS plays Sorry this function is not available 336 Installation Manual MESSAGE MANAGER S GUIDE Recording Menus and Voice Labels 1 Log in the Main Menu 2 Press 5 to modify messages 3 Select the desired number to be recorded 1 Record the Company Greetings 2 Record the Company Name 3 Record the Department Dialing Menu 4 Record the Custom Service Menus 5 Record the Voice Labels for System Group Distribution Lists 7 Record the Multilingual Selection Menu 4 For the item selected in Step 3 follow these steps For the Company Greetings Enter the Compan
400. y or all ports of the VPS Callers reaching these ports immediately access Voice Mail service Voice Mail Trunk This service can be programmed on a per trunk CO line basis Callers reaching these trunks CO lines immediately access Voice Mail service 132 Installation Manual CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM Service Access Command A caller can switch to Voice Mail service by dialing 6 during a call Via Custom Service This service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a Custom Service After pressing this key the caller enters Voice Mail service 5 2 7 Mailbox Groups This program allows a message to be delivered to several mailboxes at once The message activates the message waiting lamps on all of the proprietary telephones These mailboxes may be assembled into a list called a System Group Distribution List The Message Manager can record a voice label for each System Group Distribution List see D6 RECORDING MESSAGES There are 20 group lists available and each group list can have up to 20 entries To establish a mailbox group 1 From the System Administration Top Menu Type 1 5 1 1 1 Program System Parameter System Group Assignment Mailbox Group Enter 2 Assign a List Number to the Mailbox Group This number can be from 2 5 digits same as mailbox numbers This number must be an unused number In other words the number assigned to this group cannot be the same as another System Group Distribution List numb
401. yclic Signal Detection v Continuous Signal Detection 9 Default zl Default zi Silence Detection 3 1 Trunk Group M Apply Cancel Help 66 Installation Manual INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX T PHONE SYSTEMS c Assignment of IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer timer 1 Go to the 2 4 System Timer 1 2 screen 2 Assign Intercept Time parameter 3 Click Apply to save the changed data Note This parameter tells the KX TD500 how long to let call ring at an extension before forwarding redirecting Screen output 2 4 System Timer 1 2 Hold Recall Time 0 240 s Transfer Recall Time 0 48 rings m ring s Pickup Dial Waiting Time 1 5 s Call Duration Count Start b s s s 2 ringes First Digit Time 5 120 s Inter digit Time 1 30 s Intercept Time 1 48 rings Call Forwarding Ho Answer Time 1 12 rings 9 Extension to CO line Call Duration Time 1 64 min on CO to CO Line Call Duration Time 1 64 min min Door Opener Timer 0 10 s Bs 3 3 5 KX TD816 KX TD1232 KX TA 1232 and KX TD308 Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager s Extension Select a maximum of 2 station ports to be connected to the VPS Plug each station into a Voice Mail port Go into System Program 602 and assign the Voice Mail stations to a different extension group By default all stations are in Extension Group 1 Go i
402. yed Delayed 0 60 s Specifies whether the port answers immediately 0 or Answer 0 with delay 1 60 s Time Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Port 1 2 Night Mode To access the proper menu for Night Mode features for the selected port follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 Port No 1 2 2 Port 1 2 Lunch Mode To access the proper menu for Lunch Mode features for the selected port follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 Port No 1 2 3 Port 1 2 Break Mode To access the proper menu for Break Mode features for the selected port follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 Port No 1 2 4 B4 2 Trunk Group Assignment This assignment is effective only with APT DPT Integration With the KX TVS50 the trunk CO line group numbers range from 1 to 24 with the KX TVS80 1 to 48 To access the proper menu for Day Night Lunch or Break Mode for the selected PBX trunk CO line group follow the menu path as shown System Administration Top Menu 1 3 2 Trunk Group No 1 48 Notes For KX TD series except for KX TD500 trunk CO line group number in this section assignment means CO line number The maximum number of trunk CO line groups depends on the VPS model Installation Manual 249 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Trunk 1 48 Day Mode
403. ys on the 0 9 X Others None telephone keypad Callers are able to access these services by pressing the corresponding keys on their telephones a b c d e f g h Transfer to Mailbox Allows the caller to leave messages in a specific mailbox Enter a followed by a mailbox number Transfer to Extension Transfers the caller to a specific extension Enter b followed by an extension number Operator Connects the caller to the operator Exit Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and disconnects the caller The Message Manager is responsible for recording this prompt Previous Menu If programmed returns the caller to the previous menu Custom Service If programmed transfers the caller to another Custom Service Voice Mail Service Allows the caller to access Voice Mail Service Call Transfer Service Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant Service 262 Installation Manual SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 0 k D m n Table 49 Parameter Value Range Description Function Default Keypad a n i Subscriber Service Allows the caller to access Assignment d 0 Subscriber Service If this option is enabled it is 0 9 Others None strongly recommended that each subscriber establish a password this will prevent unauthorized callers from accidentally or intentionally accessing subscribers mailbo
404. ystem you may still program the KX TD1232 but you must program using the Manager s Extension c Verify the ROM version of the KX TD1232 Example P231UYMMDDB This version must be at least version P231U or higher for DPT Integration to be utilized both systems if system connection is being used For KX TD816 the version must be P3010 or higher for KX TA1232 the version must be P831AA or higher If the software version of the PBX is lower than this you may not be able to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration For more information call National Parts Center at 1 800 833 9626 In the example above the underlined digits represent the software production date code year month day Installation Manual 97 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX TA SERIES PBX AND KX TD SERIES PBX 2 Go to the Main Menu Choose System Data Programming BATCH 1 or INTERACTIVE 2 Main Menu 1 System Data Programming BATCH 2 System Data Programming INTERACTIVE 3 Disk File Management 4 DSHS Management 5 DSHS Connect Disconnect 6 Quit Select the number 3 Choose System from the System Data Programming Main Menu System Data Programming Main Menu 1 Line 2 Station 3 System 4 Toll Restriction 5 ARS 6 Aux Ports 7 Additional Function 8 Caller ID Select the number 3 4 Choose Voice Mail Integration from the System Menu System Menu 01 Day Night 14 Oper
405. zed With respect to PBX programming it is possible that Call Forward to CO is disabled To enable VPS Remote Call Forwarding the KX TD1232 for example must be programmed properly For the COS of the extensions whose calls are to be forwarded to a CO line enable the following 504 Call Forward to Outside Line Note The extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is the Message Manager s extension However its default extension number 0 cannot be used with this feature When using this feature you must assign the extension number that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan See Remote Call Forward to CO in Tables 40 and 41 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See C3 SETTING COS CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS See D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET See Remote Call Forwarding Set in Glossary See 4 16 Remote Call Forwarding Set in the Subscriber s Guide Installation Manual 2 9 SYSTEM FEATURES Table 34 FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES Rotary Telephone provides guidance to callers using rotary See Other Parameters Rotary Service telephone systems or when several seconds Telephone Service in pass without anything being entered by the caller B6 7 Other Parameters See Rotary Telephone in Glossary Service Access Commands allow the caller to directly access several standard features 0 to repeat the Help Menu or cal

Panasonic Voice Mail Installation_Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents